diff options
Diffstat (limited to '10908-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/10908-h.htm | 22012 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 60211 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 72373 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30512 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig004.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26341 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29730 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig006.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33964 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig007.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24910 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig008.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27163 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig009.jpg | bin | 0 -> 16431 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig010.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29706 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig011.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20076 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig012.jpg | bin | 0 -> 25569 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig013.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26659 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig014.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27093 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig015.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28083 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig016.jpg | bin | 0 -> 63692 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig017.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15713 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig018.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15597 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig019.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53617 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig020.jpg | bin | 0 -> 44339 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig021.jpg | bin | 0 -> 38196 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig022.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29348 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig023.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3710 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig024.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3275 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig025.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1447 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig026.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1022 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig027.jpg | bin | 0 -> 34965 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig028.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9481 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig029.jpg | bin | 0 -> 17643 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig030.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33397 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig031.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26592 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig032.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12848 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig033.jpg | bin | 0 -> 86540 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig034.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35755 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig035.jpg | bin | 0 -> 34780 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig036.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9933 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig037.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29718 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig038.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9926 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig039.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29266 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig040.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8279 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig041.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12384 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig042.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15811 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig043.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9386 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig044.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23449 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 10908-h/fig045.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21670 bytes |
46 files changed, 22012 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/10908-h/10908-h.htm b/10908-h/10908-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5eb3e68 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/10908-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,22012 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"> +<html lang="en"> + +<head> + <title>Manual of Infantry</title> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> + <meta name="keywords" content="manual, infantry, officers, army"> + <meta name="rating" content="General"> + <meta name="robots" content="all"> + <style type="text/css"> + <!-- + BODY { background: white; + margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; } + P.indent { text-indent: 3mm; text-align: justify; } + P.contents { text-align: justify; + text-indent: -5mm; margin-left: 5mm; } + P.glossary { text-align: justify; + text-indent: -5mm; margin-left: 5mm; } + P.center { text-align: center; } + P.subtitle { text-align: center; font-size: large; + font-weight: bold; } + P.right { text-align: right; } + P.footnote { font-size: smaller; } + H1 { text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; } + H2 { text-align: center; margin-top: 4em; } + H3 { text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; } + H4 { text-align: center; } + HR.bar { color: #000000; height: 1mm; + width: 10% } + DIV.center { text-align: center; } + TABLE.left { float: left; margin: 2mm; } + TABLE.right { float: right; margin: 2mm; } + TD.half { text-align: left; width: 50%; } + TD.left { text-align: left; } + TD.right { text-align: right; } + TD.center { text-align: center; } + SPAN.big { font-size: xx-large; } + --> + </style> +</head> + +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and +Privates of Infantry of the Army of the United States, 1917, by War Department + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of Infantry of the + Army of the United States, 1917 + To be used by Engineer companies (dismounted) and Coast Artillery + companies for Infantry instruction and training + + +Author: War Department + +Release Date: April 10, 2004 [EBook #10908] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR INFANTRY *** + + + + +Produced by Robert J. Hall + + + + + +</pre> + + +<h1> +MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES OF INFANTRY OF +THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES +</h1> + +<p class="subtitle"> +1917 +</p> + +<p class="center"> +To be used by Engineer companies (dismounted) and Coast Artillery +companies for Infantry instruction and training. +</p> + +<p> </p> +<p class="center"> +WAR DEPARTMENT<br> +Document No. 574<br> +OFFICE OF THE ADJUTANT GENERAL +</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> + +<tr><td class="right"> +WAR DEPARTMENT, +</td></tr> + +<tr><td class="right"> +WASHINGTON, <i>April 14, 1917.</i> +</td></tr> + +<tr><td class="left"><p class="indent"> +The following Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates +of Infantry of the Army of the United States is approved and +herewith published for the information and government of all +concerned. +</p></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="left"><p class="indent"> +This manual will also be used by Engineer companies (dismounted) +and Coast Artillery companies in connection with Infantry instruction +and training prescribed by the War Department. +</p></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="left"><p class="indent"> +By ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR: +</p></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="right"> +H. L. SCOTT, +</td></tr> + +<tr><td class="right"> +<i>Major General, Chief of Staff.</i> +</td></tr> + +<tr><td class="left"> + OFFICIAL:<br> + H. P. McCAIN.<br> + <i>The Adjutant General.</i> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<h2>TABLE OF CONTENTS.</h2> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#I">CHAPTER I. MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY</a><br> +Section 1. Oath of enlistment<br> +Section 2. Obedience<br> +Section 3. Loyalty<br> +Section 4. Discipline<br> +Section 5. Military courtesy<br> +Section 6. Saluting<br> +Section 7. Rules governing saluting<br> +Section 8. Courtesies in conversation +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#II">CHAPTER II. ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT</a><br> +Section 1. The rifle<br> +Section 2. Care of the rifle<br> +Section 3. Cleaning the rifle<br> +Section 4. Uniforms<br> +Section 5. The service kit<br> +Section 6. The surplus kit<br> +Section 7. Assembling Infantry equipment +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#III">CHAPTER III. RATIONS AND FORAGE</a><br> +Section 1. The ration<br> +Section 2. Individual cooking<br> +Section 3. The forage ration +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#IV">CHAPTER IV. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE +FEET</a> +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#V">CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, +1911</a><br> +Section l. Definitions<br> +Section 2. Introduction<br> +Section 3. Orders, commands, and signals<br> +Section 4. School of the soldier<br> +Section 5. School of the squad<br> +Section 6. School of the company<br> +Section 7. Company inspection<br> +Section 8. Manual of tent pitching<br> +Section 9. Manual of the bayonet +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#VI">CHAPTER VI. FIELD SERVICE</a><br> +Section 1. Principles of Infantry training<br> +Section 2. Combat<br> +Section 3. Patrolling<br> +Section 4. Advance guards<br> +Section 5. Rear guards<br> +Section 6. Flank guards<br> +Section 7. Outposts<br> +Section 8. Rifle trenches +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#VII">CHAPTER VII. MARCHING AND CAMPING</a><br> +Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march<br> +Section 2. Marching<br> +Section 3. Making camp<br> +Section 4. Camp services and duties +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#VIII">CHAPTER VIII. TARGET PRACTICE</a><br> +Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship<br> +Section 2. Sight adjustment<br> +Section 3. Table of sight corrections<br> +Section 4. Aiming<br> +Section 5. Battle sight<br> +Section 6. Trigger squeeze<br> +Section 7. Firing positions<br> +Section 8. Calling the shot<br> +Section 9. Coordination<br> +Section 10. Advice to riflemen<br> +Section 11. The course in small-arms firing<br> +Section 12. Targets<br> +Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#IX">CHAPTER IX. EXTRACTS PROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR +GUARD DUTY</a><br> +Section 1. Introduction<br> +Section 2. Classification of interior guilds<br> +Section 3. Details and rosters<br> +Section 4. Commander of the guard<br> +Section 5. Sergeant of the guard<br> +Section 6. Corporal of the guard<br> +Section 7. Musicians of the guard<br> +Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels<br> +Section 9. Privates of the guard<br> +Section 10. Orders for sentinels<br> +Section 11. Countersigns and paroles<br> +Section 12. Guard patrols<br> +Section 13. Watchmen<br> +Section 14. Compliments from guards<br> +Section 15. Prisoners<br> +Section 16. Guarding prisoners<br> +Section 17. Flags<br> +Section 18. Reveille and retreat gun<br> +Section 19. Guard mounting<br> +Section 20. Formal guard mounting for Infantry<br> +Section 21. Informal guard mounting for Infantry<br> +Section 22. Relieving the old guard +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#X">CHAPTER X. MAP READING AND SKETCHING</a><br> +Section 1. Military map reading<br> +Section 2. Sketching +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#XI">CHAPTER XI. MESSAGE BLANKS</a> +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#XII">CHAPTER XII. SIGNALS AND CODES</a> +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#XIII">CHAPTER XIII. FIRST-AID RULES</a> +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#XIV">CHAPTER XIV. LAWS AND REGULATIONS</a><br> +Section 1. General provisions<br> +Section 2. The Army of the United States<br> +Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned +officers<br> +Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers<br> +Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#XV">CHAPTER XV. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY</a> +</p> + +<p class="contents"> +<a href="#APPENDIX">APPENDIX. FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT</a> +</p> + +<h2><a name="I">CHAPTER I.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Oath of enlistment.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Every soldier on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself the +following obligation: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"I,--------, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true +faith and allegiance to the United States of America; that I will +serve them honestly and faithfully against all their enemies +whomsoever; and that I will obey the orders of the President of +the United States, and the orders of the officers appointed over +me according to the Rules and Articles of War." (109th Article +of War.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Obedience.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The very first paragraph in the Army Regulations reads: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"All persons in the military service are required to <b>obey +strictly</b> and to <b>execute promptly</b> the lawful orders of +their superiors." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the +foundation upon which all military efficiency is built. Without +it an army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a +mob and becomes possessed of much of the power of an organized +force. It is a quality that is demanded of every person in the +Army, from the highest to the lowest. Each enlisted man binds +himself, by his enlistment oath, to obedience. Each officer, in +accepting his commission, must take upon himself the same solemn +obligation. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawful orders of your +superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving the order, +whether he be an officer, a noncommissioned officer, or a private +acting as such, is your lawful superior. You may not like him, +you may not respect him, but you must respect his position and +authority, and reflect honor and credit upon yourself and your +profession by yielding to all superiors that complete and +unhesitating obedience which is the pleasure as well as the duty +of every true soldier. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Orders must be <b>strictly</b> carried out. It is not sufficient to +comply with only that part which suits you or which involves no +work or danger or hardship. Nor is it proper or permissible, when +you are ordered to do a thing in a certain way or to accomplish a +work in a definitely prescribed manner, for you to obtain the +same results by other methods. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Obedience must be <b>prompt and unquestioning</b>. When any soldier +(and this word includes officers as well as enlisted men) receives +an order, it is not for him to consider whether the order is +a good one or not, whether it would have been better had such +an order never been given, or whether the duty might be better +performed by some one else, or at some other time, or in some +other manner. His duty is, first, to understand just what the +order requires, and, second, to proceed at once to carry out +the order to the best of his ability. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certain +independence in the execution of the tasks to which they are +assigned and are expected to show initiative in meeting the different +situations as they arise. Every individual, from the highest +commander to the lowest private, must always remember that inaction +and neglect of opportunities will warrant more severe censure +than an error in the choice of the means." (<i>Preface, Field +Service Regulations.</i>) +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Loyalty.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to measure +up to that high standard of duty which is at once the pride and +glory of every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires +and wishes of your superiors in a hearty, willing, and cheerful +manner are you meeting all the requirements of your profession. +For an order is but the will of your superior, however it may be +expressed. Loyalty means that you are for your organization and +its officers and noncommissioned officers--not against them; that +you always extend your most earnest and hearty support to those in +authority. No soldier is a loyal soldier who is a knocker or a +grumbler or a shirker. Just one man of this class in a company +breeds discontent and dissatisfaction among many others. You should, +therefore, not only guard against doing such things yourself but +should discourage such actions among any of your comrades. +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Discipline.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey +strictly and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their +superiors. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kindness, +and justice. Punishments must conform to law and follow offenses +as promptly as circumstances will permit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"3. Superiors are forbidden to injure those under their authority +by tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive language. While +maintaining discipline and the thorough and prompt performance +of military duty, all officers, in dealing with enlisted men, +will bear in mind the absolute necessity of so treating them as +to preserve their self-respect. Officers will keep in as close +touch as possible with the men under their command and will strive +to build up such relations of confidence and sympathy as will +insure the free approach of their men to them for counsel and +assistance. This relationship may be gained and maintained without +relaxation of the bonds of discipline and with great benefit to +the service as a whole. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"4. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; +respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, +but will be extended on all occasions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"5. Deliberations or discussions among military men conveying +praise or censure, or any mark of approbation, toward others in +the military service, and all publications relating to private +or personal transactions between officers are prohibited. Efforts +to influence legislation affecting the Army or to procure personal +favor or consideration should never be made except through regular +military channels; the adoption of any other method by any officer +or enlisted man will be noted in the military record of those +concerned," (<i>Army Regulations</i>.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"The discipline which makes the soldier of a free country reliable +in battle is not to be gained by harsh or tyrannical treatment. +On the contrary, such treatment is far more likely to destroy +than to make an army. It is possible to import instruction and +give commands in such manner and in such tone of voice as to +inspire in the soldier no feeling but an intense desire to obey, +while the opposite manner and tone of voice can not fall to excite +strong resentment and a desire to disobey. The one mode or the +other of dealing with subordinates springs from a corresponding +spirit in the breast of the commander. He who feels the respect +which is due to others can not fail to inspire in them regard +for himself, while he who feels, and hence manifests, disrespect +toward others, especially his inferiors, can not fail to inspire +hatred against himself," (<i>Address of Maj. Gen. John M. Schofield +to the United States Corps of Cadets, Aug, 11, 1879.</i>) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have learned +your duties, and obedience becomes second nature, you have acquired +discipline. It call not be acquired in a day or a month. It is +a growth. It is the habit of obedience. To teach this habit of +obedience is the main object of the close-order drill, and, if +good results are to be expected, the greatest attention must be +paid to even the smallest details. The company or squad must +be formed promptly at the prescribed time--not a minute or even +a second late. All must wear the exact uniform prescribed and +in the exact manner prescribed. When at attention there must +be no gazing about, no raising of hands, no chewing or spitting +in ranks. The manual of arms and all movements must be executed +absolutely as prescribed. A drill of this kind teaches discipline. +A careless, sloppy drill breeds disobedience and insubordination. +In other words, discipline simply means <b>efficiency</b>. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Military courtesy.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good breeding +are always respectful and courteous to those about them. It helps +to make life move along more smoothly. In civil life this courtesy +is shown by the custom of tipping the hat to ladies, shaking +hands with friends. and greeting persons with a nod or a friendly +"Good morning," etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the Army courtesy is just us necessary, and for the same reasons. +It helps to keep the great machine moving without friction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; +respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but +will be extended on all occasions." (<i>Par. 4, Army Regulations, +1913.</i>) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One method of extending this courtesy is by saluting. When in +ranks the question of what a private should do is simple--he +obeys any command that is given. It is when out of ranks that +a private must know how and when to salute. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. Saluting.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed to carry +weapons, and when they met each would hold up his right hand to +show that he had no weapon in it and that they met as friends. +Slaves or serfs, however, were not allowed to carry weapons, +and slunk past the free men without making any sign. In this +way the salute came to be the symbol or sign by which soldiers +(free men) might recognize each other. The lower classes began +to imitate the soldiers in this respect, although in a clumsy, +apologetic way, and thence crept into civil life the custom of +raising the hand or nodding as one passed an acquaintance. The +soldiers, however, kept their individual salute, and purposely +made it intricate and difficult to learn in order that it could be +acquired only by the constant training all real soldiers received. +To this day armies have preserved their salute, and when correctly +done it is at once recognized and never mistaken for that of the +civilian. All soldiers should be careful to execute the salute +exactly as prescribed. The civilian or the imitation soldier +who tries to imitate the military salute invariably makes some +mistake which shows that he is not a real soldier; he gives it +in an apologetic manner, he fails to stand or march at attention, +his coat is unbuttoned or hat on awry, or he falls to look the +person saluted in the eye. There is a wide difference in the +method of rendering and meaning between the civilian salute as +used by friends in passing, or by servants to their employers, +and the MILITARY SALUTE, the symbol and sign of the military +profession. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To salute with the hand</b>, first assume the position of a soldier +or march at attention. Look the officer you are to salute straight +in the eye. Then, when the proper distance separates you, raise +the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm +inclined at about 45°, hand and wrist straight. Continue to look +the officer you are saluting straight in the Eye and keep your +hand in the position of salute until the officer acknowledges +the salute or until he has passed. Then drop the hand smartly +to the side. The salute is given with the right hand only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To salute with the rifle</b>, bring the rifle to right shoulder +arms if not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the small +of the stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb +and fingers extended and joined, forefinger touching the end of +the cocking piece. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When +the officer has acknowledged the salute or has passed, drop the +left hand smartly to the side and turn the head and eyes to the +front. The rifle salute may also be executed from the order or +trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill Regulations, and paragraph +111, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To salute with the saber</b>, bring the saber to order saber if +not already there, raise and carry the saber to the front, base of +the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck, +edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the +hilt, thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping +the grip. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When the officer +has acknowledged the salute or has passed, lower the saber, point +in prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to +the left, hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended, +and return to the order saber. If mounted, the hand is held behind +the thigh, point a little to the right and front of the stirrup. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(FOR CAVALRY.) <b>To salute with the saber</b>, bring the saber to +carry saber if not already there, carry the saber to the front with +arm half extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front +of the chin, the blade vertical, guard to the left, all four +fingers grasping the grip, the thumb extending along the back +in the groove, the fingers pressing the back of the grip against +the heel of the hand. Look the officer saluted in the eye. When +the officer has acknowledged the salute or has passed, bring +the saber down with the blade against the hollow of the right +shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the third +and fourth finger on the back of the grip and the elbow back. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>pistol</b> is not carried in the hand but in the holster, +therefore when armed with the pistol salute with the hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Always stand or march at attention before and during the salute. +The hat should be on straight, coat completely buttoned up, and +hands out of the pockets. +</p> + +<h3>Section 7. Rules governing saluting.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>759.</b> (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and +enlisted men not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, +or mess, on every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being +addressed, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting +first. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted +men the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, +when all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until +the officer leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men +at meals stop eating and remain seated at attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, +faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing, he +faces an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain +in the same place or on the same ground, such compliments need +not be repeated. Soldiers actually at work do not cease work +to salute an officer unless addressed by him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(4) Before addressing an officer an enlisted man makes the prescribed +salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with +the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a +reply. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers +and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in +hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior +guard duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted +men salute military persons with the right-hand salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes +in a military manner, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted +men saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted +all entitled to the salute shall return it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign +conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before +addressing a superior officer not mounted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, +but shall come to attention if at rest or at ease. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. +In general, it does not exceed 30 paces. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a +body of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite +the post of the commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street +cars, and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal +salutes may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to +disturb or annoy civilians present. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same +compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and +Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers +of their own regiment, corps, or arm of service. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the +foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed +with the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the +proper performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute +us prescribed in drill regulations. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>760</b>. (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will +salute officers of grades higher than the person commanding the +unit, by first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as +required by subparagraph (5). paragraph 759. If the person saluted +is of a junior or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention +in the exchange of salutes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders +will exchange salutes, both commands being at attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>761</b>. Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops +actually engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under +campaign or simulated campaign condition. Troops on the service of +security pay no compliments whatever. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>762</b>. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) +and armed with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought +to <b>present arms</b> or <b>present sabers</b> before its commander +salutes in the following cases: When the National Anthem is played, +or when <b>to the color</b> or <b>to the standard</b> is sounded +during ceremonies, or when a person is saluted who is its immediate +or higher commander or a general officer, or when the national or +regimental color is saluted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>763</b>. At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command +shall render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position +of salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at +retreat and during ceremonies when <b>to the color</b> is played, if +no band is present. If not under arms, the organizations shall +be brought to attention at the first note of the National Anthem, +<b>to the color</b> or <b>to the standard</b>, and the salute rendered +by the officer or noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in +regulations, as amended herein. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>764</b>. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when +persons belonging to the military service are present, all officers +and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing +toward the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward +the flag). If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian +clothes, uncovered, they shall, salute at the first note of the +anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of +the anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover +at the first note of the anthem, holding the headdress opposite +the left shoulder and so remain until its close, except that +in inclement weather the headdress may be slightly raised. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The same rules apply when <b>to the color</b> or <b>to the standard</b> +is sounded as when the National Anthem is played. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When played by an army band, the National Anthem shall be played +through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated +to make it complete. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the +playing of the National Anthem of the United States shall be +shown toward the national anthem of any other country when played +upon official occasions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>765</b>. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will +render honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as +required by subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress +and covered, they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite +the left shoulder with the right hand; if uncovered, they will +salute with the right-hand salute." (<i>Infantry Drill Regulations, +1911.</i>) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The national flag belonging to dismounted organizations is called +a color; to mounted organizations, a standard. An uncased color +is one that is not in its waterproof cover. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Privates do not salute noncommissioned officers. Prisoners are +not permitted to salute; they merely come to attention if not +actually at work. The playing of the National Anthem as a part +of a medley is prohibited in the military service. +</p> + +<h3>Section 8. Courtesies in conversation.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +In speaking to an officer, always stand at attention and use the +word "Sir." Examples: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sir, Private Brown, Company B, reports as orderly." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sir, the first sergeant directed me to report to the captain." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Question by an officer:) "To what company do you belong?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Answer:) "Company H, sir." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Question by an officer:) "Has first call for drill sounded?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Answer:) "No, sir;" or "Yes; sir.; it sounded about five minutes +ago." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Question by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where Major +Smith's tent is?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(Answer:) "Yes; sir; I'll take you to it." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Does the Lieutenant wish," etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Did the Captain send for me?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In delivering a message from one officer to another, always use +the form similar to the following: "Lieutenant A presents his +compliments to Captain B and states," etc. This form is not used +when the person sending or receiving the message is an enlisted +man. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their +titles, thus: Sergeant B, Private C. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="393"> +<tr><td> + <img src="fig001.jpg" width="389" height="633" alt="Fig. 1"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<h2><a name="II">CHAPTER II.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. The rifle.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The rifle now used by the Army of the United States is the United +States magazine rifle, model of 1903, caliber .30. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It is 43.212 inches long and weighs 8.69 pounds. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The bayonet weighs 1 pound and the blade is 16 inches long. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The rifle is sighted for ranges up to 2,850 yards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The maximum range, when elevated at an angle of 45 degrees, is +4,891 yards (389 yards less than 3 miles). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The smooth bore of the rifle is 0.30 inch in diameter. It is +then rifled 0.004 inch deep, making the diameter from the bottom +of one groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308 inch. +The rifling makes one complete turn in each 10 inches of the +barrel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The accompanying plate shows the names of the principal parts +of the rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The only parts of a rifle that an enlisted man is permitted to +take apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine mechanism. +Learn how to do this from your squad leader, for you must know +how in order to keep your rifle clean. Never remove the hand +guard or the trigger guard, nor take the sights apart unless you +have special permission from a commissioned officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cartridge used for the rifle is called the .30-caliber model +1906 cartridge. There are four types of cartridges. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>ball cartridge</b> consists of the brass case or shell, the +primer, the charge of smokeless powder, and the bullet. The bullet +has a sharp point, is composed of a lead core and a jacket of cupro +nickel, and weighs 150 grains. The bullet of this cartridge, +when fired from the rifle, starts with an initial velocity at +the muzzle of 2,700 feet per second. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>blank cartridge</b> contains a paper cup instead of a bullet. +It is dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing with blank cartridges at +a represented enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>guard cartridge</b> has a smaller charge of powder than the +ball cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the body of the shell +at about the middle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. +It is intended for use on guard or in riot duty, and gives good +results up to 200 yards. The range of 100 yards requires a sight +elevation of 450 yards, and the range of 200 yards requires all +elevation of 650 yards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>dummy cartridge</b>is tin plated and the shell is provided with +six longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes. The primer +contains no percussion composition. It is intended for drill +purposes to accustom the soldier to the operation of loading the +rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All cartridges are secured five in a clip to enable five cartridges +to be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Sixty ball cartridges +in 12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to facilitate issue +and carrying. When full the bandoleer weighs about 3.88 pounds. +Bandoleers are packed 20 in a box, or 1,200 rounds in all. The +full box weighs 99 pounds. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Care of the rifle.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Every part of the rifle must be kept free from rust, dust, and +dirt, A dirty or rusty rifle is a sure sign that the soldier +does not realize the value of his weapon, and that his training +is incomplete. The rifle you are armed with is the most accurate +in the world. If it gets dirty or rusty it will deteriorate in +its accuracy and working efficiency, and no subsequent care will +restore it to its original condition. The most important part +of the rifle to keep clean is the bore. If, after firing, the +bore is left dirty over night, it will be badly rusted in the +morning, therefore your rifle must be cleaned not later than +the evening of the day on which it was fired. The fouling of +the blank cartridge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling +of the ball cartridge. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Never attempt to polish any part that is blued. If rust appears, +remove, by rubbing with oil. Never use emery paper, pomade, or +any preparation that cuts or scratches, to clean any part of +the rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed oil. The +use of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Always handle your rifle with care. Don't throw it around as +though it were a club. Don't stand it up against anything so +that it rests against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper +or a rag in the bore: it will cause rust to form at that point. +It may also cause the gun barrel to burst if a shot is fired +before removing it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Guard the sights and muzzle carefully from any blow that might +injure them. The front sight cover should always be on the rifle +except when rifle is being fired. This is especially necessary to +protect the front sight while rifle is being carried in scabbard +by a mounted man. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In coming to the "order arms," lower the piece gently to the ground. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When there is a cartridge in the chamber the piece is always +carried locked. In this position the safety lock should be kept +turned fully to the right, since if it be turned to the left +nearly to the "ready" position and the trigger be pulled, the +rifle will be discharged when the safety lock is turned to the +"ready" position at any time later on. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the bolt +is drawn fully to the rear. When the bolt is closed, or only +partly open, the cut-off may be turned up or down as desired, +but if the bolt is drawn fully to the rear, the magazine can not +be cut off unless the top cartridge or the follower be pressed +down slightly and the bolt be pushed forward so that the cut-off +may be turned "off." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the case of a misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as +it may be a hangfire. Misfires are often due to the fact that +the bolt handle was not fully pressed down. Sometimes in pulling +the trigger the soldier raises the bolt handle without knowing +it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Unless otherwise ordered, arms will be unloaded before being +taken to quarters or tents, or as soon as the men using them are +relieved from duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep the working parts oiled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In every company there should be at least one copy of the Manual +of the Ordnance Department entitled "Description and Rules for +the Management of the U. S, Magazine Rifle." This manual gives +the name and a cut of every part of the rifle, explains its use, +shows how to take the rifle apart and care for the same, and +also gives much other valuable and interesting information. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Cleaning the rifle.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +"Cleaning the rifle,--(<i>a</i>) The proper care of the bore +requires conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the +attainment of reduced labor of cleaning, prolonged accuracy life of +the barrel, and better results in target practice. Briefly stated, +the care of the bore consists in removing the fouling, resulting +from firing, to obtain a chemically clean surface, and in coating +this surface with a film of oil to prevent rusting. The fouling +which results from firing is of two kinds--one, the products +of combustion of the powder; the other, cupro-nickel scraped +off (under the abrading action of irregularities or grit in the +bore). Powder fouling, because of its acid reaction, is highly +corrosive; that is, it will induce rust and must be removed. +Metal fouling of itself is inactive, but may cover powder fouling +and prevent the action of cleaning agents until removed, and when +accumulated in noticeable quantities it reduces the accuracy of +the rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing with hot +soda solution, but this solution has no effect on the metal fouling +of cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore, to remove all metal +fouling before assurance can be had that all powder fouling, has +been removed and that the bore may be safely oiled. Normally, +after firing a barrel in good condition the metal fouling is +so slight as to be hardly perceptible. It is merely a smear of +infinitesimal thickness, easily removed by solvents of cupro-nickel. +However, due to pitting, the presence of dust, other abrasives, +or to accumulation, metal fouling may occur in clearly visible +flakes or patches of much greater thickness, much more difficult +to remove. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) In cleaning the bore after firing it is well to proceed +as follows: Swab out the bore with soda solution (subparagraph +<i>j</i>) to remove powder fouling. A convenient method is to insert +the muzzle of the rifle into the can containing the soda solution +and, with the cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the +barrel full a few times. Remove and dry with a couple of patches. +Examine the bore to see that there are in evidence no patches of +metal fouling which, if present, can be readily detected by the +naked eye, then swab out with the swabbing solution--a dilute +metal-fouling solution (subparagraph j). The amount of swabbing +required with the swabbing solution can be determined only by +experience, assisted by the color of the patches. Swabbing should +be continued, however, as long as the wiping patch is discolored +by a bluish-green stain. Normally a couple of minutes' work is +sufficient. Dry thoroughly and oil. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows: Wipe +the cleaning roll dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly saturate +it with sperm oil or warmed cosmic, being sure that the cosmic +has penetrated the patch; scrub the bore with the patch, finally +drawing the patch smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing +the cleaning rod to turn with the rifling. The bore will be found +now to be smooth and bright so that any subsequent rust and sweating +can be easily detected by inspection. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) If patches of metal fouling are seen upon visual +inspection of the bore the standard metal fouling solution prepared +as hereinafter prescribed must be used. After scrubbing out with +the soda solution, plug the bore from the breech with a cork +at the front end of the chamber or where the rifling begins. +Slip a 2-inch section of rubber hose over the muzzle down to the +sight and fill with the standard solution to at least one-half +inch above the muzzle of the barrel. Let it stand for 30 minutes, +pour out the standard solution, remove hose and breech plug, +and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to neutralize and +remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling. Wipe the barrel +clean, dry, and oil. With few exceptions, one application is +sufficient, but if all fouling is not removed, as determined by +careful visual inspection of the bore and of the wiping patches, +repeat as described above. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution +or the standard solution, as has just been described, the bore +should be clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure +of safety a patch should always be run through the bore on the +next day and the bore and wiping patch examined to insure that +cleaning has been properly accomplished. The bore should then +be oiled, as described above. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>g</i>) If the swabbing solution or the standard metal-fouling +solution is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as already +described, with the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light +oil. At the end of 24 hours it should again be cleaned, when it +will usually be found to have "sweated"; that is, rust having +formed under the smear of metal fouling where powder fouling was +present, the surface is puffed up. Usually a second cleaning is +sufficient, but to insure safety it should be again examined at +the end of a few days, before final oiling. The swabbing solution +should always be used, if available, for it must be remembered +that each puff when the bore "sweats" is an incipient rust pit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>h</i>) A clean dry surface having been obtained, to prevent +rust it is necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a +film of neutral oil. If the protection required is but temporary +and the arm is to be cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil +may be used. This is easily applied and easily removed, but has +not sufficient body to hold its surface for more than a few days. +If rifles are to be prepared for storage or shipment, a heavier +oil, such as cosmic, must be used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>i</i>) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be +cleaned with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution +as described above. Care should be taken, insured by careful +inspection on succeeding day or days, that the cleaning is properly +done and all traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore is then +ready to be coated with cosmic. At ordinary temperatures cosmic +is not fluid. In order, therefore, to insure that every part of +the surface is coated with a film of oil the cosmic should be +warmed. Apply the cosmic first with a brush; then, with the breech +plugged, fill the barrel to the muzzle, pour out the surplus, +remove the breechblock, and allow to drain. It is believed that +more rifles are ruined by improper preparation for storage than +from any other cause. If the bore is not clean when oiled--that +is, if powder fouling is present or rust has started--a half +inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop its action, and the +barrel will be ruined. Remember that the surface must be perfectly +cleaned before the heavy oil is applied. If the instructions +as given above are carefully followed, arms may be stored for +years without harm. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>j</i>) Preparation of solutions: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Soda solution</i>--This should be a saturated solution or sal +soda (bicarbonate of soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent +is necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions +is the model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sal soda, one-fourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Swabbing solution</i>.--Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, +one-half spoonful smoothed off. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or +12 spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the ammonia. +Keep in tightly corked bottle; pour out only what is necessary +at the time, and keep the bottle corked. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Standard metal fouling solution</i>.--Ammonium persulphate, +1 ounce, or 2 medium heaping spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths pint, or 12 +spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in the +water and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to stand +for one hour before using. It should be kept in a strong bottle, +tightly corked. The solution should not be used more than twice, +and used solution should not be mixed with unused solution, but +should be bottled separately, The solution, when mixed, should +be used within 30 days! Care should be exercised in mixing and +using this solution to prevent injury to the rifle. An experienced +noncommissioned officer should mix the solution and superintend +its use. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable action +on steel when not exposed to the air, but if allowed to evaporate +on steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, therefore, be taken +that none spills on the mechanism and that the barrel is washed out +promptly with soda solution. The first application of soda solution +removes the greater portion of the powder fouling and permits a +more effective and economical use of the ammonia solution. These +ammonia solutions are expensive and should be used economically. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>k</i>) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished +steel surface rusts much less easily than one which is roughened: +also that a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than one +which is smooth. Every effort, therefore, should be made to prevent +the formation of pits, which are merely enlarged rust spots, and +which not only affect the accuracy of the arm but increase the +labor of cleaning. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>l</i>) The chambers of rifles are frequently neglected because +they are not readily inspected. Care should be taken to see that +they are cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber +delays greatly the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes\ +shells to stick. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>m</i>) A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. +Rifles should always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoiding +possible injury to the rifling at the muzzle, which would affect +the shooting adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches at +the muzzle is perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have +little effect on the accuracy of the rifle. The rifle should be +cleaned as soon as the firing for the day is completed. The +fouling is easier to remove then, and if left longer it will +corrode the barrel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>n</i>) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for +the care of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention +should be paid to cleaning the chamber of the pistol, using the +soda solution. It has been found that the chamber pits readily if +it is not carefully cleaned, with the result that the operation +of the pistol is made less certain." (<i>Par. 134, Small Arms +Firing Manual, 1913.</i>) +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Uniforms.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Uniforms and clothing issued to enlisted men must not be sold, +pawned, loaned, given away, lost or damaged through neglect or +carelessness. Any soldier who violates this rule may be tried +by a military court and punished. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men, +whether or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain the +property of the United States and do not become the property of +the soldier either before or after discharge from the service. +Under the law a soldier honorably discharged from the Army of +the United States is authorized to wear his uniform from the +place of his discharge to his home within three months after the +date of such discharge. To wear the uniform after three months +from the date of such discharge renders such person liable to +fine or imprisonment, or both. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The dress uniform (the blue uniform) consists of the dress cap, +dress coat, dress trousers, and russet-leather shoes. The straight, +standing, military, white linen collar, showing no opening in front, +is always worn with this uniform, with not to exceed one-half +inch showing above the collar of the coat. Turndown, piccadilly, +or roll collars are not authorized. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt (or +russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The full-dress uniform is the same as the dress uniform, with +the breast cord added. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The service uniform is either cotton (summer) or woolen (winter) +olive drab. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For duty in the field it consists of the service hat, with cord +sewed on, service coat or sweater, service breeches, olive-drab +flannel shirt, leggings, russet-leather shoes, and identification +tag. In cold weather olive-drab woolen gloves are worn; at other +times, no gloves. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When not in the field, the service cap is worn instead of the +campaign hat. Under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt +(or russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Wear the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding officer, +whether you are on duty or off duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Never wear a mixed uniform, as, for instance, a part of the service +uniform with the blue uniform. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Never wear any part of the uniform with civilian clothes. It +is very unsoldierly, for example, to wear a civilian overcoat +over the uniform or to wear the uniform overcoat over a civilian +suit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as possible. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Rips and tears should be promptly mended. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should be promptly +replaced. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +There is but one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap. Never +wear it on the back or side of the head. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The service hat should be worn in the regulation shape, peaked, +with four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on. Do not cover +it with pen or pencil mark. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Never appear outside your room or tent with your coat or olive-drab +shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chevrons, service +stripes, and campaign medals and badges are a part of the uniform +and must be worn as prescribed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-drab shirts +are prescribed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Never appear in breeches without leggings. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Leather leggings should be kept polished. Canvas leggings should +be scrubbed when dirty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean and polished. +The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and the collar +hooked. When the belt is worn it will be worn outside the overcoat. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. The service kit.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The service kit is composed of two parts--(<i>a</i>) the field kit, +which includes everything the soldier wears or carries with him +in the field, and (<i>b</i>) the surplus kit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The field kit consists of-- +</p> + +<p> +(<i>a</i>) The clothing worn on the person.<br> +(<i>b</i>) Arms and equipment, consisting of-- +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN.[1] +</p> + +<p> +1 first-aid packet.<br> +1 pouch for first-aid packet.<br> +1 canteen.<br> +1 canteen cover.<br> +1 can, bacon.<br> +1 can, condiment.<br> +1 pack carrier (except individually mounted men).<br> +1 haversack (except individually mounted men).<br> +1 meat can.<br> +1 cup.<br> +1 knife.<br> +1 fork.<br> +1 spoon.<br> +1 shelter tent half.<br> +1 shelter tent pole (when issued).<br> +5 shelter tent pins.<br> +1 identification tag with tape. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 1: New model equipment, 1910. The old model equipment +is the same except omit canteen cover, bacon and condiment cans, +and pack carrier, and add 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, 1 canteen +strap, and 1 blanket-roll straps, set.] +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN ARMED WITH THE RIFLE. +</p> + +<p> +1 United States magazine rifle, caliber .30.<br> +1 bayonet.<br> +1 bayonet scabbard.<br> +1 gun sling.<br> +1 rifle cartridge belt. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FOR EACH EACH ENLISTED MAN ARMED WITH THE PISTOL. +</p> + +<p> +1 pistol, caliber .45.<br> +1 pistol holster.<br> +1 magazine pocket, double, web.<br> +2 extra magazines.<br> +1 pistol belt (except for men armed <i>also</i> with the rifle). +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FOR EACH ENLISTED MAN, INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED, IN ADDITION TO +THE ABOVE. +</p> + +<p> +1 rifle scabbard (if armed with rifle).<br> +1 spurs, pair.<br> +1 spur straps, pair.<br> +1 set of horse equipment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) Extra clothing and articles to be carried on the soldier +or on the packed saddle. +</p> + +<p> +1 blanket.<br> +1 comb.<br> +1 drawers, pair,<br> +1 poncho (dismounted men),<br> +1 slicker (mounted men).<br> +1 soak, cake.<br> +2 stockings, pair.<br> +1 toothbrush.<br> +1 towel.<br> +1 undershirt.<br> +1 housewife (for one man of each squad). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) Ammunition, consisting of-- +</p> + +<p> +90 rounds ball cartridges, caliber .30 (old model belt).<br> +100 rounds ball cartridges, caliber .30 (new model belt). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) Rations, consisting of-- +</p> + +<p> +1 or 2 reserve rations (bacon, hard bread, coffee, sugar, and +salt). +</p> + +<p> +(<i>f</i>) Intrenching tools, consisting of-- +</p> + +<p> +2 pick mattocks, per squad.<br> +1 bolo or hand axe, per squad.<br> +4 shovels, intrenching, per squad.<br> +1 wire cutter, per squad. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. The surplus kit.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The surplus kit for each man consists of-- +</p> + +<p> +1 breeches, pair.<br> +1 drawers, pair.<br> +1 shirt, olive drab.<br> +1 shoes, russet leather, pair.<br> +2 stockings, pair.<br> +1 undershirt.<br> +1 shoe laces, extra, pair. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each surplus kit bag contains 1 jointed cleaning rod and case. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Squad leaders are responsible that surplus kit bags are kept in +order and fully packed in the field.[2] Men are allowed access +to them for the purpose of making substitutions. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 2: In campaign or simulated campaign, when an organization +is restricted to its prescribed field-train transportation, surplus +kits, overcoats, and sweaters are stored on the line of +communications or other designated place with the permanent camp +equipment of the organization.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The surplus kits are packed in surplus kit bags, one for each +squad, one for sergeants, and one for cooks and buglers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The kit of each man will be packed as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; +shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, +wrapped tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around +the middle by the extra pair of the shoe laces, each bundle to +be tagged with the company number of the owner. These individual +kits will be packed in the surplus kit bag in two layers of four +kits each, the breeches and olive drab shirts to be neatly folded +find packed on the top and sides of the layers, the jointed cleaning +rod and case, provided for each squad, being attached by the +thongs on the inside of the bag. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When overcoats or sweaters are not prescribed to be worn on the +person they will be collected into bundles of convenient size +and secured by burlap or other suitable material, or will be +boxed. They will be marked ready for equipment to be forwarded +when required. +</p> + +<H3>Section 7. Assembling infantry equipment.[3]</h3> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 3: Since these instructions were written 1 drawers +and 1 undershirt have been added to the field kit. Place them +in pack when carried, otherwise in haversack.] +</p> + +<h4>TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +WITH RATIONS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of +haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread +put, inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length +to the rear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack +body, the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; +lay the remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and +the bacon can on the top of these, the condiment can and the +bacon can at the bottom, top of the bacon can to the front; the +socks and toilet articles are rolled, towel on the outside, into +a bundle of the same approximate dimensions as a carton of hard +bread, and are placed in front of the two rows thus formed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the +end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened, +extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides +of the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper +binding straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the +inside flap, each strap through the loop opposite the point of +its attachment to the haversack body, and fastened by means of +the buckle on the opposite side, the strap being passed through +the opening in the buckle next to its attachment, over the center +bar, and back through the opening of the buckle away from its +attachment; the strap is pulled tight to make the fastening secure; +the outer flap of the haversack is folded over and fastened by +means of the lower haversack binding strap and the buckle on +the inside of the outer flap; the strap is pulled tight, drawing +the outer flap snugly over the filled haversack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the +reception of the pack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If one reserve ration and one emergency ration are carried in +lieu of two reserve rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the +bacon can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; +the condiment can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles +form the top layer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two reserve +rations, it is packed on top of the top layer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To make the pack:</b> Spread the shelter half on the ground and +fold in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from +the half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its +shortest dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, +and lay it in the center of the shelter half; fold the blanket +as described for the poncho and place it on the latter; place +the shelter tent pins in the folds of the blanket, in the center +and across the shortest dimension; fold the edges of the shelter +half snugly over the blanket and poncho and, beginning on either +of the short sides, roll tightly and compactly. This forms the +pack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To assemble the pack:</b> Place the pack in the pack carrier +and grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the +right knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down +and force the pack up close against the bottom of the packed +haversack; without removing the knee, pass the lower carrier +binding strap over the pack and secure it by means of the opposite +buckle; in a similar manner secure the lower haversack binding +strap and then the upper carrier binding strap. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension +rings. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the +full equipment. +</p> + +<h4>TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +WITHOUT RATIONS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described; +fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will +be on a line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the +lower haversack strap in the same manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To make up the pack:</b> Fold the poncho, blanket, and shelter +half, and make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the +condiment and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the +toilet articles and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case +the pack is rolled, beginning on either of the long sides instead +of the short sides, as heretofore described. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To assemble the pack:</b> Place the pack on the haversack and pack +carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack +body: bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack +and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack +and secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack +binding strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the +flap; engage the snap hooks of the park suspenders in the lower +suspension rings. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The equipment is now packed and assembled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To adjust the equipment to the soldier:</b> Put on the equipment, +slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as +through the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles +on the belt suspenders raise or lower the belt until it rests well +down over the hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the +abdomen in front; raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting +strap lies smoothly across the small of the back; by means of +the adjusting buckles on the pack suspenders, raise or lower the +load on the back until the top of the haversack is on a level +with the top of the shoulders, the pack suspenders, from their +point of attachment to the haversack to the line of tangency +with the shoulder, being horizontal. <i>The latter is absolutely +essential to the proper adjustment of the load.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty. +</p> + +<h4>TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +WITH RATIONS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the +equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four +cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the +toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, +the toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, +top to the front, the row extending from top to bottom of the +haversack; fold the inside flap over the row thus formed; fold +the sides of the haversack up and over; pass the three haversack +binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and secure by +means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack; pass +the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole +in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the outer flap of the +haversack over the whole, and secure by means of the buckle on +its underside and the lower haversack binding strap. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous +buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the +snap hooks on the ends of the pack suspenders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If one reserve ration and one emergency ration are carried in +lieu of two reserve rations, the haversack is packed in the manner +described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted +for two of the cartons of hard bread. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two reserve +rations, it is packed on top of the layer. +</p> + +<h4>TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +WITHOUT RATIONS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the +equipment on the ground, as heretofore described; fold up the +inside flap of the haversack until its upper end is on a line with +the top of the haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack +over, pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops +on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the +opposite side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding +strap through the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the +haversack; place the condiment and bacon can (the former inside +the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in the bottom of +the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the haversack over +the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its underside +and the lower haversack binding strap. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous +buttonholes in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the +snap hooks on the ends of the pack suspenders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To adjust the equipment to the soldier:</b> Put on the +equipment as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the +cartridge belt as prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the +pack suspenders so that the top of the haversack is on a level +with the top of the shoulders. +</p> + +<h4>TO DISCARD THE PACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE +BODY.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap +them into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the real +pockets of the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom +of the pack with the left hand and with the right hand grasp +the coupling strap at its middle and withdraw first one end, +then the other; press down gently on the pack with both hands +and remove it. When the pack has been removed, lace the coupling +strap into the buttonholes along the upper edge of the carrier. +Adjust the pack suspenders. +</p> + +<h4>OLD MODEL EQUIPMENT.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +To roll the blanket roll.--<i>See</i> chapter V, section 8, +paragraph 747. +</p> + +<h2><a name="III">CHAPTER III.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +RATIONS AND FORAGE. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. The ration.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the field there are three kinds of rations issued, as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <i>garrison ration</i> is intended to be issued in kind whenever +possible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5 pounds. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <i>reserve ration</i> is the simplest efficient ration, and +constitutes the reserve carried for field service. It consists +of-- +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 class="center"> + <tr><td class="left"> </td> + <td class="right">Ounces.</td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Bacon</td> + <td class="right"><tt>12 </tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Hard bread</td> + <td class="right"><tt>16 </tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Coffee, roasted and ground</td> + <td class="right"><tt>1.12</tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Sugar</td> + <td class="right"><tt>2.4 </tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Salt</td> + <td class="right"><tt>.16</tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left"> </td> + <td class="right"><tt>-----</tt></td></tr> + <tr><td class="left">Approximate net weight + pounds</td> + <td class="right"><tt>2 </tt></td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The <i>field ration</i> is the ration prescribed in orders by +the commander of the field forces. It consists of the reserve +ration, in whole or in part, supplemented by articles requisitioned +or purchased locally or shipped from the rear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment +the following rations: +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> +<tr><td valign="top" class="left">(<i>a</i>)</td><td> </td> + <td class="left">On each man: At least two days' reserve + rations.</td></tr> +<tr><td valign="top" class="left">(<i>b</i>)</td><td> </td> + <td class="left">In the ration section of the field train, for + each man:<br> + Two days' field and one day's reserve rations.</td></tr> +<tr><td valign="top">(<i>c</i>)</td><td> </td> + <td class="left">In the supply train: Two days' field + rations.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +In addition to the foregoing, commanders will require each man +on the march to carry the unconsumed portion of the day's ration +issued the night before for the noonday meal. Reserve rations are +consumed only in case of extreme necessity, when other supplies +are not available. They are not to be consumed or renewed without +an express order from the officer in command of the troops who is +responsible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division +commander or other independent-detachment commander. Every officer +within the limits of his command is held responsible for the +enforcement of this regulation. Reserve rations consumed must +he replaced at the first Opportunity. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Individual cooking.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier +at one time, and in such cases you should be very careful to +so use the rations that they will last you the entire period. +If you stuff yourself one day, or waste your rations, you will +have to starve later on. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Generally the cooking for the company will be done by the company +cook, but sometimes every soldier will have to prepare his own +meals, using only his field mess kit for the purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The best fire for individual cooking is a small, clear one, or, +better yet, a few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather +a number of sticks about 1 inch in diameter. These should be +dry. Dead limbs adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked +up from the ground. Split some of these and shave them up into +kindling. Dig a trench in the ground, laid with the wind, about +a foot long, 4 inches wide, and 6 inches deep. Start the fire in +this trench gradually, piling on the heavier wood as the fire +grows. When the trench is full of burning wood, allow it a few +minutes to burn down to the coals and stop blazing high. Then +rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start cooking. +Either may be supported, if necessary, with green sticks. If you +can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one up out of rocks +or with two parallel logs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following recipes have been furnished from the office of the +Quartermaster General, United States Army: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Coffee</i>.--Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bring +to a boil. Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well, +adding one spoonful of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and +then set it to the side of the fire to simmer for about 10 minutes. +Then, to clear the coffee, throw in a spoonful or two of cold +water. This coffee is of medium strength and is within the limit +of the ration if made but twice a day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Cocoa</i>.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a +boil, add one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved. +Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Chocolate</i>.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring +to a boil, add a piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory +nut, breaking or cutting it into small pieces and stirring until +dissolved. Add one spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for +five minutes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Tea</i>.--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a +boll, add one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it +stand or "draw" for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer +the tea will get bitter, unless separated from the ten leaves. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +MEATS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Bacon</i>.--Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which +should generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place +in a meat can with about one-half inch of cold water. Let come +to a boll and then pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, +turning the bacon once and quickly browning it. Remove the bacon +to lid of meat can, leaving the grease for frying potatoes, onions, +rice, flapjacks, etc., according to recipe. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Fresh meat</i> (to fry).--To fry, a small amount of grease +(one to two spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in the meat can +and let come to a smoking temperature, then drop in the steak +and, if about one-half inch thick, let fry for about one minute +before turning, depending upon whether it is desired it shall be +rare, medium, or well done. Then turn and fry briskly as before. +Salt and pepper to taste. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Fresh meat</i> (to broil).--Cut in slices about one inch thick, +from half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen +a stick or branch of convenient length--say, from two to four +feet long--and weave the point of the stick through the steak +several times, so that it may be readily turned over a few brisk +coals or on the windward side of a small fire. Allow to brown +nicely, turning frequently. Salt and pepper to taste. Meat with +considerable fat is preferred, though any meat may be broiled +in this manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Fresh meat</i> (to stew).--Cut into chunks from one-half inch +to one inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover +with about one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour, +or until tender. Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots, turnips, +or cabbage, cut into small chunks, soon after the meat is put +on to boil, and potatoes, onions, or other tender vegetables +when the meat is about half done. Amount of vegetables to be +added, about the same as meat, depending upon supply and taste. +Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to ail fresh meats and fowls. +The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with their +abundance, and fixed quantities can not be adhered to. Fresh fish +can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker, +and potatoes and onions and canned corn are the only vegetables +generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon +would greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked +in meat can or cup. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +VEGETABLES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Potatoes</i> (fried).--Take two medium-sized potatoes or one +large one (about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about +one-fourth inch thick and scatter well in the meat can in which +the grease remains after trying the bacon. Add sufficient water to +half cover the potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture +in, and let come to a boil for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove +the cover and dry as desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During +the cooking the bacon already prepared may be kept on the cover, +which is most conveniently placed bottom side up over the cooking +vegetables. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Onions</i> (fried).--Same as potatoes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Potatoes</i> (boiled).--Peel two medium-sized potatoes (about +one-half pound) or one large one, and cut in coarse chunks of +about the same size--say 1-1/2 inch cubes. Place in meat can and +three-fourths fill with water. Cover with lid and let boil or +simmer for 15 or 20 minutes. They are done when easily penetrated +with a sharp stick. Pour off the water and let dry out for one +or two minutes over hot ashes or light coals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Potatoes</i> (baked).--Take two medium-sized potatoes (about, +one-half pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed of +light coals and cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not +disturb for 30 or 40 minutes, when they should be done. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Canned tomatoes</i>.--One 2-pound can is generally sufficient +for five men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Stew</i>.--Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of tomatoes +and add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and +let come to a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch +of salt and one-fourth spoonful of sugar. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Or</i>, having tried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the +meat can, the grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken +hardtacks. Set over a brisk fire and let come to a boil. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Or</i>, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, +adding two pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, if +desired. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Or</i>, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, +they are very palatable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Rice</i>.--Take about two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring +to a boll, add four heaping spoonfuls of rice, and boil until the +grains are soft enough to be easily mashed between the fingers +(about 20 minutes). Add two pinches of salt and, after stirring, +pour off the water and empty rice out on meat can. Bacon grease +or sugar may be added. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Corn meal, fine hominy, oatmeal</i>.--Take about one-third +of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heaping spoonfuls +of the meal or hominy, and boil about 20 minutes. Then add about +two pinches of salt and stir well. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Dried beans and peas</i>.--Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about +two-thirds of a cupful of water and boil until soft. This generally +takes from three to four hours. Add one pinch of salt. About half +an hour before the beans are done add one slice of bacon. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +HOT BREADS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Flapjacks</i>.--Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful +of baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan +before issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and 3 half cans +of baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make +a batter that will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of +salt. Pour into the meat can, which should contain the grease +from fried bacon or a spoonful of butter or fat, and place over +medium hot coals sufficient to bake, so that in from 5 to 7 minutes +the flapjack may be turned by a quick toss of the pan. Fry from +5 to 7 minutes longer, or until by examination it is found to +be done. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Hoecake</i>.--Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks +by substituting <i>corn meal</i> for <i>flour</i>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Emergency rations</i>.--Detailed instructions as to the manner +of preparing the emergency ration are found on the label of each +can. Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard +bread, or both, consumed with the emergency ration makes it far +more palatable, and generally extends the period during which it +can be consumed with relish. For this reason it would be better +to husband the supply of hard bread and bacon for use with the +emergency ration when it becomes evident that the latter must +be consumed rather than to retain the emergency ration to the +last extremity and force its exclusive use for a longer period +than two or three days. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. The forage ration.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +"<i>1077, Army Regulations</i>.--The forage ration for a horse +is 14 pounds of hay and 12 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and +3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery +horse of the heavy-draft type, weighing 1,300 pounds or over, +17 pounds of hay and 14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and +3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding; for a mule, 14 pounds +of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds +of straw (or hay) for bedding. To each animal 3 pounds of bran +may be issued in lieu of that quantity of grain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"The commanding officer may, in his discretion, vary the proportions +of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, 1-1/2 pounds +of hay, and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equivalents), and +in the field may substitute other recognized articles of forage +obtained locally, the variation or the substitution not to exceed +the money value of the components of the ration at the contract +rates in effect at the time of change. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"<i>1078, Army Regulations</i>.--Where grazing is practicable, or +when little work is required of the animals, commanding officers +will reduce the forage ration. When, on the other hand, conditions +demand it, they are authorized to increase the ration, not in +excess, however, of savings made." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the field the authorized allowances must often be reduced +and supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as +green forage, beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat +and rye should be crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourth +of the allowance). For unshelled corn, add about one-quarter +weight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On the march the grain ration is the only forage carried. It +consists of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of +grain for each mule. Recourse must be had to grazing if it is +not possible to procure long forage in the country traversed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment +the following forage: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) For each draft animal: On each vehicle a <i>reserve</i> +of one day's grain ration for its draft animals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain +ration issued the night before, for a noonday feed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) In the ration section of the field train, for each +animal, two day's grain rations. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) In supply train of an Infantry division two days' +grain rations, and of a Cavalry division one days' grain ration. +</p> + +<h2><a name="IV">CHAPTER IV.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>PERSONAL HYGIENE.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +History shows that in almost every war many more men die of disease +than from wounds received in battle. Much of this disease is +preventable and is due either to the ignorance or carelessness +of the person who has the disease or of other persons about him. +It is a terrible truth that one man who violates any of the great +rules of health may be the means of killing many more of his +comrades than are killed by the bullets of the enemy. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It is therefore most important that every soldier should learn +how to take care of his health when in the field and that he +should also insist that his comrades do not violate any of the +rules prescribed for this purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A great many diseases are due to germs, which are either little +animals or little plants so very small that they can only be +seen by aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germs are +"catching." All other diseases are not "catching." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +There are only five ways of catching disease: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some one +or something which has them on it. Thus, one may catch venereal +diseases, smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox, mumps, +bolls, body lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhopie itch, and some +other diseases. Wounds are infected in this manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Breathing in certain germs which float in the air. In this +way one may catch pneumonia, consumption, influenza, diphtheria, +whooping cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, measles, and certain +other diseases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating or +drinking. Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and intestinal +worms may be caught in this manner, +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) Having certain germs injected into the body by the bites +of insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria, +yellow fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caught in +this way. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) Inheriting the germ from one's parents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently being +sick with any disease. Such persons and persons who are sick +with the diseases are a great source of danger to others about +them. Germs which multiply in such persons are found in their +urine and excretions from the bowels; in discharges from ulcers +and abscesses; in the spit or particles coughed or sneezed into +the air; in the perspiration or scales from the skin; and in +the blood sucked up by biting insects. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Those who have taken care of their health and who have not become +weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are not only less +liable to catch disease, but are more apt to recover when taken +sick. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the reasons +for the following rules and how important it is that they should +be carried out by each and every person: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Stay away from persons having "catching" diseases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go +to the surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Typhoid fever is one of the most dangerous and common camp diseases. +Modern medicine has, however, discovered an effective preventative +for this disease in the typhoid prophylactic, which renders the +person immune from typhoid fever. The treatment consists in injecting +into the arm a preventative serum. The injection is given three +times at 10-day intervals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Association with lewd women is dangerous. It may result in disabling +you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis) which may be +transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldiers with venereal +diseases should not use basins or toilet articles used by others, +as the germs of these diseases if gotten into the eye very often +cause blindness. Likewise, if they use the same drinking cup used +by others they may give others the disease. They should promptly +report their trouble to the surgeon, that they may receive the +best medical advice and attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having intercourse +with an unknown woman, he should report as soon as possible +afterwards to the regimental infirmary for prophylactic treatment, +which, if taken within a few hours after intercourse, will prevent +to a large degree the liability of contracting any disease. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. Water, even when +clear, may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore, when the conditions +are such that the commanding officer orders all drinking water +to be boiled, be careful to live up to this order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself. In +open latrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds files +and may also be full of germs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Flies carry germs from one place to another. Therefore see that +your food and mess kit are protected from them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All slops find scraps of food scattered about camp soon produce +bad odors and draw flies. Therefore do your part toward keeping +the camp free from disease by carefully depositing such refuse +in the pits or cans used for this purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for this +purpose, never on the ground around camp, because it not only +causes bad smells but urine sometimes contains the germs of +"catching" diseases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors. Therefore +in camps of several days' duration this water should be thrown +in covered pits or in cans used for this purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As certain mosquitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever, +use your mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal +comfort. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twice a day. +It helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayed teeth cause +toothache. They also lead one to swallow food without properly +chewing it, and this leads to stomach troubles of various kinds. +Food left around and between the teeth is bad for the teeth and +forms good breeding places for germs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep the skin clean. Through the pores of the skin the body gets +rid of much waste and poisonous matter. Therefore remove this +and keep the pores open by bathing once every day, if possible. +If water is scarce, rub the body over with a wet towel. If no +water is at hand, take a dry rub. Wash carefully the armpits, +between the legs, and under the foreskin, as this will prevent +chafing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury +and helps to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters are formed +don't tear off the skin. Insert a needle under the skin a little +distance back from the blister and push it through to the opposite +side. Press out the liquid through the holes thus formed. Heat +the needle red hot first, with a match or candle, to kill the +germs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the opening +covered with a bandage to keep out germs and dirt; otherwise +the sore may fester. Pus is always caused by germs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the field +generally means a dirty head and a dirty face and favors skin +diseases, lice, and dandruff. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very often +is the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, +and other diseases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising without bad +results; but there is great danger if one rests in wet clothing, +as the body may become chilled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on damp ground, as this is +sure to chill the body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp clothes, don't remain +where a breeze can strike you. You are sure to become chilled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to +air in the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs +and vermin don't like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing +suits them very well. Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks +frequently. The danger of blood poisoning from a wound is greatly +increased if the bullet passes through dirty clothes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter tent, +even if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little rain +may ruin a whole night's rest. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Always prepare your bed before dark. Level off the ground and +scrape out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw or dry +grass if possible. Green grass or branches from trees are better +than nothing. Sleep on your poncho. This keeps the dampness from +coming up from the ground and chilling the body. Every minute +spent in making a good bed means about an hour's good rest later +on. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Avoid the food and drink found for sale in the cheap stands about +camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often prepared in +filthy places by very dirty persons. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The use of intoxicating liquor is particularly dangerous in the +field. Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks down +one's system. Drinking men are more apt to get sick and less +liable to get well than are their more sober comrades. If alcohol +is taken at all, it is best after the work of the day is over. It +should never be taken when the body is exposed to severe cold, +as it diminishes the resistance of the body. Hot tea or coffee +is much preferable under these circumstances. +</p> + +<h3>CARE OF THE FEET.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +A soldier can not march with sore feet, and marching is the main +part of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. All soldiers +should be familiar with the proper methods of caring for the +feet. Sore feet are generally due to carelessness, neglect, or +ignorance on the part of the soldier. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The most important factor in the care of the feet and the marching +ability of the soldier is the shoe. Civilian shoes, particularly +light, patent leather, or low shoes, are sure to cause injury and +in time will ruin a man's foot. Only the marching shoe issued by +the Quartermaster Corps should be worn, and they must be properly +fitted to the individual. It will not suffice to order a marching +shoe of the same size as one's ordinary civilian shoes, for it +must be remembered that a soldier may have to march many miles +daily over rough roads and carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself +causes the foot to spread out to a larger size, and the rough +roads give so much exercise to the muscles of the feet that they +swell greatly through the increased blood supply. (For directions +as to measuring the foot for the marching shoe see General Order +No. 26, War Department, 1912, a copy of which should be on hand +in each company.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Do not start out on a march wearing new shoes. This is a frequent +cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly broken in before +beginning a march by wearing them for several hours daily for a +week before the march, and they should be adapted to the contours +of the feet by stretching them with shoe stretchers with adjustable +knobs to take the pressure off painful corns and bunions. Such +stretchers are issued by the Quartermaster Corps, and there should +be one or more pair in every company of infantry. Should this +be impracticable, then the following is suggested: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2-1/2 inches of +water for about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly +pliable and moist; he should then walk for about an hour on a +level surface, letting the shoes dry on his feet, to the +irregularities of which the leather is thus molded in the same +way as it was previously molded over the shoe last. On taking +the shoes off a very little neat's-foot oil should be rubbed +into the leather to prevent its hardening and cracking. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable +amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather. +Waterproof leather causes the feet of some men to perspire unduly +and keeps them constantly soft. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn for +marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless specifically ordered +by the surgeon. The socks will be large enough to permit free +movement of the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wrinkling. +Darned socks, or socks with holes in them, will not be worn in +marching. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot +powder, which can be obtained at the regimental infirmary, before +each day's march. Clean socks should be worn daily. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as possible after reaching camp after a day of marching +the feet should be washed with soap and water, and the soldier +should put on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of shoes +from his surplus kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet perspire, +wash with warm salt water or alum water, but do not soak the feet +a long time, as this, although very comforting at the time, tends +to keep them soft. Should blister's appear on the feet, prick +and evacuate them by pricking at the lower edge with a pin which +has been passed through the flame of a match and cover them with +zinc oxide plaster applied hot. This plaster can be obtained +on request at the regimental infirmary. If serious abrasions +appear on the feet, or corns, bunions, and ingrowing nails cause +trouble, have your name placed on sick report and apply to the +surgeon for treatment. Cut the toe nails square (fairly close +in the middle, but leaving the sides somewhat longer), as this +prevents ingrowing nails. +</p> + +<h2><a name="V">CHAPTER V.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +EXTRACTS FROM INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +[Corrected to April 15, 1917.] +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Definitions.</h3> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Alignment:</b> A straight line upon which several elements are +formed, or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements +upon a straight line. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Base:</b> The element on which a movement is regulated. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Battle Sight:</b> The position of the rear sight when the leaf +is laid down. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Center:</b> The middle point or element of a command. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Column:</b> A formation in which the elements are placed one +behind another. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Deploy:</b> To extend the front. In general to change from +column to line, or from close order to extended order. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Depth:</b> The space from head to rear of any formation, +including the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is +assumed to be 12 inches. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Distance:</b> Space between elements in the direction of depth. +Distance is measured from the bark of the man in front to the +breast of the man in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 +inches in both line and column. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Element:</b> A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, +forming part of a still larger body. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>File:</b> Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man +of the rear rank. The front-rank man is the <b>file leader</b>. +A file which has no rear-rank man is a <b>blank</b> file. The +term <b>file</b> applies also to a single man in a single-rank +formation. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>File closers:</b> Such officers and noncommissioned officers +of a company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, +all men posted in the line of file closers. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Flank:</b> The right or left of a command in line or in +column: also the element on the right or left of the line. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Formation:</b> Arrangement of the elements of a command. The +placing of all fractions in their order in line, in column, or +for battle. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Front:</b> The space, in width, occupied by an element, either +in line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 +inches. Front also denotes the direction of the enemy. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Guide:</b> An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon +whom the command or elements thereof regulates its march. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Head:</b> The leading element of a column. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Interval:</b> Space between elements of the same line. The +interval between men in ranks is 4 inches, and is measured from +elbow to elbow. Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured +from the left elbow of the left man or guide of the group on the +right to the right elbow of the right man or guide of the group +on the left. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Left:</b> The left extremity or element of a body of troops. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Line:</b> A formation in which the different elements are +abreast of each other. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Order, close:</b> The formation in which the units, in double +rank, are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and +distances. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Order, extended:</b> The formation in which the units are +separated by intervals greater than in close order. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Pace:</b> Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick +time. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Point of rest:</b> The point at which a formation begins. +Specifically, the point toward which units are aligned in successive +movements. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Rank:</b> A line of men placed side by side. +</p> + +<p class="glossary"> +<b>Right:</b> The right extremity or element of a body of troops. +</p> + +<p class="subtitle"> +PART I.--DRILL. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2.--Introdution.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>1.</b>[4] Success in battle is the ultimate object of all +military training; success may be looked for only when the +training is intelligent and thorough. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 4: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Infantry Drill +Regulations, 1911.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>2.</b> Commanding officers are accountable for the proper +training of their respective organizations within the limits +prescribed by regulations and orders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency. +The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon +its effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in +the training of the units of an organization are indispensable +to the efficiency of the whole; it is by such means alone that +the requisite teamwork may be developed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>3.</b> Simple movements and elastic formations are essential +to correct training for battle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>4.</b> The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They +provide the principles for training and for increasing the +probability of success in battle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be +sought. Quibbling over the minutiæ of form is indicative of failure +to grasp the spirit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>5.</b> The principles of combat are considered in Part II of +these regulations. They are treated in the various schools +included in Part I only to the extent necessary to indicate the +functions of the various commanders and the division of +responsibility between them. The amplification necessary to a +proper understanding of their application is to be sought in +Part II. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>6.</b> The following important distinctions must be observed: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) Drills executed <b>at attention</b> and the ceremonies +are <b>disciplinary exercises</b> designed to teach precise and +soldierly movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious +obedience which is essential to proper military control. To this +end smartness and precision should be exacted in the execution of +every detail. Such drills should be frequent, but short. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) The purpose of <b>extended order drill</b> is to teach +the mechanism of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of +the employment of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature +of disciplinary exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and +exact in order to habituate men to the firm control of their +leaders. Extended order drill is executed at ease. The company is +the largest unit which executes extended order drill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) <b>Field exercises</b> are for instruction in the +duties incident to campaign. Assumed situations are employed. +Each exercise should conclude with a discussion, on the ground, +of the exercise and principles involved. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) The <b>combat exercise</b>, a form of field exercise +of the company, battalion, and larger units, consists of the +<b>application of tactical principles</b> to assumed situations, +employing in the execution the appropriate formations and +movements of close and extended order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle +conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men +with such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently +be consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers +and noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full +quota of the units participating are assigned as observers or +umpires. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; +thorough training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals +is necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention +in order to restore smartness and control. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>7.</b> In field exercises the enemy is said to be +<b>imaginary</b> when his position and force are merely assumed; +<b>outlined</b> when his position and force are indicated by a +few men; <b>represented</b> when a body of troop acts as such. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>General Rules for Drills and Formations.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>8.</b> When the <b>preparatory</b> commands consists of more +than one part its elements are arranged as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions +or elements of an organization: (a) Description of the movement; +(b) how executed, or on what element executed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions +of an organization: (<i>a</i>) The designation of the subdivisions; +(<i>b</i>) the movement to be executed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>9.</b> Movements that may be executed toward either flank are +explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute +the word "left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the +explanation of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. +The commands are given for the execution of the movements toward +either flank. The substitute word of the command is placed within +parentheses. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>10.</b> Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when +marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command +for movements involving marching need not be prefaced by forward, +as 1. <i>Column right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>11.</b> Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in +double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command double +time precedes the command of execution. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>12.</b> In successive movements executed in double time the +leading or base unit marches in <b>quick time</b> when not +otherwise prescribed; the other units march in <b>double time</b> +to their places in the formation ordered and then conform to the +gait of the leading or base unit. If marching in double time, +the command <b>double time</b> is omitted. The leading or base +unit marches in <b>quick time</b>; the other units continue at +<b>double time</b> to their places in the formation ordered +and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>13.</b> To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick +time, the command: 1. <i>Double time</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, is +given. The leading or base unit continues to march in quick +time, or remains at a halt if already halted; the other units +complete the execution of the movement in double time and then +conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>14.</b> To stay the execution of a movement when marching, +for the correction of errors, the command: 1. <i>In place</i>, +2. <b>HALT</b>, is given. All halt and stand fast, without +changing the position of the pieces. To resume the movement +the command: 1. <i>Resume</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, is given. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>15.</b> To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt +to begin anew a movement improperly begun, the command, <b>AS +YOU WERE</b>, is given, at which the movement ceases and the +former position is resumed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>16.</b> Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or +subdivision of a company in line is right; of a battalion in +line or line of subdivisions or of a deployed line, center; of +a rank in column of squads, toward the side of the guide of the +company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change +the guide: <i>Guide (right, left, or center)</i>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point +of rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a +movement, follows the command of execution for that movement. +Exception: 1. <i>As skirmishers, guide right (left or center)</i>, +2. <b>MARCH.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>17.</b> The <b>turn on the fixed pivot</b> by subdivisions +is used in all formations from line into column and the reverse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>turn on the moving pivot</b> is used by subdivisions of +a column in executing changes of direction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>18.</b> Partial changes of direction may be executed: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +By interpolating in the preparatory command the word <b>half</b>, +as <b>column half right (left)</b>, or <b>right (left) half +turn</b>. A change of direction of 45° is executed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +By the command: <b>INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT)</b>. The guide, +or guiding element, moves in the indicated direction and the +remainder of the command conforms. This movement effects slight +changes of direction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>19.</b> The designations <b>line of platoon, line of companies, +line of battalions</b>, etc., refer to the formations in which +the platoons, companies, battalions, etc., each in column of +squads, are in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>20.</b> Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in +forming line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their +proper intervals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is +charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve +the trace, step, and distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>21.</b> In close order, all details, detachments, and other +bodies of troops are habitually formed in double rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in, +and in alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand +upon the hip, fingers pointing downward. In the first case the +hand is dropped by the side when the next man on the left has +his interval; in the second case, at the command front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>22.</b> The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special +units (such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various +formations of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in +plates. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In all changes from one formation to another involving a change +of post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken +by the most convenient route as soon as practicable after the +command of execution for the movement; officers and noncommissioned +officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the movement +ordered, take their new posts when such duties are completed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever +their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty +to rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the +ranks. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>23.</b> Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed +places. They take places as directed; in the absence of directions, +they conform as nearly as practicable to the plates, and in +subsequent movements maintain their relative positions with respect +to the flank or end of the command on which they were originally +posted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>24.</b> General, field, and staff officers are habitually +mounted. The staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in +rear of him, the right or the rank extending 1 pace to the right +of a point directly in rear of him. Members of the staff are +arranged in order from right to left as follows: General staff +officers, adjutant, aids, other staff officers, arranged in each +classification in order of rank, the senior on the right. The +flag of the general officer and the orderlies are 3 paces in +rear of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to +reduce the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes +twos right or fours right, as explained in the Cavalry Drill +Regulations, and follows the commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return +saber with their chief. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>25.</b> In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually +turns to the left. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and +orderlies do not change position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>26.</b> When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting +out of doors all officers will salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when +the salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony +or formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, +for example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the +officer making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first. +The officer to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting +that he has received and understood the report. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>27.</b> For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment +or smaller unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun +organizations, are consolidated into a detachment. The senior +present commands if no officer is in charge. The detachment is +formed as a platoon or squad of Cavalry in line or column of +fours. Noncommissioned staff officers are on the right or in the +leading ranks. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>28.</b> For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff +officers as are dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the +color in order of rank from right to left. In column of squads +they march as file closers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>29.</b> Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned stare +officers and orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless +otherwise directed. If mounted, the noncommissioned staff +officers are ordinarily posted on the right or at the head of +the orderlies. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>30.</b> In all formations and movements a noncommissioned +officer commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the +men do, if he is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer +in like situation. When the command is formed in line for ceremonies +a noncommissioned officer commanding a company takes post on the +right of the right guide after the company has been aligned. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Orders, commands, and signals.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>31.</b> <b>Commands</b> only are employed in drill at attention. +Otherwise either a <b>command</b>, <b>signal</b>, or <b>order</b> +is employed, as best suits the occasion, or one may he used in +conjunction with another. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>32.</b> Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order +that officers and men may readily know them. In making firm signals +the saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>33.</b> Officers and men fix their attention at the first word +of command, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first +motion of the signal. A signal includes both the preparatory +command and the command of execution: the movement commences as +soon as the signal is understood, unless otherwise prescribed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>34.</b> Except in movements executed <b>at attention</b>, +commanders or leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or +signals whenever such repetition is deemed necessary to insure +prompt and correct execution. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders, +guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; +the captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; +the platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>35.</b> Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential +as a substitute for the voice under conditions which render the +voice inadequate. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed +upon to facilitate the solution of such special difficulties +as the particular situation is likely to develop, but it must +be remembered that simplicity and certainty are indispensable +qualities of a signal. +</p> + +<h4>ORDERS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>36.</b> In these regulations an <b>order</b> embraces +instructions or directions given orally or in writing in terms +suited to the particular occasion and not prescribed herein. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Orders</b> are employed only when the <b>commands</b> +prescribed herein do not sufficiently indicate the will of +the commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Orders</b> are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, +inclusive. +</p> + +<h4>COMMANDS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>37.</b> In these regulations a command is the will of the +commander expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>38.</b> There are two kinds of commands: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>preparatory</b> command, such as <i>forward</i>, +indicates the movement that is to be executed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The command of <b>execution</b>, such as <b>MARCH</b>, +<b>HALT</b>, or <b>ARMS</b>, causes the execution. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Preparatory</b> commands are distinguished by <i>italics</i>, +those of <b>execution</b> by CAPITALS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands +prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit +concerned. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>preparatory</b> command should be given at such an interval +of time before the command of <b>execution</b> as to admit of +being properly understood; the command of <b>execution</b> should +be given at the instant the movement is to commence. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness +proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each <b>preparatory</b> command is enunciated distinctly, with +a rising inflection at the end, and in such manner that the +command of <b>execution</b> may he more energetic. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The command of <b>execution</b> is firm in tone and brief. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>39.</b> Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion +repeat such commands of their superiors as are to be executed by +their units, facing their units for that purpose. The battalion +is the largest unit that executes a movement at the command of +execution of its commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>40.</b> When giving commands to troops it is usually best to +face toward them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Indifference in giving commands must be avoided, as it leads +to laxity in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at +all times. +</p> + +<h4>BUGLE SIGNALS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>41.</b> The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of +these regulations. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, +when not likely to convey information to the enemy: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Attention:</b> Troops are brought to attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Attention to orders:</b> Troops fix their attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Forward, march:</b> Used also to execute quick time from double +time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Double time, march.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To the rear, march:</b> In close order, execute <b>squads +right about</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Halt.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Assemble, march</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following bugle signals may be used on the battlefield: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Fix bayonets</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Charge</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Assemble, march</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing +line; hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit +(for example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct +section of the battle field. Exception: <b>Fix bayonet</b>. (see +par. 318.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on +the battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises +and practice firing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Commence firing</b>: Officers charged with fire direction and +control open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing +line, the signal is equivalent to fire at will. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Cease firing</b>: All parts of the line execute <b>Cease +firing</b> at once. These signals are not used by units smaller +than a regiment, except when such unit is independent or detached +from its regiment. +</p> + +<h4>WHISTLE SIGNALS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>42. Attention to orders</b>. A <b>short blast</b> of the whistle. +This signal is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix +the attention of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, +preparatory to giving commands, orders, or signals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing +and fixes his attention at a <b>short blast</b> of his platoon +leader's whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or +signals are repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad +leader's attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of +his platoon leader, or if there are no orders or commands to +convey to his squad, he resumes firing at once. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Suspend firing</b>. A <b>long blast</b> of the whistle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All other whistle signals are prohibited. +</p> + +<h4>ARM SIGNALS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>43.</b> The following arm signals are prescribed. In making +signals either arm may be used. Officers who receive signals, +on the firing line "repeat back" at once to prevent +misunderstanding. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Forward, march</b>. Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten +and hold the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Halt</b>. Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand +upward and hold the arm vertically. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Double time, march</b>. Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly +thrust the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Squads right, march</b>. Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; +carry it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several +times between the vertical and horizontal positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Squads left, march</b>. Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; +carry it downward to the side and swing it several times between +the downward and horizontal positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Squads right about, march</b> (if in close order) or, <b>to the +rear, march</b> (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically +above the head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing +it several times between the vertical and downward positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Change direction or column right (left), march</b>. The hand +on the side toward which the change of direction is to be made +is carried across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm +horizontal; then swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, +pointing in the new direction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>As skirmishers, march</b>. Raise both arms laterally until +horizontal. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>As skirmishers, guide center, march</b>. Raise both arms +laterally until horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward +until vertical and return to the horizontal; repeat several times. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>As skirmishers, guide right (left), march</b>. Raise both arms +laterally until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide +steadily in the horizontal position; swing the other upward until +vertical and return it to the horizontal; repeat several times. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Assemble, march</b>. Raise the arm vertically to its full +extent and describe horizontal circles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Range</b>, or <b>change elevation</b>. To announce <b>range</b>, +extend the arm toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is +intended, fist closed; by keeping fist closed battle sight is +indicated; by opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and +fingers to a number equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 +yards describe a short horizontal line with forefinger. To +<b>change elevation</b>, indicate the amount of increase or +decrease by fingers as above; point upward to indicate increase +and downward to indicate decrease. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>What range are you using?</b> or <b>what is the range?</b> +Extend the arms toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm +to the front, resting on the other hand, fist closed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Are you ready?</b> or <b>I am ready</b>. Raise the hand, +fingers extended and joined, palm toward the person addressed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Commence firing</b>. Move the arm extended in full length, +hand palm down, several times through a horizontal arc in front +of the body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Fire faster</b>. Execute rapidly the signal "Commence firing." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Fire slower</b>. Execute slowly the signal "Commence firing." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left</b>. Extend +the arm in full length to the front, palm to the right (left); +swing the arm to right (left), and point in the direction of +the new target. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Fix bayonet</b>. Simulate the movement of the right hand in +"Fix bayonet" (par. 95).--(<i>C. I. D. R., No. 14, May 18, +1916.</i>) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Suspend firing</b>. Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a +horizontal position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand +to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Cease firing</b>. Raise the forearm as in <b>suspend firing</b> +and swing it up and down several times in front of the face. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Platoon</b>. Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon +leader; describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Squad</b>. Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon +leader; swing the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 44.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Rush</b>. Same as double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>44.</b> The signals <b>platoon</b> and <b>squad</b> are +intended primarily for communication between the captain and his +platoon leaders. The signal <b>platoon</b> or <b>squad</b> +indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the signal +which follows to be executed by platoon or squad. +</p> + +<h4>FLAG SIGNALS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>45.</b> The signal flags described below are carried by the +company musicians in the field. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent +battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are +as shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, +within their respective battalions, in the order given below. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> +<tr><td colspan=2>First battalion:</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company A. Red field, white square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company B. Red field, blue square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company C. Red field, white diagonals.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.</td></tr> +<tr><td colspan=2>Second battalion:</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company E. White field, red square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company F. White field, blue square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company G. White field, red diagonals.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company H. White field, blue diagonals.</td></tr> +<tr><td colspan=2>Third battalion:</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company I. Blue field, red square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company K. Blue field, white square.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td>Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>46.</b> In addition to their use in visual signaling, these +flags serve to mark the assembly point of the company when +disorganized by combat, and to mark the location of the company +in bivouac and elsewhere, when such use is desirable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>47.</b> (1) For communication between the firing line and the +reserve or commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal +Corps codes) are prescribed and should be memorized. In +transmission, their concealment from the enemy's view should be +insured. In the absence of signal flags, the headdress or other +substitute may be used. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=1 cellspacing=0 class="center"> +<tr><th>Letter of alphabet</th> + <th>If signaled from the rear to the firing line.</th> + <th>If signaled from the firing line to the rear.</th></tr> +<tr><td>A M</td> + <td>Ammunition going forward.</td> + <td>Ammunition required.</td></tr> +<tr><td>C C C</td> + <td>Charge (mandatory at all times).</td> + <td>Am about to charge if no instructions to the + contrary.</td></tr> +<tr><td>C F</td> + <td>Cease firing.</td> + <td>Cease firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td>D T</td> + <td>Double time or "rush".</td> + <td>Double time or "rush".</td></tr> +<tr><td>F</td> + <td>Commence firing.</td> + <td>Commence firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td>F B</td> + <td>Fix bayonets.</td> + <td>Fix bayonets.</td></tr> +<tr><td>F L</td> + <td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td> + <td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td></tr> +<tr><td>G</td> + <td>Move forward.</td> + <td>Preparing to move forward.</td></tr> +<tr><td>H H H</td> + <td>Halt.</td> + <td>Halt.</td></tr> +<tr><td>K</td> + <td>Negative.</td> + <td>Negative.</td></tr> +<tr><td>L T</td> + <td>Left.</td> + <td>Left.</td></tr> +<tr><td>O (Ardois and semaphore only.)</td> + <td>What is the (R. N., etc.?) Interrogatory.</td> + <td>What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory.</td></tr> +<tr><td>O (All methods but ardois and semaphore.)</td> + <td>...do...</td> + <td>Do.</td></tr> +<tr><td>P</td> + <td>Affirmative.</td> + <td>Affirmative.</td></tr> +<tr><td>R</td> + <td>Acknowledgment.</td> + <td>Acknowledgment.</td></tr> +<tr><td>R N</td> + <td>Range.</td> + <td>Range.</td></tr> +<tr><td>R T</td> + <td>Right.</td> + <td>Right.</td></tr> +<tr><td>S S S</td> + <td>Support going forward.</td> + <td>Support needed.</td></tr> +<tr><td>S U F</td> + <td>Suspend firing.</td> + <td>Suspend firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td>T</td> + <td>Target.</td> + <td>Target.</td></tr> +</table> + +<h4>(2) THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +(See illustrations in chapter XII.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. School of the soldier.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>48.</b> The instructor explains briefly each movement, first +executing it himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to +take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch them for +the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable to +correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same +movement, although each should be understood before passing to +another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and +uniformity. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>49.</b> In order that all may advance as rapidly as their +abilities permit, the recruits are grouped according to +proficiency as instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude +and quickness are separated from the others and placed under +experienced drill masters. +</p> + +<h4>INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>50.</b> For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, +usually not exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in +single rank. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +POSITION OF THE SOLDIER, OR ATTENTION. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>51.</b> Heels on the same line and as near each other us +the conformation of the man permits. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Knees straight, without stiffness. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally +on hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling +equally. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the +trousers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the +axis of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of +the feet. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE RESTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>52.</b> Being at a halt, the commands are: <b>FALL OUT; REST; +AT EASE;</b> and, 1. <i>Parade</i>, 2. <b>REST</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>fall out</b>, the men may leave the ranks, but +are required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume +their former places, at attention, at the command <b>fall in</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>rest</b> each man keeps one foot in place, but +is not required to preserve silence or immobility. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command at ease each man keeps one foot in place and is +required to preserve silence but not immobility. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>53.</b> 1. <i>Parade</i>, 2. <b>REST</b>. Carry the right foot +6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the +hands, without constraint, in front of the center of the body, +fingers joined, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the +thumb and forefinger of the right hand; preserve silence and +steadiness of position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>54.</b> To resume the attention: 1. <i>Squad</i>, 2. +<b>ATTENTION.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men take the position of the soldier. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +EYES RIGHT OR LEFT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>55.</b> 1. <i>Eyes</i>, 2. <b>RIGHT (left)</b>, 3. +<b>FRONT.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>right</b>, turn the head to the right oblique, +eyes fixed on the line of eye of the men in, or supposed to be +in, the same rank. At the command front, turn the head and eyes +to the front. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FACINGS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>56.</b> To the flank: 1. <i>Right (left)</i>, 2. <b>FACE.</b> +Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right +turning on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the +ball of the left foot; place the left foot by the side of the +right. Left face is executed on the left heel in the +corresponding manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Right (left) half face</b> is executed similarly, facing +45°. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot +and step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; +to face in marching without gaining ground in the new direction, +turn on the ball of either foot and mark time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>57.</b> To the rear: 1. <i>About</i>, 2. <b>FACE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the +rear and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing +the position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the +right on the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by +the side of the left. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SALUTE WITH THE HAND. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>58.</b> 1. <i>Hand</i>, 2. <b>SALUTE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm +inclined at about 45°, hand and wrist straight; at the same +time look toward the person saluted. (<b>TWO</b>) Drop the arm +smartly by the side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes," paragraphs +758-765. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +STEPS AND MARCHINGS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>59.</b> All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except +right step, begin with the left foot. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>60.</b> The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, +measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 +steps per minute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence +is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step +by calling <b>one, two, three, four</b>, or <b>left, right</b>, the +instant the left and right root, respectively, should be planted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>61.</b> All steps and marchings and movements involving march +are executed in <b>quick time</b> unless the squad be marching in +<b>double time</b>, or <b>double time</b> be added to the command: +in the latter case <b>double time</b> is added to the preparatory +command. Example: 1. <i>Squad right, double time</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b> +(School of the Squad). +</p> + +<p class="center"> +QUICK TIME. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>62.</b> Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. +<i>Forward</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>forward</b>, shift the weight of the body to the +right leg, left knee straight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, move the left foot smartly straight +forward 30 inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant +it without shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and +plant it as above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>63.</b> Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in +double time; 1. <i>Double time</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body +to the right leg. At the command <b>march</b>, raise the forearms, +fingers closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line; +take up an easy run with the step and cadence of double time, +allowing a natural swinging motion to the arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If marching in quick time, at the command <b>march</b>, given as +either foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and +then step off in double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>64.</b> To resume the quick time: 1. <i>Quick time</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, given as either foot strikes the +ground, advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume +the quick time, dropping the hands by the sides. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO MARK TIME. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>65.</b> Being in march; 1. <i>Mark time</i>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, given as either foot strikes the +ground, advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in +rear and continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot +about 2 inches and planting it on line with the other. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being at a halt, at the command <b>march</b>, raise and plant +the feet as described above. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE HALF STEP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>66.</b> 1. <i>Half step</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>67. Forward, half step, halt</b>, and <b>mark time</b> may be +executed one from the other in quick or double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. +<i>Forward</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SIDE STEP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>68.</b> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <i>Right (left) step</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring +the left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence +of quick time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed +in double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at order arms, the side step is executed <b>at trail</b> without +command. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +BACK STEP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>69.</b> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <i>Backward</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed +in double time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at order arms, the back step is executed <b>at trail</b> without +command. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO HALT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>70.</b> To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. +<i>Squad</i>, 2. <b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>halt</b>, given as either foot strikes the +ground, plant the other foot as in marching; raise and place +the first foot by the side of the other. If in double time, +drop the hands by the sides. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO MARCH BY THE FLANK. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>71.</b> Being in march: 1. <i>By the right (left) flank</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, given as the right foot strikes the +ground, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right +in marching and step off in the new direction with the right foot. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO MARCH TO THE REAR. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>72.</b> Being in march: 1. <i>To the rear</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, given as the right foot strikes the +ground, advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about +on the balls of both feet and immediately step off with the left +foot. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four +steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the +left foot. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +CHANGE STEP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>73.</b> Being in march: 1. <i>Change step</i>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, given as the right foot strikes the +ground, advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the +right foot near the heel of the left and step off with the left +foot. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The charge on the right foot is similarly executed, the command +<b>march</b> being given as the left foot strikes the ground. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +MANUAL OF ARMS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>74.</b> As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, +nomenclature (Pl. 1), and care of his rifle; when fair progress +has been made in the instruction without arms, he is taught the +manual of arms; instruction without arms and that with arms +alternate. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>75.</b> The following rules govern the carrying of the piece: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the +chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When +so loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried +locked; that is, with the <b>safety</b> lock turned to the "safe." +At all other times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately +inspected at the commands: 1. <i>Inspection</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; +3. <i>Order (Right shoulder, port)</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine, they are removed +and placed in the belt. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Third. The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges +are actually used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on +guard, or for combat. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fifth. Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms. FALL +OUT, REST, and AT EASE are executed as without arms. On resuming +ATTENTION the position of order arms is taken. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece +is brought to the right shoulder at the command MARCH, the three +motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may +be executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command +with the words <b>at trail</b>; as, 1. <i>At trail, forward</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>; the trail is taken at the command <b>march</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval +or distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise +the piece to the trail while in motion and resume the order on +halting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution +of the order begins when the halt is completed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without +arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>76.</b> The following rules govern the execution of the manual of +arms: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center +of gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the +sling is included in the grasp of the hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Second. In all positions of the piece "diagonally across the +body" the position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same +as in port arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, +the motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece +about 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand +above and near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended +and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, +all fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To complete +the order, lower the piece gently to the ground with the right +hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take the position +of order arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, +or other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing +the manual, is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the +recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the +details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as +they become accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor +may require them to count aloud in cadence with the motions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for +the purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed +in detail; in this case the command of <b>execution</b> determines +the prompt execution of the first motion, and the commands, <b>two, +three, four</b>, that of the other motions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: +<b>By the numbers</b>; all movements divided into motions are then +executed as above explained until he cautions: <b>Without the +numbers</b>; or commands movements other than those in the manual +of arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of +the manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard +to the previous position of the piece. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may +be carried in any manner directed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>77.</b> <b>Position of order arms standing</b>: The butt rests +evenly on the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a +line with toe of, and touching, the right shoe, arms and hands +hanging naturally, right hand holding the piece between the thumb +and fingers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>78.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of +the body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the +left hand at the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against +the body. (<b>TWO</b>) Grasp the small of the stock with the +right hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>79.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Port</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across +the body. grasp it smartly with both hands; the right palm down, +at the small of the stock; the left palm up, at the balance; +barrel up, sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction +of the neck with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; +left forearm resting against the body; the piece in a vertical +plane parallel to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>80.</b> Being at present arms: 1. <i>Port</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position +of port arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>81.</b> Being at port arms: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center +of the body and take the position of present arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>82.</b> Being at present or port arms: 1. <i>Order</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the +right with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just +above the lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the +next to the last position in coming to the order, (<b>TWO</b>) +Complete the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>83.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Right shoulder</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across +the body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, +the heel between the first two fingers. (<b>TWO</b>) Without +changing the grasp of the right hand, place the piece on the right +shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 45° from +the horizontal, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right +elbow near the side, the piece in a vertical plane perpendicular +to the front; carry the left hand, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, to the small of the stock, tip of the forefinger touching +the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow down. (<b>THREE</b>) +Drop the left hand by the side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>84.</b> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <i>Order</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across +the body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. +(<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>) Execute order arms us described from +port arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>85.</b> Being at port arms: 1. <i>Right shoulder</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Change the right hand to the butt. (<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>) +As in right shoulder arms from order arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>86.</b> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <i>Port</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across +the body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. +(<b>TWO</b>) Change the right hand to the small of the stock. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>87.</b> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <i>Present</i>, +2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Execute port arms. (<b>THREE</b>) Execute present arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>88.</b> Being at present arms: 1. <i>Right shoulder</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Execute port arms. (<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>), (<b>FOUR</b>) +Execute right shoulder arms as from port arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>89.</b> Being at port arms: 1. <i>Left shoulder</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left +shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; +at the same time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between +first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. +(<b>TWO</b>) Drop the right hand by the side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being at left shoulder arms: 1. <i>Port</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. +(<b>TWO</b>) Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, +regrasp it with the left, and take the position of port arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Left shoulder arms</b> may be ordered directly from the order, +right shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command +<b>arms</b> execute <b>port arms</b> and continue in cadence to +the position ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>90.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Parade</i>, 2. <b>REST.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee +slightly bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the +body, barrel to the left; grasp the piece with the left hand +just below the stacking swivel, and with the right hand below +and against the left. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being at parade rest: 1. <i>Squad</i>, 2. <b>ATTENTION.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the +right hip. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>91.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Trail</i>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle +forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30° with +the vertical. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, +the piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered +until the piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left +hand may be used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>92.</b> Being at trail arms: 1. <i>Order</i>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +RIFLE SALUTE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>93.</b> Being at right shoulder arms: 1. <i>Rifle</i>, 2. +<b>SALUTE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm +horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward +the person saluted. (<b>TWO</b>) Drop left hand by the side; +turn head and eves to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>94.</b> Being at order or trail arms: 1. <i>Rifle</i>, 2. +<b>SALUTE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand +down, thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against +piece near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (<b>TWO</b>) +Drop the left hand by the side; turn the head and eyes to the +front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes." +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE BAYONET. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>95.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Fix</i>, 2. <b>BAYONET.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade +rest; grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward +the body; draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the +barrel, glancing at the muzzle; resume the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with +the left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>96.</b> Being at order arms: 1. <i>Unfix</i>, 2. <b>BAYONET.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade +rest; grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, +pressing the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise +the bayonet until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle +of the piece; drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward +the body, and, glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the +blade passing between the left arm and the body; regrasp the +piece with the right hand and resume the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the +bayonet from the rifle with the left hand find return it to the +scabbard in the most convenient manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in +the most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned +to the original position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fix and unfix bayonet are executed, with promptness and regularity +but not in cadence. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>97. CHARGE BAYONET.</b> Whether executed at halt or in motion, +the bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of +<b>guard</b> in the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in +the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE INSPECTION. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>98.</b> Being at order firms: 1. <i>Inspection</i>, 2. +<b>ARMS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command take the position of port arms. (<b>TWO</b>) +Seize the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right +hand, turn the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the +chamber. Having found the chamber empty, or haying emptied it, +raise the head and eyes to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>99.</b> Being at inspection arms: 1. <i>Order (Right shoulder, +port)</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command +arms, complete the movement ordered. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO DISMISS THE SQUAD. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>100.</b> Being at halt: 1. <i>Inspection</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, +3. <i>Port</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>, 5. <b>DISMISSED</b>. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. School of the squad.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>101.</b> Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of +instruction, discipline, control, and order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>102.</b> The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven +privates. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the +squad a fixed unit find to facilitate the control and movement +of the company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and +less than 12, they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess +above 8 being posted as file closers. If the number grouped is +greater than 11, 2 or more squads are formed and the group is +termed a platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>103.</b> The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is +replaced by a designated private. If no private is designated, +the senior in length of service acts as leader. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the +front rank of the squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear +rank man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank +until the corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear +rank man steps back into the rear rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>104.</b> In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve +the integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace +those disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that +every man is placed in a squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which +they belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated +therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon +leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>105.</b> The squad executes the <b>halt, rest, facings, +steps</b>, and <b>marchings</b> and the <b>manual of arms</b> as +explained in the School of the Soldier. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FORM THE SQUAD. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>106.</b> To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 +paces in front of where the center is to be and commands: +<b>FALL IN</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged +by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order +of height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand +as soon as the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank +forms with distance of 40 inches. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The instructor then commands: <b>COUNT OFF</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At this command all except the right file execute <b>eyes right</b>, +and beginning on the right, the men in each rank count <b>one, two, +three, four</b>; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as +he counts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Pieces are then inspected. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ALIGNMENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>107.</b> To align the squad, the base file or files having been +established: 1. <i>Right (Left)</i>, 2. <b>DRESS</b>, 3. <b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>dress</b> all men place the left hand upon the +hip (whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the +base file, when on or near the new line executes <b>eyes right</b>, +and, taking steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his +right arm rests lightly against the arm of the man on his right, +and so that his eyes and shoulders are in line with those of +the men on his right; the rear rank men cover in file. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the +right flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, +or in advance, of the line; only the men designated move. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, each +man turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand +by his side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, +or parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique +directions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a +considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed +by marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, +as the case may be, without other command, and at the trail. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>108.</b> To preserve the alignment when marching: <b>GUIDE RIGHT +(LEFT)</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, +yielding to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the +opposite direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually +opening out or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly +lengthening or shortening the step; the rear-rank men cover their +file leaders at 40 inches. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated +flank, conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, +the lending man of the front rank is the guide. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>109.</b> Being in line at a halt: 1. <b>Take interval</b>, 2. +<i>To the right (left)</i>, 3. <b>MARCH</b>, 4. <i>Squad</i>, 5. +<b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps +and halt; at the command march all face to the right and the +leading man of each rank steps off; the other men step off in +succession, each following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank +men marching abreast of their file leaders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command halt, given when all have their intervals, all +halt and face to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>110.</b> Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. +<i>Assemble, to the right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on +the right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, +close by the shortest line, and face to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>111.</b> Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. +<i>Take distance</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Squad</i>, 4. +<b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b> No. 1 of the front rank moves straight +to the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, +3, and 4 of the rear rank, in the order named, move straight +to the front, each stepping off so as to follow the preceding +man at 4 paces. The command <b>halt</b> is given when all have +their distances. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the +movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>112</b>. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. +<i>Assemble</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward +to their proper places in line. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO STACK AND TAKE ARMS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>113.</b> Being in line at a halt: <b>STACK ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the +left hand at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, +barrel to the front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and +opposite the center of the interval on his right, the thumb and +forefinger raising the stacking swivel; each even number of the +rear rank then passes his piece, barrel to the rear, to his file +leader, who grasps it between the bands with his right hand and +throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of his own piece +and opposite the right of the interval, the right hand-slipping +to the upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking +swivel, which he engages with that of his own piece; each odd +number of the front rank raises his piece with the right hand, +carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left hand, +guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel +of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number of +the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle +formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, +to the right of and against the toe of his right shoe. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even, +numbers of the front rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position +of the soldier. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>114.</b> Being in line behind the stacks: <b>TAKE ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front +rank; each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece +with the left hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right +hand, grasping both between the bands; each odd number of the +front rank grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand, +disengages it by raising the butt from the ground and then, turning +the piece to the right, detaches it from the stack; each even +number of the front rank disengages and detaches his piece by +turning it to the left, and then passes the piece of his rear-rank +man to him, and all resume the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>115.</b> Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 +rear rank takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking +the stack; the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Pieces not used in making the stack are termed loose pieces. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE OBLIQUE MARCH. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>116.</b> For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in +column or correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to +face half right or half left, points out to the men their relative +positions, and explains that these are to be maintained in the +oblique march. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>117.</b> 1. <i>Right (Left) oblique</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each man steps off in a direction 45° to the right of his +original front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his +shoulders parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right +front of the line or column), and so regulates his steps that +the ranks remain parallel to their original front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command halt the men halt faced to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To resume the original direction: 1. <i>Forward</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight +to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at <b>half step</b> or <b>mark time</b> while obliquing, the +oblique march is resumed by the commands: 1. <i>Oblique</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO TURN ON MOVING PIVOT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>118.</b> Being in line: 1. <i>Right (Left) turn</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the +same ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front +rank faces to the right in marching and takes the half step; +the other men of the rank oblique to the right until opposite +their places in line, then execute a second right oblique and +take the half step on arriving abreast of the pivot man. All +glance toward the marching flank while at half step and take the +full step without command as the last man arrives on the line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Right (left) half turn</b> is executed in a similar manner. +The pivot man makes a half change of direction to the right and +the other men make quarter changes in obliquing. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO TURN ON FIXED PIVOT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>119.</b> Being in line, to turn and march: 1. <i>Squad right +(left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces +to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank +men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, +and mark time. In the rear rank the third man from the right, +followed in column by the second and first, moves straight to the +front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the +right in marching and mark time; the other number of the rear rank +moves straight to the front four paces and places himself abreast +of the man on his right. Men on the new line glance toward the +marching flank while marking time and, as the last man arrives +on the line, both ranks execute FORWARD, MARCH, without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>120.</b> Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. <i>Squad right +(left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Squad</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The third command is given immediately after the second. The +turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except +that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the +fourth command is given, when all halt. The fourth command should +be given as the last man arrives on the line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>121.</b> Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. <i>Squad +right (left) about</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command, the front rank twice executes <b>squad +right</b>, initiating the <b>second squad</b> right when the man +on the marching flank has arrived abreast of the rank. In the +rear rank the third man from the right, followed by the second +and first in column, moves straight to the front until on the +prolongation of the line to be occupied by the rear rank; changes +direction to the right; moves in the new direction until in rear +of his front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching, +mark time, and glance toward the marching flank. The fourth man +marches on the left of the third to his new position; as he +arrives on the line, both ranks execute <b>forward, march</b>, +without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>122.</b> Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. <i>Squad +right (left) about</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Squad</i>, 4. +<b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The third command is given immediately after the second. The +turn is executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except +that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the +fourth command is given, when all halt. The fourth command should +be given as the last man arrives on the line. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FOLLOW THE CORPORAL. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>123.</b> Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad +without unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in +front of it and commands <b>FOLLOW ME</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If in line or skirmish line. No. 2 of the front rank follows +in the trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men +conform to the movements of No. 2. guiding on him and maintaining +their relative positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If in column, the head of the column follows the corporal. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO DEPLOY AS SKIRMISHERS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>124.</b> Being in any formation, assembled: 1. <i>As +skirmishers</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The corporal places himself in front of the squall, if not already +there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the +corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. +3 and 4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file +leaders, extra men on the left of No.4; all then conform to the +corporal's gait. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed +on No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the +march, as the case may be; the corporal places himself in front +of the squad when advancing find in rear when halted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When deployed us skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at +the trail unless otherwise ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front +rank is the guide. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>125.</b> The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half +pace, resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The +front of a squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO INCREASE OR DIMINISH INTERVALS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>126.</b> If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater +than the normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to +increase or decrease the interval: 1. <i>As skirmishers, (so many) +paces</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already +deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE ASSEMBLY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>127.</b> Being deployed: 1. <i>Assemble</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time, +form, and follow him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +KNEELING AND LYING DOWN. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>128.</b> If standing: <b>KNEEL</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the +left rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly +as possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; +piece remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping +it above the lower band. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>129.</b> If standing or kneeling: <b>LIE DOWN</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the +left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35° +to the right; piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground +and pointed to the front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the +balance, right hand grasping the small of the stock opposite +the neck. This is the position of order arms, lying down. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>130.</b> If kneeling or lying down: <b>RISE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked +by the left heel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the +front, on the ground marked by the knees. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>131.</b> If lying down: <b>KNEEL</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Raise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>132.</b> In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying +down are ordinarily used only for the better utilization of +cover. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position maybe taken in +lieu of the position kneeling. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +LOADINGS AND FIRINGS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>133.</b> The commands for loading and firing are the same whether +standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed +at a halt. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does +not load, aim, or fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>134.</b> Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded +without command until the command <b>unload</b>, or <b>inspection +arms</b>, fresh clips being inserted when the magazine is +exhausted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>135.</b> The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. +This may be done before or after announcing the sight setting. +Both are indicated before giving the command for firing, but may +be omitted when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; +in such case battle sight is used if no sight setting is +announced. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>136.</b> The target or aiming point having been designated +and the sight setting announced, such designation or announcement +need not be repeated until a change of either or both is +necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point +or target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until +a change is ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>137.</b> If the men are not already in the position of load, +that position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; +if the announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the +first command for firing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>138.</b> When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to +accurate firing is discretionary with each man. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO LOAD. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>139.</b> Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. <i>With +dummy (blank or ball) cartridges</i>, 2. <b>LOAD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>load</b> each front-rank man or skirmisher +faces half right and carries the right foot to the right, about +1 foot, to such position as will insure the greatest firmness +and steadiness of the body; raises, or lowers, the piece and +drops it into the left hand at the balance, left thumb extended +along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, and turns +the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt +back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, +places the thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the +fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on the +magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine +by pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip, +thrusts the bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety +lock to the "safe" find carries the hand to the small of the +stock. Each rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a +similar position opposite the interval to the right of his +front-rank man, muzzle of the piece extending beyond the front +rank, and loads. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as +nearly as practicable in the position of load. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, +the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left +hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe +of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying +down) are designated as that of load. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>140.</b> For instruction in loading: 1. <i>Simulate</i>, 2. +<b>LOAD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains "off" +and the handling of cartridges is simulated. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The recruits are first taught to <b>simulate</b> loading and +firing; after a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, +blank cartridges may be used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>141.</b> The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning +the magazine "off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in +part while "off" or "on" by pressing cartridges singly down and +back until they are in the proper place. The use of the rifle +as a single loader is, however, to be regarded as exceptional. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO UNLOAD. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>142. UNLOAD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt +alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. +After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first +thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud +holding it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower +down and back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting +the bolt home; the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then +picked up, cleaned, and returned to the belt and the piece is +brought to the order. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO SET THE SIGHT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>143. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED</b> (<b>EIGHT-FIFTY</b>, etc.), or +<b>BATTLE SIGHT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains +and verities sight settings. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FIRE BY VOLLEY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>144</b>. 1. <b>READY</b>, 2. <b>AIM</b>, 3. <i>Squad</i>, 4. +<b>FIRE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>ready</b> turn the safety lock to the "ready"; +at the command <b>aim</b> raise the piece with both hands and +support the butt firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, +right thumb clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow +well under the piece, right elbow as high as the shoulder; +incline the head slightly forward and a little to the right, +cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right eye looking +through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the object +aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against the +front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight +is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of +his file leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle +of his piece beyond the front rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point +of elbow in front of kneecap. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported by the knees. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on +both elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>fire</b> press the finger against the trigger; +fire without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning +the piece; lower the piece to the position of <b>Load</b> and +load. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>145.</b> To continue the firing: 1. <b>AIM</b>, 2. <i>Squad</i>, +3. <b>FIRE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each command is executed as previously explained. <b>Load</b> +(from magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home +the bolt with the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the +"ready." +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FIRE AT WILL. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>146. FIRE AT WILL.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each man, independently of the others, comes to the <b>ready</b>, +aims carefully and deliberately ut the aiming point or target, +<b>fires</b>, <b>loads</b>, and continues the firing until +ordered to <b>suspend</b> or <b>cease firing</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>147.</b> To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress +the instructor shouts: <b>FASTER</b> (<b>SLOWER</b>). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per +minute at effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, +devoting the minimum of time to loading and the maximum to +deliberate aiming. To illustrate the necessity for deliberation, +and to habituate men to combat conditions, small and +comparatively indistinct targets are designated. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FIRE BY CLIP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>148. CLIP FIRE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed in the same manner as <b>fire at will</b>, except that +each man, after having exhausted the cartridges then in the +piece, <b>suspends firing</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO SUSPEND FIRING. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>149.</b> The instructor blows a <b>long blast</b> of the +whistle and repeats same, if necessary, or commands: <b>SUSPEND +FIRING</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a position of +readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. +The men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the +place at which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected +to reappear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to <b>cease +firing</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO CEASE FIRING. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>150. CEASE FIRING.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position +of load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces +are locked and brought to the older. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Cease firing</b> is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes +of position, or to steady the men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>151.</b> Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given +at any time after the preparatory command for firing whether the +firing has actually commenced or not. +</p> + +<h4>THE USE OF COVER.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>152.</b> The recruit should be given careful instruction in +the individual use of cover. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of +natural cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively +upon the enemy; if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily +and as rapidly as possible; he must conceal himself as much as +possible while firing and while advancing. While setting his +sight he should be under cover or lying prone. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>153.</b> To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the +same time concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is +practiced in simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, +and crouching positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of +earth or rocks, from depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, +or windows. He is taught to fire around the right side of his +concealment whenever possible, or, when this is not possible, +to rise enough to fire over the top of his concealment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When these details are understood, he is required to select cover +with reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind +it in proper position for firing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>154.</b> The evil of remaining too long in one place, however +good the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught +to advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before +leaving his concealment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward +all enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing +from a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to +cover and throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced +in advancing from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the +left side, rifle grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself +forward with the right leg. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>155.</b> He should be taught that, when fired on while acting +independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then +endeavor to locate his enemy. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>156.</b> The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is +continued in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then +be taught that the proper advance of the platoon or company and +the effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the +question of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that +he may not move about or shift his position in the firing line +except the better to see the target. +</p> + +<h4>OBSERVATION.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>157.</b> The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great +importance to the soldier. The recruit should be trained in +observing his surrounding from positions and when on the march. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features +of the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting +distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and +forms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>158.</b> In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing +line, they should be practiced in repeating to one another target +and aiming point designations and in quickly locating and pointing +out a designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, +from a prone position, distant objects, particularly troops, +both with the naked eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they +should be trained in estimating distances. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. School of the company.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>159.</b> The captain is responsible for the theoretical and +practical instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, +not only in the duties of their respective grades, but in those of +the next higher grades. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>160.</b> The company in line is formed in double rank with the +men arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right +to left, the tallest on the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The original division into squads is effected by the command: +<b>COUNT OFF</b>. The squads, successively from the right, count +off as in the School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves +as Nos. 4 of the front rank. If the left squad contains less than +six men, it is either increased to that number by transfers from +other squads or is broken up and its members assigned to other +squads and posted in the line of file closers. These squad +organizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, until +the company becomes so reduced in numbers us to necessitate a +new division into squads. No squad will contain less than six +men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>161.</b> The company is further divided into two, three, or +four platoons, each consisting of not less than two nor more than +four squads. In garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons +may exceed four squads. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>162</b>. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads +are numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations +do not change. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the +designations, <b>right, center, left</b>, when in line, and +<b>leading, center, rear</b>, when in column, are applied to +platoons or squads. These designations apply to the actual right, +left, center, head, or rear, in whatever direction the company may +be facing. The <b>center</b> squad is the middle or right middle +squad of the company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>163.</b> Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and +noncommissioned officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1. right; +2. left; 3. center (right center); 4. left center. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, +one to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned +to platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, +its guide or guides accompany the platoon leader. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +During battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies are +filled by noncommissioned officers of the platoon or by the nearest +available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with +reenforcing troops. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig002.jpg" width="520" height="728" alt="Fig. 2"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>164.</b> The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When +not commanding a platoon he is posted as a file closer opposite +the third file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and +when the company is deployed he accompanies the captain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according +to his rank as a sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, +are in ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they +are posted in the line of file closers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. +When the company is deployed, they accompany the captain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>165.</b> The company executes the <b>halt, rests, facings, +steps</b> and <b>marchings, manual of arms, loadings</b> and +<b>firings, takes intervals</b> and <b>distances</b> and +<b>assembles</b>, <b>increases</b> and <b>diminishes +intervals</b>, resumes <b>attention, obliques</b>, resumes the +direct march, preserves alignments, <b>kneels, lies down, +rises, stacks</b>, and <b>takes arms</b>, as explained in the +Schools of the Soldier and the Squad, substituting in the +commands <b>company</b> for <b>squad</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc., +substituting their designation for <b>squad</b> in the commands. +In the same manner these execute the movements prescribed for +the <b>company</b>, whenever possible, substituting their +designation for <b>company</b> in the commands. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>166.</b> A company so depleted as to make division into +platoons impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, +but retains the designation of company. The lieutenants and first +sergeant assist in fire control; the other sergeants place +themselves in the filing line as skirmishers. +</p> + +<h4>CLOSE ORDER.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +RULES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>167.</b> The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, +platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, +respectively, of the company when it is in line or in column of +squads. Other guides are in the line of file closers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the +head of the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the +guiding flank if in line. When a platoon has two guides their +original assignment to flanks of the platoon does not change. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>168.</b> The guides of a column of squads place themselves on +the flank opposite the file closers. To change the guides and +file closers to the other flank, the captain commands: 1. <i>File +closers on left (right) flank</i>; 2. <b>MARCH</b>. The file +closers dart through the column; the captain and guides change. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward +the side of the guide. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>169.</b> Men in the line of file closers do not execute the +loadings or firings. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the +manual of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when +they remain at the order. During ceremonies they execute all +movements. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>170.</b> In <b>taking intervals and distances</b>, unless +otherwise directed, the right and left guides, at the first +command, place themselves in the line of file closers, and, with +them, take a distance of 4 paces from the rear rank. In taking +intervals, at the command <b>march</b>, the file closers face to +the flank and each steps off with the file nearest him. In +<b>assembling</b> the guides and file closers resume their +positions in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>171.</b> In movements executed simultaneously by platoons +(as <b>platoons right</b> or <b>platoons, column right</b>), +platoon leaders repeat the preparatory command (<b>platoon +right</b>, etc.), applicable to their respective platoons. The +command of execution is given by the captain only. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FORM THE COMPANY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>172.</b> At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant +takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of the +company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands: <b>FALL +IN</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the +front, where the right of the company is to rest, and at such +point that the center of the company will be 6 paces from and +opposite the first sergeant; the squads form in their proper +places on the left of the right guide, superintended by the other +sergeants, who then take their posts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The first sergeant commands: <b>REPORT</b>. Remaining in position +at the order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, +salute and report: <b>All present</b>; or <b>Private(s)</b> +------ <b>absent</b>. The first sergeant does not return the +salutes of the squad leaders; he then commands: 1. <i>Inspection</i>, +2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <i>Order</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>, faces about, +salutes the captain, reports: <b>Sir, all present or accounted +for</b>, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, and without +command, takes his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant +commands: 1. <i>Inspection</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <i>Right +shoulder</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>, and calls the roll. Each man, as +his name is called, answers <b>here</b> and executes order arms. +The sergeant then effects the division into squads and reports +the company as prescribed above. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, +and facing, the company in time to receive the report of the +first sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has +reported and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not +under arms, is formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>173.</b> For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, +the company, when small, may be formed in single rank. In this +formation close order movements only are executed. The single +rank executes all movements as explained for the front rank of +a company. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO DISMISS THE COMPANY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>174.</b> Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first +sergeant: <b>Dismiss the company</b>. The officers fallout; the +first sergeant places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the +front and 2 paces from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, +faces toward opposite flank of the company, and commands: 1. +<i>Inspection</i>. 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <i>Port</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>, +5. <b>DISMISSED</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ALIGNMENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>175.</b> The alignments are executed as prescribed in the +School of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the +flank file. The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head +and eyes to the front and covers his file leader. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation +of the line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the +dress is made, verifies the alignment, and commands: <b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Platoon lenders take a like position when requited to verify +alignments. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +MOVEMENTS ON THE FIXED PIVOT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>176.</b> Being in line, to tune the company: 1. <i>Company +right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Company</i>, 4. +<b>HALT</b>; or, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces +to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank +men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, +and mark time; in the rear rank the third man from the right, +followed in column by the second and first, moves straight to +the front until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to +the right in marching and mark time; the remaining men of the +rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces, oblique to the +right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover their +file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes +post on the flank, and marks time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear +of the new line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The command <b>halt</b> may be given at any time after the +movement begins; only those halt who are in the new position. +Each of the others halt upon arriving on the line, aligns +himself to the right, and executes <b>front</b> without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>177.</b> Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the +reverse: 1. <i>Platoons right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. +<i>Company</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>; or, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank +toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This +is effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>178.</b> Being in line, to form column of squads, or the +reverse; or, being in line of platoons, to form column of +platoons, or the reverse: 1. <i>Squads right (left)</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>, or, 1. <i>Squads right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, +3. <i>Company</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of +the file closers, they dart through the column and take posts +in rear of the company at the second command. If the column of +squads be formed from line, the file closers take posts on the +pivot flank, abreast of and 4 inches from the nearest rank. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +MOVEMENTS ON THE MOVING PIVOT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>179.</b> Being in line, to change direction: 1. <i>Right +(Left) turn</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that +the men do not glance toward the marching flank and that all +take the full step at the fourth command. The right guide is +the pivot of the front rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the +same ground as his file leader. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>180.</b> Being in column of platoons, to change direction: +1. <i>Column right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the first command the leader of the lending platoon commands: +<b>Right turn</b>. At the command <b>march</b> the leading +platoon turns to the right on moving pivot; its lender commands: +1. <i>Forward</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, on completion of the turn. +Rear platoons march squarely up to the turning point of the +leading platoon and turn at command of their lenders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>181.</b> Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. +<i>Column right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns +to the right on moving pivot, as in the School of the Squad; +the other ranks, without command, turn successively on the same +ground and in a similar manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>182.</b> Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons +or the reverse: 1. <i>Platoons, column right (left)</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>183.</b> Being in line, to form column of squads and change +direction: 1. <i>Squads right (left), column right (left)</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>; or, 1. <i>Right (Left) by squads</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the first case the right squad initiates the <b>column +right</b> as soon as it has completed the <b>squad right</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the second case, at the command march, the right squad marches +<b>forward</b>; the remainder of the company executes <b>squads +right, column left</b>, and follows the right squad. The right +guide, when he has posted himself in front of the right squad, +takes four short steps, then resumes the full step; the right +squad conforms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>184.</b> Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. <i>Squads +right (left), platoons column right (left)</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; +or, 1. <i>Platoons, right (left) by squads</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the +preceding paragraph. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FACING OR MARCHING TO THE REAR. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>185.</b> Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of +platoons or squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. <i>Squads +right (left) about</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; or, 1. <i>Squads right +(left) about</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Company</i>, 4. +<b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers +turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, +each darts through the nearest interval between squads. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>186.</b> To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. <i>About</i>, +2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now +the front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their +relative positions. No other movement is executed until the line +is faced to the original front. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ON RIGHT (LEFT) INTO LINE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>187.</b> Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on +right or left: 1. <i>On right (left) into line</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, +3. <i>Company</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, 5. <b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: +<b>Right turn</b>. The leaders of the other units command: +<b>Forward</b>, if at a halt. At the second command the leading +unit turns to the right on moving pivot. The command <b>halt</b> +is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired distance +in the new direction; it halts; its leader then commands: <b>Right +dress</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, +when opposite the right of its place in line, executes <b>right +turn</b> at the command of its leaner; each is halted on the line +at the command of its leader, who then commands: <b>Right +dress</b>. All dress on the first unit in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If executed in double time, the lending squad marches in double +time until halted. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FRONT INTO LINE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>188.</b> Being in column of platoons or squads. to form line +to the front: 1. <i>Right (Left) front into line</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Company</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, 5. <b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the +leading one command: <b>Right oblique</b>. If at a halt, the +leader of the leading unit commands: <b>Forward</b>. At the +second command the leading unit moves straight forward; the rear +units oblique as indicated. The command <b>halt</b> is given +when the leading unit has advanced the desired distance; it +halts; its leader then commands: <b>Left dress</b>. Each of the +rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original +direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the +line at the command of its leader, who then commands: <b>Left +dress</b>. All dress on the first unit in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>189.</b> Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, +or being in line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. +<i>Platoons, right, (left) front into line</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, +3. <i>Company</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, 5. <b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming +the company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left +platoon. If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify +the alignment before taking their posts; the captain commands +<b>front</b> when the alignments have been verified. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When <b>front into line</b> is executed in double time the +commands for halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is +toward the side of the first unit in line. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>190.</b> The column of squads is the habitual column of route, +but route step and at ease are applicable to any marching +formation. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>191.</b> To march at route step: 1. <i>Route step</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sabers are carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry +their pieces at will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not +required to preserve silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks +cover and preserve their distance. If halted from route step, +the men stand <b>at rest</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>192.</b> To march at ease: 1. <i>At ease</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The company marches as in route step, except that silence is +preserved; when halted, the men remain at ease. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>193.</b> Marching at route step or fit ease: 1. <i>Company</i>, +2. <b>ATTENTION</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>attention</b> the pieces are brought to the +right shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>194.</b> Being in column of squads: 1. <i>Right (Left) by +twos</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b> all files except the two right files +of the leading squad execute <b>in place halt</b>; the two left +files of the leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged +and follow the right files at the shortest practicable distance. +The remaining squads follow successively in like manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>195.</b> Being in column of squads or twos: 1. <i>Right (Left) +by file</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, all files execute <b>in place +halt</b> except the right file of the leading two or squad. +The left file or files of the leading two or squad oblique +successively to the right when disengaged and each follows the +file on its right at the shortest practicable distance. The +remaining twos or squads follow successively in like manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>196.</b> Being in column of files or twos, to form column of +squads; or being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. +<i>Squads (Twos), right (left) front into line</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b>, the leading file or files halt. The +remainder of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts +on line with the leading file or files. The remaining squads or +twos close up and successively form in rear of the first in like +manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered +<b>right</b> or <b>left</b>, so as to restore the files to their +normal relative positions in the two or squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>197.</b> The movements prescribed in the three preceding +paragraphs are difficult of execution at attention and have no +value as disciplinary exercises. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>198.</b> Marching by twos or files can not be executed without +serious delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution +will be taken to obviate the necessity for these formations. +</p> + +<h4>EXTENDED ORDER.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +RULES FOR DEPLOYMENT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>199.</b> The command <b>guide right</b> (<b>left</b> or +<b>center</b>) indicates the base squad for the deployment; if +in line it designates the actual <b>right</b> (<b>left</b> or +<b>center</b>) squad; if in column the command <b>guide right +(left</b>) designates the <b>leading</b> squad, and the command +<b>guide center</b> designates the center squad. After the +deployment is completed, the guide is <b>center</b> without +command, unless otherwise ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>200.</b> At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, +from either column of squads or line, each squad leader (except +the leader of the base squad, when his squad does not advance), +cautions his squad, <b>follow me</b> or <b>by the right +(left) flank</b>, as the case may be; at the command <b>march</b>, +he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its place in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>201.</b> Having given the command for forming skirmish line, +the captain, if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base +squad the point on which the squad is to march; the corporal +habitually looks to the captain for such directions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>202.</b> The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient +interval. The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the +general line; each corporal halts in his place in line and commands +or signals, <b>as skirmishers</b>; the squad deploys and halts +abreast of him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before +arriving on the line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>203.</b> Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the +guide. Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march +so as best to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the +general and orderly progress of the whole is paramount. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On halting a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the +enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying +down if necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>204.</b> The company in skirmish line <b>advances, halts, +moves by the flank</b>, or <b>to the rear, obliques</b>, resumes +the <b>direct march</b>, passes from <b>quick</b> to <b>double +time</b> and the reverse by the same commands and in a similar +manner as in close order; if at a halt, the movement <b>by the +flank</b> or <b>to the rear</b> is executed by the same commands +as when marching. <b>Company right (left, half right, half +left)</b> is executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish +intervals being maintained. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>205.</b> A platoon or other part of the company is deployed +and marched in the same manner as the company, substituting in +the commands, <b>platoon</b> (<b>detachment</b>, etc.) for +<b>company</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +DEPLOYMENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>206.</b> Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: +1. <i>As skirmishers, guide right (left or center)</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to +the front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, +the captain commands: 1. <i>Company</i>, 2. <b>HALT</b>. If the +guide be <b>right (left)</b>, the other corporals move to the +<b>left (right)</b> front, and, in succession from the base, +place their squads on the line; if the guide be center, the +other corporals move to the <b>right</b> or <b>left</b> front, +according as they are on the right or left of the center squad, +and in succession from the center squad place their squads on +the line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the +other squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; +interior squads may be moved when squads more distant from the +base have gained comfortable marching distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>207.</b> Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to +the front: 1. <i>As skirmishers, guide right (left or center)</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves +straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without +advancing. If the guide be <b>right (left)</b>, the other +corporals move to the <b>left (right) front</b>, and, in +succession from the base, place their squads on the line; if +the guide be <b>center</b>, the corporals in front of the center +squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the right rear), the +corporals in rear of the center squad move to the left front, +and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on the +line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and +in like manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>208.</b> The company in line or in column of squads may be +deployed in an oblique direction by the same commands. The +captain points out the desired direction; the corporal of the +base squad moves in the direction indicated; the other corporals +conform. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>209.</b> To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line +or the column of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear +and then deployed as described. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>210.</b> The intervals between men are increased or decreased +as described in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory +command, <b>guide right</b> (<b>left</b> or <b>center</b>) if +necessary. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE ASSEMBLY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>211.</b> The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, +the element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1. +<i>Assemble</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated +point and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, +these are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, +and the company is re-formed in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. <i>Platoons, +assemble</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. <i>Such platoon(s), assemble</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for +the company. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE ADVANCE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>212.</b> The advance of a company into an engagement (whether +for attack or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably +column of squads, until the probability of encountering hostile +fire makes it advisable to deploy. After deployment, and before +opening fire, the advance of the company may be continued in +skirmish line or other suitable formation, depending upon +circumstances. The advance may often be facilitated, or better +advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by the employment +of the <b>platoon</b> or <b>squad columns</b> or by the use of +a <b>succession of thin lines</b>. The selection of the method +to be used is made by the captain or major, the choice depending +upon conditions arising during the progress of the advance. If +the deployment is found to be premature, it will generally be +best to assemble the company and proceed in close order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Patrols ure used to provide the necessary security against surprise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>213.</b> Being in skirmish line: 1. <i>Platoon columns</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their +respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march +to the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in +like manner to the right; each platoon leader thus conducts the +march of his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides +follow in rear of their respective platoons to insure prompt +and orderly execution of the advance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>214.</b> Being in skirmish line: 1. <i>Squad columns</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad +oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at +easy marching distances. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>215. Platoon columns</b> are profitably used where the ground +is so difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to +take advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons +should march within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.[5] +<b>squad columns</b> are of value principally in facilitating the +advance over rough or brush-grown ground; they afford no material +advantage in securing cover. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 5: Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>216.</b> To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. <i>As +skirmishers</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place +themselves in their original positions on the line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>217.</b> Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. <i>Assemble</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The platoon or squad leaders signal <b>assemble</b>. The men of +each platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to +the right and left, take their proper places in line; each unit +assembling on the leading element of the column and re-forming +in line. The platoon or squad leaders conduct their units toward +the element or point indicated by the captain, and to their places +in line; the company is re-formed in line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>218.</b> Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of +thin lines: 1. <i>(Such numbers), forward</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain points out in advance the selected position in front +of the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to +the front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals +as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable +distance (generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the +terrain and the character of the hostile fire), a second is sent +forward by similar commands, and so on at irregular distances, +until the whole line has advanced, Upon arriving at the indicated +position, the first line is halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, +halt on line with the first and the men take their proper places +in the skirmish line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the +men of a squad are sent forward in order from right to left as +deployed. The first line is led by the platoon leader of the +right platoon, the second by the guide of the right platoon, and +so on in order from right to left. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand +a faster gait. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The company having arrived at the indicated position; a further +advance by the same means may be advisable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>219.</b> The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to +cross a wide stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery +fire or heavy, long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be +returned. Its purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish +line preparatory to engaging in a fire tight. This method of +advancing results in serious (though temporary) loss of control +over the company. Its advantage lies in the fact that it offers +less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>220.</b> The above are suggestions. Other and better formations +may be devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the +one which advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, +time, and control. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE FIRE ATTACK. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>221.</b> The principles governing the advance of the firing +line in attack are considered in the School of the Battalion. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a +whole by ordinary means, it advances by rushes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>222.</b> Being in skirmish line: 1. <i>By platoon (two +platoons, squad, four men, etc.), from the right (left)</i>, +2. <b>RUSH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges +the details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and +puts it into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he +designates the leader for the indicated fraction. When about +to rush, he causes the men of the fraction to cease firing and +to hold themselves flat, but in readiness to spring forward +instantly. The leader of the rush (at the signal of the platoon +leader, if the latter be not the leader of the rush) commands: +<b>follow me</b>, and, running at top speed, leads the fraction +to the new line, where be halts it and causes it to open fire. +The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been +previously designated. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The first fraction having established itself on the new line, +the next like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, +without further command of the captain, and so on, successively, +until the entire company is on the line established by the first +rush. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior +platoon leader conforms to the action of the senior. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase +or decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>223.</b> When the company forms a part of the firing line, the +rush of the company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as +described for a platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain +leads the rush; platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; +platoon guides follow the line to insure prompt and orderly +execution of the advance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>224.</b> When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, +becomes impracticable, any method of advance that <b>brings the +attack closer to the enemy</b>, such as crawling, should be +employed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 319. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE COMPANY IN SUPPORT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>225.</b> To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the +support adopts suitable formations, following the principles +explained in paragraphs 212-218. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. +If after deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it +for some time in close formation, it should be reassembled. It +is redeployed when necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>226.</b> The movements of the support as a whole and the +dispatch of reenforcements from it to the firing line are +controlled by the major. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence +and will be avoided whenever practicable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert +for the major's signals or commands. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>227.</b> A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it +deployed as skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places +it in an interval in the line, if one exists: and commands it +thereafter as a unit. If no such suitable interval exists, the +reenforcement is advanced with increased intervals between +skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest interval in the +firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the nearest +squad lender and platoon leader. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>228.</b> A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as +possible without exhausting the men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>229.</b> The original platoon division of the companies in +the firing line should be maintained and should not be broken +up by the mingling of reenforcements. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying +a reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade +who have been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to +exercise their normal functions. Conditions with vary and no rules +can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering +the increasing difficulties of control. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE COMPANY ACTING ALONE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>230.</b> In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed +according to the principles applicable to the battalion acting +alone; the captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, +making due allowance for the difference in strength. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>231.</b> The company must be well protected against surprise. +Combat patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader +of a flank platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the +patrol or patrols on his flank. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FIRE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>232.</b> Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is +issued before the company deploys for combat. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In close order the company executes the firings at the command +of the captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the +company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Usually the firings, in close order consist of saluting volleys +only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>233.</b> When the company is deployed, the men execute the +firings at the command of their platoon leaders; the latter +give such commands as are necessary to carry out the captain's +directions, and, from time to time, add such further commands +as are necessary to continue, correct, and control the fire +ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>234.</b> The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands +during fire and must be replaced by signals of such character +that proper fire direction and control is assured. To attract +attention, signals must usually be preceded by the whistle signal +(short blast). A friction of the firing line about to rush should, +it practicable, avoid using the long blast signal as an aid to +<b>cease firing</b>. Officers and men behind the firing line can +not ordinarily move freely along the line, but must depend on +mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the prescribed signals. +All should post themselves so as to see their immediate superiors +and subordinates. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>235.</b> The musicians assist the captain by observing the +enemy, the target, and the fire effect by transmitting commands +or signals and by watching for signals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>236.</b> Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined or +represented enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>237.</b> The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in +relation thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in +marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +RANGES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>238.</b> For convenience of reference ranges are classified as +follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> + 0 to 600 yards, close range.<br> + 600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.<br> + 1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.<br> + 2,000 yards and over, distant range. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>239.</b> The distance to the target must be determined as +accurately as possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside +from training and morale, this is the most important single +factor in securing effective fire at the longer ranges. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>240.</b> Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, +the most accurate and only practicable method of determining the +range will generally be to take the mean of several estimates. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate +estimators in the company, are designated as <b>range +estimator</b> and are specially trained in estimating distances. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the +range estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the +mean of their estimates. The range estimators then take their +customary posts. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +CLASSES OF FIRING. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>241. Volley firing</b> has limited application. In defense it +may be used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents +a large, compact target. It may be used by troops executing <b>fire +of position</b>. When the ground near the target is such that the +strike of bullets can be seen from the firing line, <b>ranging +volleys</b> may be used to correct the sight setting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>242. Fire at will</b> is the class of fire normally employed in +attack or defense. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>243. Clip fire</b> has limited application. It is principally +used: 1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by +habituating them to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short +burst of fire. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE TARGET. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>244.</b> Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an +objective in attack or sector in defense; the company's target will +lie within the limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical +considerations are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within +the objective or sector will thus be the usual target. This will +ordinarily be the hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily +proper targets for artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry +employing fire of position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Change of targets should not be made without excellent reasons +therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under +conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops +comprising the former target. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>245.</b> The distribution of fire over the entire target is of +special importance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each +platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds +to his position in the company. Men are so instructed that each +fires on that part of the target which is directly opposite him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>246.</b> All parts of the target are equally important. Care +must be exercised that the men do not slight its less visible +parts. A section of the target not covered by fire represents a +number of the enemy permitted to fire cooly and effectively. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>247.</b> If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, +platoon leaders select an object in front of or behind it, +designate this as the <b>aiming target</b>, and direct a sight +setting which will carry the cone of fire into the target. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FIRE DIRECTION. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>248.</b> When the company is large enough to be divided into +platoons, it is impracticable for the captain to command it +directly in combat. His efficiency in managing the firing line +is measured by his ability to enforce his will through the +platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly what he desires them +to do, he avoids interfering except to correct serious errors +or omissions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>249.</b> The captain directs the fire of the company or +of designated platoons. He designates the target, and, when +practicable, allots a part of the target to each platoon. +Before beginning the fire action he determines the range, +announces the sight setting, and indicates the class of fire +to be employed, and the time to open fire. Thereafter, he +observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight +setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and +causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be +received from the rear. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FIRE CONTROL. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>250.</b> In combat the platoon is the fire unit. From 20 to +35 rifles are as many as one leader can control effectively. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>251.</b> Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands +or directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions +to insure correct sight setting and clear description of the +target or aiming target as the situation permits or requires; +thereafter he gives such additional commands or directions as +are necessary to exact compliance with the captain's will. He +corrects the sight setting when necessary. He designates an +aiming target when the target can not be seen with the naked eye. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>252.</b> In general, <b>platoon leaders</b> observe the +target and the effect of their fire and are on the alert for +the captain's commands or signals; they observe and regulate the +rate of fire. The <b>platoon guides</b> watch the firing line and +check every breach of fire discipline. <b>Squad leaders</b> +transmit commands and signals when necessary, observe the conduct +of their squads and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire +discipline and participate in the firing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>253.</b> The best troops are those that submit longest to fire +control. Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its +greatest results. To avoid or delay such loss should be the +constant aim of all. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight +setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FIRE DISCIPLINE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>254.</b> "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, +a control of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, +which will enable him in action to make hits instead of misses. +It embraces taking advantage of the ground; care in setting the +sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of +the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an increase +of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire +when the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition." (Small-arms +Firing Manual.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and +thus reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate +value of hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward +fire superiority. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, +each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire +upon the proper target. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>255.</b> To create a correct appreciation of the requirements +of fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be +as rapid as is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate +will depend upon the visibility, proximity, and size or the target; +and that the proper rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each +trained man, usually rendering cautions or commands unnecessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding +the assault, and in pursuing fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>256.</b> In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing +positions are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover +the advance of each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change +slightly the direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of +advanced portions of the firing line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>257.</b> In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, +platoon leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon +the point where it is expected to reappear, and greet its +reappearance instantly with vigorous fire. +</p> + +<h3>Section 7. Company inspection.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>745.</b> Being in line at a halt: 1. <i>Open ranks</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b> the front rank executes right dress; +the rear rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, +and execute right dress; the lieutenants pass around their +respective flanks and take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in +front of the center of their respective platoons. The captain +aligns the front rank, rear rank, and file closers, takes post +8 paces in front of the right guide, facing to the left, and +commands: 1. <b>FRONT</b>, 2. <b>PREPARE FOR INSPECTION</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain +returns saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order +saber, and stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection +they carry saber, face about, and order saber. The captain may +direct the lieutenants to accompany or assist him, in which case +they return saber and, at the close of the inspection, resume +their posts in front of the company, draw and carry saber. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the +right of the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, +executes <b>inspection arms</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just +above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain +inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same +position as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes +it with the left hand at the balance and executes <b>order +arms</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As the captain returns the piece the next man executes +<b>inspection arms</b>, and so on through the company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes +<b>order arms</b> as soon as the captain passes to the next, man. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left +to right in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes +<b>inspection saber</b>. Enlisted men armed with the pistol +execute <b>inspection pistol</b> by drawing the pistol from the +holster and holding it diagonally across the body, barrel up, +and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle pointing up and to +the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as soon as the +captain passes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing +to the left in front of the right guide and on line with the +lieutenants and commands: 1. <i>Close ranks</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>march</b> the lieutenants resume their posts +in line; the rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his +file leader; the file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>746.</b> If the company is dismissed. rifles are put away. In +quarters, headdress and accouterments are removed and the men +stand near their respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, +but without accourterments, in front of their tents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks +and its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will +arrange the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or +permanent camp, or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter +tent camp, in the same relative order as directed in paragraph +<b>747</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the +quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and +calls the men to attention on entering each squad room or on +approaching the tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. +(<i>C. I. D. R., No. 16, Aug. 25, 1916</i>.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>747.</b> (Edition approved Aug. 10, 1911, and edition corrected +to November, 1913.) If the inspection is to include an examination +of the equipment while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, +causes the company to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces +in rear of the stacks and to take intervals. He then commands: +1. <b>UNSLING EQUIPMENT</b>, 2. <b>OPEN PACKS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places +it on the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the +pack 1 foot in front of toes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed +and unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of +the cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent pins, removes +meat can, knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and +places them on the right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon +in the open meat can; removes the canteen and cup from the cover +and places them on the left side of the haversack; unstraps and +spreads out haversack so as to expose its contents; folds up the +carrier to uncover the cartridge pockets; opens same; unrolls +toilet articles and places them on the outer flap of the haversack; +places underwear carried in pack on the left half of the open pack, +with round fold parallel with front edge of pack; opens first-aid +pouch and exposes contents to view. Special articles carried +by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses, compass, +steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right half +of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI +shows the relative position of all articles except underwear +and special articles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as be, +fore, inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: +<b>CLOSE PACKS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up +his haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, +fork, and spoon, and the canteen and cup: closes cartridge pockets +and first-aid pouch; restores special articles to their proper +receptacles; rolls up and replaces pack in currier; and, leaving +the equipment in its position on the ground, resumes the attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All equipments being packed, the captain commands: <b>SLING +EQUIPMENT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The equipments are slung and belts fastened. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. +The inspection is completed as already explained. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>748.</b> Should the inspector be other than the captain, the +latter, after commanding <b>front</b>, adds <b>REST</b>, and +faces to the front. When the inspector approaches, the captain +faces to the left, brings the company to attention, faces to +the front, and salutes. The salute acknowledged, the captain +carries saber, faces to the left, commands: <b>PREPARE FOR +INSPECTION</b>, and again faces to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber +and accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. +</p> + +<h3>Section 8. Manual of Tent Pitching.</h3> + +<p class="center"> +SHELTER TENTS. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +[For Infantry Equipment, model of 1910.][6] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 6: For method of pitching shelter tents, with old model +Infantry equipment or old model shelter tent, see paragraph 792, +in 'Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent'.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>792.</b> Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain +commands: <b>FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fallout; the cooks form +a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first +sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the +company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men +taken from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and +file closers form on a convenient flank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, +the company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless +of the size of each. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>793.</b> The captain then causes the company to take intervals +as described in the School of the Squad and commands: <b>PITCH +TENTS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>pitch tents</b>, each man steps off obliquely to +the right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, +the butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to +the front, barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each +front rank man then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground +by the outside of the right heel. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="625"> +<tr><td> + <img src="fig003.jpg" width="621" height="541" alt="Fig. 3"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed: +each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the +rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear rank +man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; +the guy loops at both ends of the lower half are passed through +the buttonholes provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped +end of the guy rope is then passed through both guy loops and +secured, this at both ends of the tent. Each front rank man inserts +the muzzle of his rifle under the front end of the ridge and +holds the rifle upright, sling to the front, heel of butt on +the ground beside the bayonet. His rear rank man pins down the +front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching +the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the front +guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front of the +rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the +tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear +of the tent before securing; the rear rank man then inserts an +intrenching tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear +end of the ridge inside the tent, the front rank man pegging +down the end of the rear guy ropes; the rest of the pins are +then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter tent pins. The use of the bayonet for this +purpose is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown +back on the tent. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment +and the contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention +in front of his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes +should all be of the same length. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material +is procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of +the rifle and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the +shelter tent. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>794.</b> When the pack is not carried the company is formed +for shelter tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or +on the ground, the men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, +secure their packs, return to their places, and pitch tents as +heretofore described. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>795.</b> Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching +one tent as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent +against the opening of the first, using one rifle to support both +tents, and passing the front guy ropes over and down the sides of +the opposite tents. The front corner of one tent is not pegged +down, but is thrown back to permit an opening into the tent. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SINGLE SLEEPING BAG. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>796.</b> Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the +feet, buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its +short dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the +right side of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left +side by means of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the +poncho over the blanket and button it together along the side and +bottom. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +DOUBLE SLEEPING BAG. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>797.</b> Spread one poncho on-the ground, buttoned end at the +feet, buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the +poncho; tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes +provided; spread a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned +end at the feet, buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos +together along both sides and across the end. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO STRIKE SHELTER TENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>798.</b> The men standing in front of their tents: <b>STRIKE +TENTS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are +lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand +at attention in the places originally occupied after taking +intervals. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO PITCH ALL TYPES OF ARMY TENTS, EXCEPT SHELTER AND CONICAL WALL +TENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>799.</b> To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and +conical wall tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on +the spot to be occupied by the right (or left) corner of each +tent. For pyramidal tents the interval between adjacent pins +should be about 30 feet, which will give a passage of 2 feet +between tents. Spread tripod on the ground where the center of +tent is to be, if tripod is used. Spread the tent on the ground +to be occupied, door to the front, and place the right (or left) +front wall loop over the pin. The door (or doors, if more than +one) being fastened and held together at the bottom, the left +(or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left (or right) as +far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the pin being +placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already +driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to +the rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched +to complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these +loops. Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the +corresponding front corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the +canvas be wet, a small amount of slack should be allowed before +the corner pins are driven. According to the size of the tent, +one or two men, crawling under the tent if necessary, fit each +pole or ridge or upright into the ring or ridge-pole holes, and +such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes are adjusted. If +a tripod be used an additional man will go under the tent to adjust +it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at each corner guy +rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or storage type, +corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The four +corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the +large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance +as to hold the walls and end of the tent vertical and smooth when +the guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through +each remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is +driven in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy +ropes of the tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy +ropes of the fly are placed over the upper notches, and are then +drawn taut. Brace ropes when used, are then secured to stakes +or pins suitably placed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>800.</b> Rescinded. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +CONICAL WALL TENT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>801.</b> Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches +apart. Using the hood lines, with center pin as center, describe +two concentric circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 +inches. In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. +At intervals of about 3 feet drive the other guy pins. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in +the case of pyramidal tents. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, PYRAMIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>802. STRIKE TENTS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner +guy ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the +conical wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their +receptacle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent +is lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and +pole fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +TO FOLD TENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>803.</b> For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage +tents: Spread the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge +so that bottoms of side walls are even, ends of tent forming +triangles to the right and left; fold the triangular ends of +the tent in toward the middle, making it rectangular in shape; +fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent in two by +carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in +two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except +the second from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about +two-thirds of the second cloths; fold the left end over to meet +the turned-in edge of the right end, then fold the right end +over the top, completing the bundle; tie with the two exposed +guys. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +METHOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof +canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished +by leaving the rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall +loops attached, one man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding +the square iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the canvas +to its limit away from the former front of the tent. This leaves +the three remaining sides of the tent on top of the rear side, +with the door side in the middle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear +corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, +and pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner +and return to the right, covering the right-rear corner. This +folds the right side of the tent on itself, with the crease in +the middle and under the front side of tent. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described +above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides +of the tent lying smooth and fiat and the two side walls folded +inward, each on itself. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward +toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the +square iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth and +parallel with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly +made and the canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover +the lower edge of the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the +folded canvas except the two on the center width, which should +be pulled out and away from bottom edge to their extreme length +for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold toward the center +on the first seam (that joining the first and second widths) +and fold again toward the center, so that the already folded +canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. +Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. +Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width +in half, then making a second fold to come within about 4 or +5 inches of that already folded; turn this fold entirely over +that already folded. Take the exposed guys and draw them taut +across each other, turn bundle over on the under guy, cross guys +on top of bundle, drawing tight. Turn bundle over on the crossed +guys and tie lengthwise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package +11 by 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to +store or pack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the +middle width of canvas in the back wall. +</p> + +<p class="right"> +WAR DEPARTMENT, <br> +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, <br> +<i>Washington, December 2, 1911.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798. Infantry +Drill Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the +Infantry Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General +Orders, No. 23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, +the alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +By order of the Secretary of War: +</p> + +<p class="right"> +LEONARD WOOD, <br> +<i>Major General, Chief of Staff</i>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>747.</b> If the inspection is to include an examination of the +blanket rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after +inspecting the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in +place, closes ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four +paces from the stacks, takes intervals, and Commands: 1. +<i>Unsling</i>, 2. <b>PACKS</b>, 3. <i>Open</i>, 4. <b>PACKS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it +on the ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end +of shelter half to the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular +to the front, with the triangular end of the shelter half to the +front, opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the +contents of his roll for inspection and resumes the attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file +closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, +draws saber and commands: 1. <i>Close</i>, 2. <b>PACKS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly +spread on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the +front, folds his blanket once across its length and places it +upon the shelter half, fold toward the bottom, edge one-half +inch from the square end, the same amount of canvas uncovered +at the top and bottom. He then places the parts of the pole at +the side of the blanket next the square end of shelter half, near +and parallel to the fold, end of pole about 6 inches from the +edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly near the opposite +edge of the blanket find distributes the other articles carried in +the roll; folds the triangular end and then the exposed portion +of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the +front and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly +two and two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each +pair stands on the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely +and buckles the straps, passing the end of the strap through both +keeper and buckle, back over the buckle and under the keeper. +With the roll so lying on the ground that the edge of the shelter +half can just be seen when looking vertically downward one end is +bent upward and over to meet the other, a clove hitch is taken +with the guy rope first around the end to which it is attached and +then around the other end, adjusting the length of rope between +hitches to suit the wearer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his +roll in the position it was in after being unslung find stands +at attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. +<i>Sling</i>, 2. <b>PACKS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command the rolls ure slung, the end containing +the pole to the rear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes +the inspection as before. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>792.</b> Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain +commands: <b>FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks +form a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the +first sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file +of the company; blank files are filled by the file closers or +by men taken from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, +and file closers form on a convenient flank. Before forming column +of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be +redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the size of +each. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>793.</b> The captain then causes the company to take intervals +as described in the School of the Squad, and commands: <b>PITCH +TENTS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command PITCH TENTS, each man steps off obliquely to the +right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the +butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the +front, barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each +front rank man then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground +by the outside of the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket +rolls and take out the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then +spreads his shelter half, triangle to the rear, flat upon the +ground the tent is to occupy, rear rank man's half on the right. +The halves are then buttoned together. Each front rank man joins +his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the halves, and holds +the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the ground; his rear +rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the front corners +of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the canvas taut; +he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives the pin +at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope taut. +Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts +the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of +the pins are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man working +on the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter tent pins. The use of the bayonet for that +purpose is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as the tent is patched each man arranges the contents +of the blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front +of his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents +are pitched, should all be of the same length. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>794.</b> When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are +taken as described above; the position of the front pole is +marked with a bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men +then proceed to the wagon, secure their rolls, return to their +places, and pitch tents as heretofore described. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>795.</b> To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the +same commands as before, except <b>Take half interval</b> is +given instead of <b>Take interval</b>. In taking interval each +man follows the preceding man at 2 paces. The captain then +commands: <b>PITCH DOUBLE TENTS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide +and with him pitches a single shelter tent. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the +bayonet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two +single tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. +Two guy ropes are used at each end, the guy pins being placed +in front of the corner pins. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; +and by numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling +in on the left are numbered, counting off if necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is +to occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular +ends to the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, +first the ridges and then the square ends. The front corners +of the tent are pinned by the front rank men, the odd number +holding the poles, the even number driving the pins. The rear +rank men similarly pin the rear corners. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the +front rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted +by the even number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the +center eyes of the shelter halves in the following order: (1) +The lower half of the front tent; (2) the lower half of the rear +tent; (3) the upper half of the front tent; (4) the upper half +of the rear tent. The guy ropes are then adjusted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back, +contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at attention, +each opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>796.</b> Omitted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>797.</b> Omitted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>798.</b> Omitted. +</p> + +<h3>Section 9. Manual of the Bayonet.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>1.</b> The Infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to +disable the enemy, but he should know that personal combat is +often necessary to obtain success. Therefore, he must be +instructed in the use of the rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand +encounters. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>2.</b> The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier +how to make effect use of the rifle and bayonet in personal +combat: to make him quick and proficient in handling his rifle; +to give him an accurate eye and a steady hand; and to give him +confidence in the bayonet in offense and defense. When skill in +these exercises has been acquired, the rifle will still remain +a most formidable weapon at close quarters should the bayonet be +lost or disabled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>3.</b> Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will +be judged by the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. +For this purpose pairs or groups of opponents, selected at +random from among recruits and trained soldiers, should engage +in assaults, using the fencing equipment provided for the +purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>4.</b> Officers and specially selected and thoroughly +instructed noncommissioned officers will act us instructors. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>5.</b> Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as +the soldier is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will +progress, as far as practicable, in the order followed in the +text. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>6.</b> Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but +practice should also be had on uneven ground, especially in the +attack and defense of intrenchments. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>7.</b> These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic +drill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>8.</b> The principles of the commands are the same as those +given in paragraph 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. +Intervals and distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and +111, Infantry Drill Regulations, except that, in formations for +bayonet exercises, the men should be at least four paces apart +in every direction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>9.</b> Before requiring soldiers to take a position or +execute a movement for the first time, the instructor executes +the same for the purpose of illustration, after which he requires +the soldiers to execute the movement individually. Movements +prescribed in this manual will not be executed in cadence as +the attempt to do so results in incomplete execution and lack +of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly as quickly +as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are executed +accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness with +the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>10.</b> The exercises will he interrupted at first by short +and frequent rests. The rests will be less frequent as +proficiency is attained. Fatigue and exhaustion will be +specially guarded against, as they prevent proper interest +being taken in the exercises and delay the progress of the +instruction. Rests will be given from the position of order +arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations. +</p> + +<h4>THE BAYONET.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>11.</b> The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon +consisting of three principal parts, viz, the <i>blade, +guard</i>, and <i>grip</i>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>12.</b> The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, +back, grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from +guard to point is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the +false edge 5.6 inches. Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is +59.4 inches. The weight of the bayonet is 1 pound; weight of +rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds. The center of gravity of +the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in front of the rear +sight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--The use of the hand ax and the pick mattock in organizations +equipped with the intrenching tool is authorized for the purpose +of driving shelter-tent pins. The use of the bayonet for that +purpose is prohibited. +</p> + +<h4>I. INSTRUTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>13.</b> The instructor explains the importance of good footwork +and impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and +suppleness of body are as important for attack and defense as +is the ability to parry and deliver a strong point or cut. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>14.</b> All foot movements should be made from the position of +guard. As far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of +the feet to insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule +can be laid down as to the length of the various foot movements; +this depends entirely on the situations occurring in combat. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>15.</b> The men having taken intervals or distances, the +instructor commands: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. <i>Bayonet exercise</i>, 2. <b>GUARD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>guard</b>, half face to the right, carry back +and place the right foot about once and a half its length to the +rear and about 3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each +other an angle of about 60°, weight of the body balanced +equally on the balls of the feet, knees slightly bent, palms of +hands on hips, fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear, head +erect, head and eyes straight to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>16.</b> To resume the attention. 1. <i>Squad</i>, 2. +<b>ATTENTION</b>. The men take the position of the soldier and +fix their attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>17. ADVANCE.</b> Advance the left foot quickly about once its +length, follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>18. RETIRE.</b> Move the right foot quickly to the rear about +once its length, follow immediately with the left foot the same +distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>19.</b> 1. <i>Front</i>, 2. <b>PASS</b>. Place the right foot +quickly about once its length in front of the left, advance the +left foot to its proper position in front of the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>20.</b> 1. <i>Rear</i> 2. <b>PASS</b>. Place the left foot +quickly about once its length in rear of the right, retire the +right foot to its proper position in rear of the left. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or +to withdraw quickly therefrom. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>21.</b> 1. <i>Right</i>, 2. <b>STEP</b>. Step to the right +with the right foot about once its length and place the left +foot in its proper relative position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>22.</b> 1. <i>Left</i>, 2. <b>STEP</b>. Step to the left +with the left foot about once its length and place the right +foot in its proper relative position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more +favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. +Better ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. +In bayonet fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in +stepping to the right or left is the one which at the moment +bears the least weight. +</p> + +<h4>II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>23.</b> The commands for and the execution of the foot +movements are the same as already given for movements without +the rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>24.</b> The men having taken intervals or distances, the +instructor commands: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. <i>Bayonet exercise</i>, 2. <b>GUARD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); +at the same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp +the rifle with the left hand just below the lower band, fingers +between the stock and gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the +left, the right hand grasping the small of the stock about 6 +inches in front of the right hip, elbows free from the body, +bayonet point at the height of the chin. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="316"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig004.jpg" width="312" height="422" alt="Fig. 4"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>25.</b> 1. <i>Order</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position +of order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>26.</b> During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses +will he executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after +which they may be executed from any position in which the rifle +is held. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ATTACKS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>27.</b> 1. <b>THRUST</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left +arm, turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the +bayonet at the point to be attacked, butt covering the right +fore-arm. At the same time straighten the right leg vigorously +and throw the weight of the body forward and on the left leg, +the ball of the right foot always on the ground. Guard is resumed +immediately without command. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="492"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig005.jpg" width="488" height="410" alt="Fig. 5"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right +arm, the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at +which the attack should be directed are, in order of their +importance, stomach, chest, head, neck, and limbs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>28.</b> 1. <b>LUNGE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left +foot is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must +always be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately +without command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right +foot if for any reason it is desired to hold the ground gained +in lunging. In the latter case the preparatory command +<b>forward</b> will be given. Each method should be practiced. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="534"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig006.jpg" width="530" height="385" alt="Fig. 6"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>29.</b> 1. <i>Butt</i>, 2. <b>STRIKE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of +rifle against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand +at about the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to +pass to the rear on the left side of the head, Guard is resumed +without command. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="285"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig007.jpg" width="281" height="454" alt="Fig. 7"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The points of attack in their order of importance are head, neck, +stomach, and crotch. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>30.</b> 1. <i>Cut</i>, 2. <b>DOWN</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point +of attack. Guard is resumed without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>31.</b> 1. <i>Cut</i>, 2. <b>RIGHT (LEFT)</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right +(left), directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is +resumed without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands +of an enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that +the false, or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be +executed continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>32.</b> To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the +soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most +convenient manner, for example: 1. <i>To the right rear</i>, 2. +<i>Cut</i>, 3. <b>DOWN</b>; 1. <i>To the right</i>, 2. +<b>LUNGE</b>; 1. <i>To the left</i>, 2. <b>THRUST</b>, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement +of the body should be thrown into the attack. In general this +will be best accomplished by turning on the ball of the right +foot. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position +of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>33.</b> Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in +thrusting and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks +against rings or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in +diameter, suitably suspended at desired heights. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>34.</b> The thrust and lunges at rings should first be +practiced by endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This +should be followed by directing the attack against one opening +while looking at another. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>35.</b> The soldier should also experience the effect of +actual resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the +rifle in attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks +against a dummy. +</p> + +<table summary="" width="100%" border=0> +<tr><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="122"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig009.jpg" width="118" height="714" alt="Fig. 9"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="178"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig008.jpg" width="174" height="715" alt="Fig. 8"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>36.</b> Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to +permit the execution of attacks without injury to the point or +edge of the bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A +suitable dummy can be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in +length plaited closely together into a cable between 6 and 12 +in diameter. Old rope is preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed +with hay, straw, shavings, etc. are also suitable. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +DEFENSES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>37.</b> In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position +of guard is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men +have become proficient the instructor will cause them to resume +the position of guard instantly without command after the +execution of each parry. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>38.</b> 1. <i>Parry</i>, 2. <b>RIGHT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle +sharply to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet +point is about 6 inches to the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>39.</b> 1. <i>Parry</i>, 2. <b>LEFT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as +to cover the point attacked. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>40.</b> 1. <i>Parry</i>, 2. <b>HIGH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line +of vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left +front. +</p> + +<table summary="" width="100%" border=0> +<tr><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="324"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig010.jpg" width="320" height="482" alt="Fig. 10"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="172"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig011.jpg" width="168" height="459" alt="Fig. 11"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may +be supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. +This position will be necessary against attacks from higher +elevations, such as men mounted or on top of parapets. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>41.</b> 1. <i>Low parry</i>, 2. <b>RIGHT (LEFT)</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height +of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the +right (left) to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point +threatened. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These parries and rarely used, as an attack below the waist leaves +the head and body exposed. +</p> + +<table summary="" width="100%" border=0> +<tr><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="247"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig012.jpg" width="243" height="451" alt="Fig. 12"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td><td align="center" valign="top"> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="259"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig013.jpg" width="255" height="496" alt="Fig. 13"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>42.</b> Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, +short motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands +should, as far as possible, be kept in the line of attack. +Parries against <b>butt strike</b> are made by quickly moving +the guard so as to cover the point attacked. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>43.</b> To provide against attack from the right, left, or +rear the soldier will change front as quickly as possible in +the most convenient maimer: for example: 1. To the left rear, +2. <i>Parry</i>, 3. <b>HIGH</b>; 1. To the right, 2. <i>Parry</i>, +3. <b>RIGHT</b>, etc. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="271" class="left"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig014.jpg" width="267" height="499" alt="Fig. 14"> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position +of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there +is danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought +to a vertical position. +</p> + +<h4>III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>44.</b> 1. <i>Club rifle</i>, 2. <b>SWING</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and +turn the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear +sight and muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward +the butt; at the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder +farthest from the opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows +slightly bent and knees straight. Each individual takes such +position of the feet, shoulders, and hands as best accords with +his natural dexterity. <b>SWING</b>. Tighten the grasp of the +hands and swing the rifle to the front and downward, directing +it at the head of the opponent, and immediately return to the +position of club rifle by completing the swing of the rifle +downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command, <b>SWING</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through +any guard or parry that may be interposed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being at <b>club rifle</b>, order arms is resumed by command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>45.</b> The position of <b>club rifle</b> may be taken from any +position of the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will +not be taken in personal combat unless the emergency is such as +to preclude the use of the bayonet. +</p> + +<h4>IV. COMBINED MOVEMENT.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>46.</b> The purpose of combined movements is to develop more +vigorous attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by +the single movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to +defense and the reverse. Every movement to the front should be +accompanied by an attack, which is increased in effectiveness +by the forward movement of the body. Every movement to the rear +should ordinarily be accompanied by a parry and should always +be followed by an attack. Movements to the right or left may +be accompanied by attacks or defense. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>47.</b> Not more than three movements will be used in any +combination. The instructor should first indicate the number +of movements that are to be combined as <b>two movements</b> +or <b>three movements</b>. The execution is determined by one +command of execution, and the position of guard is taken upon +the completion of the last movement only. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +EXAMPLES. +</p> + +<p><b> +Front pass and LUNGE.<br> +Right step and THRUST.<br> +Left step and low parry RIGHT.<br> +Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.<br> +Lunge and cut RIGHT.<br> +Parry right and parry HIGH.<br> +Butt strike and cut DOWN.<br> +Thrust and parry HIGH.<br> +Parry high and LUNGE.<br> +Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.<br> +Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.<br> +To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.<br> +To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE. +</b></p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>48.</b> Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The +approach will be made against the dummies both in quick time +and double time. +</p> + +<h4>V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>49.</b> The principles of practical bayonet combat should be +taught as far as possible during the progress of instruction in +bayonet exercise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>50.</b> The soldier must be continually impressed with the +extreme importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. +Should an attack fail, it should be followed immediately by +another attack before the opponent has an opportunity to assume +the offensive. Keep the opponent on the defensive. If, due to +circumstances, it is necessary to take the defensive, constantly +watch for an opportunity to assume the offensive and take +immediate advantage of it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>51.</b> Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best +footing. Time for this will generally be too limited to permit +more than a single hasty glance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>52.</b> In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they +can be plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor +upon the point of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly +seen, as in night attacks, watch the movements of his weapon +and of his body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>53.</b> Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks +vigorously. The point of the bayonet should always be kept as +nearly as possible in the line of attack. The less the rifle is +moved upward, downward, to the right, or to the left, the better +prepared the soldier is for attack or defense. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>54.</b> Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's +left hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from +that described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a +cutting edge, he will be at a great disadvantage. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>55.</b> The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is +particularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms +a sentry can strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>56.</b> Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful +that the muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's +energies will be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack +him with short, stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking +distance of his weapon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>57.</b> The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the +thrust and lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left +hand and advancing the right as far as possible. When this is +done, a sharp parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, +leaving him exposed to a counter attack, which should follow +promptly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>58.</b> Against odds a small number of men can fight to best +advantage by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being +attacked from behind. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>59.</b> In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every +effort must be made to get on his near or left side, because here +his reach is much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not +possible to disable such an enemy, attack his horse and then, +renew the attack on the horseman. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>60.</b> In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements +can be best observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his +approach generally brings him against the sky line. When he +arrives within attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well +forward= at the middle of his body. +</p> + +<h4>VI. FENCING EXERCISES.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>61.</b> Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations +of thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at +will, the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>62.</b> The instructor will inspect the entire fencing +equipment before the exercise begins and fissure himself that +everything is in such condition as will prevent accidents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>63.</b> The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the +order, facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between +files and a distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is +designated as number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and +defense. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>64.</b> The opponents being at the order facing each other, +the instructor commands: <b>SALUTE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly +to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended +and joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. +(Two.) Drop the arm smartly by the side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This salute is the fencing salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals +will begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing +salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>65.</b> After the fencing salute has been rendered the +instructor commands: 1. <i>Fencing exercise</i>, 2. <b>GUARD</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command <b>guard</b> each man comes to the position of +guard, heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet +bearing lightly to the right against the corresponding portion +of the opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the +<b>engage</b> or <b>engage right</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>66.</b> Being at the <b>engage right</b>: <b>ENGAGE LEFT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of +his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward +and to the right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged +position, each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against +the corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>67.</b> Being at <b>engage left</b>: <b>ENGAGE RIGHT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of +his opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward +and to the left and <b>engages</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>68.</b> Being <b>engaged</b>: <b>ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The attack <b>engage left</b> and then immediately <b>ENGAGES +RIGHT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>69.</b> Being <b>engaged left</b>: <b>ENGAGE RIGHT AND +LEFT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The attack <b>engages right</b> and then immediately <b>engages +left</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>70.</b> 1. <b>Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)</b>; 2. +<b>Number two, COUNTER</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two +quickly drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward +to the original position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>71.</b> In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the +engage a certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, +consisting of the play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet +against the other. This is necessary to prevent the opponent +from divining the intended attack. It also prevents his using +the point of contact as a pivot for his assaults. In charging +from one engage to the other the movement is controlled by the +left hand, the right remaining stationary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>72.</b> After some exercise in <b>engage, engage left</b>, +and <b>counter</b>, exercises will be given in the assaults. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ASSAULTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>73.</b> The part of the body to be attacked will be +designated by name, as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No +attacks will be made below the knees. The commands are given +and the movements for each line are first explained thoroughly +by the instructor; the execution begins at the command +<b>assault</b>. Number one executes the attack, and number two +parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number +one parries. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>74.</b> For convenience in instruction <b>assaults</b> are +divided into <b>simple attacks, counter attacks, attacks on +the rifle</b>, and <b>feints</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SIMPLE ATTACKS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>75.</b> Success in these attacks depends on quickness of +movement. There are three simple attacks--the <b>straight</b>, +the <b>disengagement</b>, and the <b>counter disengagement</b>. +They are not preceded by a feint. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>76.</b> In the <b>straight</b> the bayonet is directed +straight at an opening from the engaged position. Contact with +the opponent's rifle may or may not be abandoned while making +it. If the opening be high or low, contact with the rifle will +usually be abandoned on commencing the attack. If the opening +be near his guard, the light pressure used in the engage may +be continued in the attack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number one</b>, +at neck (head, chest, right leg, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. +<b>Number two, parry right</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>77.</b> In the <b>disengagement</b> contact with the +opponent's rifle is abandoned and the point of the bayonet is +circled under or over his bayonet or rifle and directed into +the opening attacked. This attack is delivered by one +continuous spiral movement of the bayonet from the moment +contact is abandoned. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number one</b>, +at stomach (left chest. left leg, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. +<b>Number two, parry left</b> (etc.); 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>78.</b> In the <b>counter disengagement</b> a swift attack +is made into the opening disclosed while the opponent is +attempting to change the engagement of his rifle. It is +delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet +into the opening. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number two, +engage left</b>; 2. <b>Number one</b>, at chest, <b>thrust</b>; +3. <b>Number two, parry left</b>; 4. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon +as the opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>79.</b> A <b>counter attack</b> or <b>return</b> is one made +instantly after or in continuation of a parry. The parry should +be as narrow as possible. This makes it more difficult for the +opponent to recover and counter parry. The counter attack should +also be made at or just before the full extension of the +opponent's attack, as when it is so made a simple extension of +the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the opponent's +body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number two</b>, at chest, +<b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number one, parry right</b> and at stomach +(chest, head, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>80.</b> These movements are made for the purpose of forcing +or disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They +are the <b>press</b>, the <b>beat</b>, and the <b>twist</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>81.</b> In the <b>press</b> the attack quickly presses against +the opponent's bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the +pressure as the attack is delivered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, press</b>, +and at chest, <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right</b>; +3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>82.</b> The attack by <b>disengagement</b> is particularly +effective following the <b>press</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, press</b>, +and at stomach, <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, low parry +left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>83.</b> The <b>beat</b> is an attack in which a sharp blow is +struck against the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing +him to expose an opening into which an attack immediately follows. +It is used when there is but slight opposition or no contact of +rifles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, beat</b>, +and at stomach (chest, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, +parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>84.</b> In the twist the rifle is crossed over the opponent's +rifle or bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular +motion and a straight attack made into the opening. It requires +superior strength on the part of the attack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, twist</b>, +and at stomach, <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, low parry +left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FEINTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>85.</b> Feints are movements which threaten or simulate +attacks and are made with a view to inducing an opening or parry +that exposes the desired point of attack. They are either single +or double, according to the number of such movements made by the +attack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>86.</b> In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as +little force as possible is put into a feint. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, feint head +thrust</b>; at stomach, <b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry +right and low parry right</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two +executes both parries. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>87.</b> In double feints first one part of the body and then +another is threatened and a third attacked. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, feint +straight thrust</b> at chest; <b>disengagement</b> at chest; +at stomach, <b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right, +parry left</b>, and <b>low parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>88</b>. An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, +as in the <b>press</b> or <b>beat</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>89.</b> In fencing exercises every <b>feint</b> should at +first be parried. When the defense is able to judge or divine +the character of the attack the feint is not necessarily parried, +but may be nullified by a counter feint. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>90.</b> A <b>counter feint</b> is a feint following the +opponent's feint or following a <b>parry</b> of his attack and +generally occurs in combined movements. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +COMBINED MOVEMENTS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>91.</b> When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the +various foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., +the instructor combines several of them and gives the commands +in quick succession, increasing the rapidity and number of +movements as the men become more skillful. Opponents will be +changed frequently. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>. 1. <b>Number one, by +disengagement</b> at chest, thrust; 2. <b>Number two, parry +left, right step</b> (left foot first), and <b>lunge</b>; 3. +<b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. Example: Being at <b>engage left</b>, 1. <b>Number one, +press</b> and <b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right, +left step</b>, and <b>thrust</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, by +disengagement</b> at chest, thrust; 2. <b>Number two, parry +left, front pass</b>, and at head <b>butt strike</b>; 3. +<b>Number one, right step</b>; 4. <b>ASSAULT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>92.</b> Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as +<b>cross counters</b>, and example No. 3 of movements known as +<b>close counters</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>93.</b> A <b>chancery</b> is an attack by means of which the +opponent is disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his +rifle, or which disables his weapon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>94.</b> When the different combinations are executed with +sufficient skill the instructor will devise series of movements +to be memorized and executed at the command <b>assault</b>. The +accuracy and celerity of the movements will be carefully watched +by the instructor, with a view to the correction of faulty +execution. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>95.</b> It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, +but to leave to the discretion of company commanders and the +ingenuity of instructors the selection of such other exercises +as accord with the object of the drill. +</p> + +<h4>VII. FENCING AT WILL.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>96.</b> As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will +proceed to the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults +between two men, each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid +being hit himself. Fencing at will should not be allowed to +degenerate into random attacks and defenses. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>97.</b> The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants +at a time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may +earn different methods of attack and defense from each other. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>98.</b> The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, +with a view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; +afterwards everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct +execution of the movements, and quick perception of the adversary's +intentions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>99.</b> Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and +frequent dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive +should he continually encouraged. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>100.</b> In fencing at will, when no commands are given, +opponents facing each other at the position of order arms, salute. +They then immediately and simultaneously assume the position of +guard rifles engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard +before his opponent has completed his salute. The choice of +position is decided before the salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>101.</b> The opponents being about two paces apart and the +fencing salute having been rendered, the instructor commands 1. +<i>At will</i>, 2. <b>ASSAULT</b>, after which either party has +the right to attack. To interrupt the contest the instructor +will command <b>HALT</b>, at which the combatants will +immediately come to the order. To terminate the contest, the +instructor will command, 1. <i>Halt</i>, 2. <b>SALUTE</b>, at +which the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, +and remove their masks. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>102.</b> When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, +one opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick +time at <b>charge bayonet</b>, from a distance not to exceed 10 +yards, and deliver an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either +opponent the instructor commands, <b>HALT</b>, and the assault +terminates. Opponents alternate in assaulting. The assailant is +likewise required to advance at double time from a distance not +exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a distance not exceeding 30 +yards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>103.</b> The instructor will closely observe the contest and +decide doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the +slightest indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he +will comment on the action of both parties, point out errors and +deficiencies and explain how they may be avoided in the future. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>104.</b> As additional instruction, the men may be permitted +to wield the rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the +body, left hand at the small of the stock. Many men will be able +to use this method to advantage. It is also of value in case the +left band is wounded. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="374"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig015.jpg" width="370" height="444" alt="Fig. 15"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>105.</b> After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be +given in fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. +When practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this +character. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number +of umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn +at once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group +having the numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute +is not required in group fencing. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>106.</b> 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be +counted. No hit counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, +it has sufficient force to disable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. +A position of engage is taken. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted +only when the first hit was not called. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because +of breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take +the position of the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it +will not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition +to defend himself. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>107.</b> When engaging in an assault, first study the +adversary's position and proceed by false attacks, executed with +speed, to discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In +order to draw the adversary out and induce him to expose that +part of the body at which the attack is to be made, it is +advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then make the +real attack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>108.</b> Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as +they are difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier +reach and more exposed. The return can be made a continuation +of the parry, as there is no previous warning of its delivery, +although it should always be expected. Returns are made without +lunging if the adversary can be reached by thrusts or cuts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>109.</b> Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return +without knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a +bad habit and leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual +returns with certain attacks from certain parries--a fault which +the skilled opponent will soon discover. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>110.</b> Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting +and lunging. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>111.</b> The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the +soldier as many forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses +as possible. Complicated and intricate movements should not be +attempted. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>112.</b> The influence of the instructor is great. He must be +master of his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but +also to lead in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the +zeal of the men and arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should +qualify themselves as instructors by fencing with each other. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>113.</b> The character of each man, his bodily conformation, +and his degree of skill must always be taken into account. When +the instructor is demonstrating the combinations, feints, +returns, and parries the rapidity of his attack should be +regulated by the skill of the pupil and no more force than is +necessary should be used. If the pupil exposes himself too much +in the feints and parries, the instructor will, by an attack, +convince him of his error; but if these returns be too swiftly +or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious and the +precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to teach +the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>114.</b> Occasionally the instructor should leave himself +uncovered and fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to +take quick advantage of such opportunities. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SUGGESTIONS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Instruction in bayonet exercise and bayonet fencing should be +conducted with a view to teaching the aggressive use of the bayonet. +Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the bayonet that +they believe that with it they are superior to their opponents +it will be difficult or impossible to develop that morale which +is necessary for a successful assault. Men should be impressed +with the importance of acting always on the offensive in bayonet +combat, of pushing their attack with all their might. Troops which +are successful in their first few bayonet encounters will seldom +thereafter be called upon to use the bayonet--their opponents +will not await the assault. +</p> + +<h2><a name="VI">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +FIELD SERVICE. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Principles of infantry training.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Inaction gives every advantage to the enemy. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The offensive alone gives decisive results. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A quick and energetic offensive minimizes losses. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +An advance against the enemy's position once entered upon must +be continued. To go back under fire is to die. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy and to diminish +his power to inflict losses is to bring the position he occupies +under well conducted and continued fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Present as small a target as possible to the enemy by utilizing +every bit of cover the ground affords. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Individual skill in marksmanship is an advantage in battle only +when united with fire discipline and control. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Constant movement to the front lessens the effect of the enemy's +fire. Modern battles fought in the open show that the heaviest +losses are in the mid and long ranges. When close range is reached +the losses diminish rapidly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The best protection against artillery fire is a constant but +irregular movement to the front. When close to the enemy's position +his fire is least effective. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A knowledge of how to use the bayonet and the will to use it must +often be the deciding factors in battle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Finally: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In infantry training we can not go far wrong or fail to accomplish +the best results if we keep before our minds the spirit as well as +the wording of paragraph 352 of the Infantry Drill Regulations: +"The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry +must be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern +war requires but one kind of infantry--good infantry." +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Combat.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The field of battle is the final test of the instruction, discipline, +and efficiency of the fighting force of any army. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The battalion is the <b>attack unit</b> or the <b>defense unit</b>, +whether operating alone or as part of a regiment. The companies +constitute the <b>firing line</b> and the <b>support</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +An individual soldier is concerned only with the enemy in his +immediate front, in obeying orders, and instinctively doing what +he has been trained to do. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>The one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent +team work.</b> The army is handled just like a football team. A +part is on the first line facing the enemy. Another part, like +the half backs, is held back as supports. Another part, like the +full backs, is held as a reserve. Each unit, like each player, +has a certain duty to perform. When the signal is given, all +work together--all play the game--team work. The players consist +of all branches of the service. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The same rule holds true down to the smallest unit and even to +the individual enlisted man. Each regiment is a team composed +of three players--each a battalion. Each battalion is a team of +four players--each a company. In the same manner each company +is a team of two or more platoons; each platoon a team of two +or more squads; and last, but not least, each squad is a team +of eight players. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The one question that always presents itself on the battlefield +every minute of the time to every person, whether he be a general +or a private, is "<b>What play has my team captain ordered, and +how best may I act so as to work in conjunction with the other +players to bring about the desired result?</b>"--<b>team +play</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To the Infantry private this means-- +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +First. <b>Prompt and loyal obedience to the squad leader</b>. Every +squad always has a team captain. If the squad leader is killed or +disabled, another player previously designated takes his place. +If no one was designated, then the private with the longest service +takes command. When the squad leader gives the command for a +certain play, don't stop to think if the play is a good one, +but do your very best to carry ont the play as ordered. A poor +play in which every player enters with his whole heart (team +work) will often win, while, on the other hand, the best play in +which some of the players are skulkers and shirkers will probably +fail. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Second. <b>Never lose touch with your squad</b>. Every individual, +as well as every unit, should always be acting under the control +of some higher commander. This is necessary if there is to be +any unity of action. Therefore if you lose your squad, or it +becomes broken up, join the first squad you can find and obey +your new squad leader as loyally and as cheerfully as you did +your own. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Infantry approaches the battle field in columns of squads. While +yet several miles from the enemy's position the troops may come +under artillery fire. On green men entering upon their fight, +the sound of the projectile whistling through the air, the noise, +flash, and smoke on the burst of the shrapnel, and the hum of +the various pieces thereafter, all produce a very terrifying +effect, but old soldiers soon learn to pay little attention to +this, as the danger is not <b>great</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As the troops advance, the column breaks up into smaller columns, +which form on an irregular line with more or less interval between. +As the advance continues each column breaks up into smaller columns +until finally a line of skirmishers is formed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Firing is delayed as long as possible for three reasons, viz: +(<i>a</i>) At the extreme ranges little damage can be done on the +enemy, and ineffective firing always encourages him; (<i>b</i>) +halting to fire delays the advance, and the great object to be +accomplished is to close in on the enemy where you can meet him +on better terms; (<i>c</i>) plenty of ammunition will be required +at the decisive stage of the fight, and it is very difficult to +send extra ammunition up to the firing line. <b>Therefore never +fire until ordered to do so, and then never fire more than the +number of rounds designated. Never fire after the command "cease +firing" is given.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. +Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be +held as a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Soon, however, it will be necessary to halt and open fire on +the enemy in order to cause him some loss, to make his riflemen +keep down in their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It +is probable that at this time and until you arrive much closer +you will not see any of the enemy to fire at. You may not even +see any trenches nor know just where the enemy is. Your higher +officers, however, with their field glasses and the messages +they receive, will know. Each company will be assigned a certain +front to cover with its fire. <b>Therefore be careful to fix your +sights at the designated range and fire only at the designated +target.</b> This means team work in firing, which is one of the +most important elements of success. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The firing line advances from position to position by means of +rushes. At long range the entire line may rush forward at the +same time, but as the range decreases one part of the line rushes +forward while the remainder keeps up a hot fire on the enemy. +The number taking part in each rush decreases as the fire of +the enemy becomes warmer, until perhaps only one squad, or even +less, rushes or crawls forward at a time, protected by the fire +of the rest of the company. The distance covered by each rush +also becomes less and less. After any rush no part of the line +again advances until the rest of the line is up. <b>In making a +rush, the leader of the unit gives the signal and leads the way. +The rest follow. No attempt is made to keep a line, but each man +rushes forward at a run, seeking only to reach the new halting +position as quickly and with as little exposure as possible.</b> +When halted, the skirmishers need not be in a perfect line, but +every advantage should be taken of the ground for concealment +and protection. It is necessary only that no man or group of +men should interfere with the fire of other parts of the firing +line. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The noise on the firing line will be great. Leaders will be disabled +and new men will take their places. Reinforcements coming up will +cause units to become mixed. To the green man everything may appear +to be in confusion, but this is not so. This is war as it really +is. <b>If you have lost your squad or your squad leader, join the +leader nearest to you.</b> This is the way the game is played. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As long as the fight lasts every available rifleman must be kept +in the firing line. The first and last consideration is to win +the battle. <b>Therefore, under no circumstances will any soldier +be permitted to go to the rear, either for ammunition or to assist +the wounded.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the attacking force can no longer advance, it is much safer to +throw up hasty intrenchments and await the arrival of reinforcements +or darkness than it is to retreat. Retreating troops are the one +that suffer the greatest. This lesson is taught by every great +war. <b>Therefore, always remember that the safest thing to do is +to stick to firing line.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Troops on the firing line, when not actually engaged in firing +at the enemy, busy themselves throwing up shelter trenches. It +only requires a few minutes to construct a trench that gives +great protection. <b>Therefore, never get separated from your +intrenching tool.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Concealment is no less important than protection. Therefore, +when conditions permit, as is generally the case when on the +defensive, every effort should be made to hide intrenchments by +the use of sod, grass, weeds, bushes, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In making an attack the infantry is always supported when possible +by its own artillery, which continues to fire over its head until +the infantry arrives very close to the enemy's trenches. This +fire is helping you a great deal by keeping down the fire of +the enemies infantry and artillery. Therefore, don't think you +are being fired into by your own artillery because you hear their +shells and shrapnel singing through the air or bursting a short +distance in your front, but rather be thankful you are receiving +their help up to the very last minute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the last rush which carries the enemy's position there is +always much mixing of units. The firing line does not continue +rushing madly as individuals after the enemy, but halts and fires +on him until he gets out of good range. The pursuit is taken +up by formed troops held in reserve or by the firing line only +after its units are again gotten together. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As the fighting often lasts all day, and great suffering is caused +from thirst, <b>don't throwaway your canteen when the fight +commences</b>. It may also be impossible to get rations up to the +line during the night. Therefore, it is advisable to hold onto at +least one ration. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As the recent war has shown the possibility of hand-to-hand fighting, +especially at night, each soldier should be schooled in the use +of the bayonet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following has particular reference to the duties of platoon +and squad leaders and to the team work of the platoon in combat: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Attacking troops must first gain <b>fire superiority</b> in order +to reach the hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is +meant making one's fire superior to that of the enemy in volume +and accuracy, and it depends upon the number of rifles employed, +the rate of fire, the character of the target, training and +discipline, and fire direction and control. When the fire of the +attackers becomes effective and superior to that of the defenders +the latter are no longer able to effectively and coolly aim and +fire at the former, and, as a consequence, the attackers are +able to inaugurate a successful rush or advance which carries +them nearer to the enemy's position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a trained organization has been committed to the attack, +the gaining of fire superiority depends upon the way in which +<b>fire direction</b> and <b>fire control</b> are exercised. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The captain <b>directs</b> the fire of the company. He indicates +to the platoon commanders the target (enemy) which the company is +to fire and advance upon, and tells each upon which part of this +target he is to direct the fire of his platoon. When he desires +the fire to be opened he gives the necessary commands or signals, +including the range at which the sights lire to be set. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the fire fight has once started it becomes to a great extent +a fight of a number of platoons. The platoon is the largest +organization which can be controlled by a single leader in action. +The platoon commander (lieutenant or sergeant) <b>controls</b> its +fire in order to gain the maximum fire effect and to avoid wasting +ammunition. He must try his best to make the fire of his platoon +effective, to get it forward, and to support neighboring platoons +in their effort to advance. At the same time he must hold himself +subject to his captain's directions. He should take advantage +of every chance to carry his platoon forward unless otherwise +ordered. In all this he is assisted by his platoon guide (sergeant) +and by his corporals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the commencement of an engagement the platoon commander will +give the objective (part of the enemy's line or aiming target) at +which his platoon is to direct its fire. Noncommissioned officers +must be sure that they see and understand the objective, and that +all the men in their squads do likewise. Fire is then directed at +this objective without further command until the platoon commander +gives a new objective. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the target assigned +to their platoon which corresponds with their own position in +their own platoon, so that there will be no portion of the target +which is not covered by fire. A portion of the enemy's line not +covered by fire means that that portion is able to coolly aim +and fire at their opponents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In an engagement the voice can seldom be heard over a few feet, +and the platoon commander will generally have to convey his orders +by signals. A corporal may be able to shout orders to his squad, +and orders may be repeated along a skirmish line by shouting. +Care should be taken that orders intended for one platoon only +are not thus conveyed to another platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon commander, +means "Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned officers at +once suspend firing and glance toward the platoon commander to +see if the latter has any signals or orders for them. If not, +they resume firing. A long blast on the whistle means "Suspend +Firing." When a noncommissioned officer hears this signal from +his platoon commander he should at once shout "Suspend Firing." +Upon receiving a signal, the noncommissioned officer for whom +it is intended should at once repeat it back, to be sure that +it is correctly understood. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a leader in command of a platoon or squad receives an order +or signal to rush, he should cause his men to suspend firing and +to hold themselves flat but ready for a sprinter's start. He +selects the point, as far as possible with reference to cover, +to which he intends to carry his unit forward. He then gives the +command "<b>RUSH</b>," springs forward, and running at full speed +about three paces ahead of his men, leads them in the rush. +Arriving at the position he has selected, he throws himself prone, +and the men drop on either side of him. All crawl forward to good +firing positions, considering the cover also, and the leader +gives the necessary orders for resuming the fire. The latter +will include giving the range again, the length of the rush being +subtracted from the sight setting ordered at the last position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As a rule, rushes should be started by a unit on one flank, and +should be followed in succession by the other units to the opposite +flank. Each succeeding unit should halt on the line established +by the unit which first rushed. When a unit is about to rush, +leaders in charge of adjacent units should caution their men to +be careful not to fire into the rushing unit as it bounds forward. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When one unit suspends fire for the purpose of rushing, adjacent +leaders should arrange to have a portion of their men turn their +fire on the target of the rushing unit, to the end that there +may be no portion of the enemy's line not under fire and able +to fire coolly on the rushing unit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Rushes should be made for as long a distance as possible, due +regard being had for the wind of the men and not to get beyond +supporting distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate an +advance, and quickly place a skirmish line close to the enemy's +position, where its fire will have more effect. An attacking +line suffers less from casualties at short ranges than it does +at mid range. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Every advantage should be taken to utilize the cover available. +The best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers +from the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions +for firing and for readily advancing. In order to allow men to +regain their wind, or should the fire of the enemy be so effective +as to prevent a further advance without reinforcement, advantage +may be taken to lie close in cover, or hasty fire trenches may be +thrown up in order to allow the line to maintain its position. +"<b>To go back under fire is to die</b>." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a platoon is firing, all noncommissioned officers watch +every opportunity to make the fire more effective. The platoon +guide should constantly watch the men to see that they do not +become excited, fire too hastily or without aim, that their sights +are set at the correct range, that they are obviously firing +at the designated target, and that they assume steady firing +positions and take advantage of cover. In performing these duties +it may be necessary for the guides to be constantly crawling +along the line. A corporal in like manner supervises his squad, +firing with it when he is not actively engaged in controlling +it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Bayonets are fixed preparatory to a charge. This command is usually +given by the bugle. Only one or two men in each squad should +fix their bayonets at the same time, in order that there may +be no marked pause or diminution in the fire at this critical +stage of the engagement. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In order to be effective in combat, the platoon must be thoroughly +trained to work as a team. Each noncommissioned officer must be +conversant with the signals and commands and the proper methods +for instantly putting into effect the orders of his platoon +commander. Each private must be trained until he instinctively +does the right thing in each phase of the action. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Patrolling.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The designation of a patrol indicates the nature of the duty for +which it is detailed, as, for example, visiting, reconnoitering, +exploring, flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. An Infantry +patrol consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Reconnoitering patrols are habitually small and seek safety in +concealment or flight, fighting only when their mission demands +it. The most skillful reconnaissance is where patrols accomplish +their mission and return without being discovered by the enemy. +When resistance is expected stronger detachments are required. +These cover themselves with small patrols of two to four men, +the remainder acting as support. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The commander determines the number and strength of patrols and +when they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal principle to send +out patrols of such strength only as will accomplish the object. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officer sending out the patrol verifies the detail, designates +a second in command, and gives the necessary instruction. The +orders or instructions for a patrol, or for any detachment going +on reconnoissance, must state clearly where the enemy is or is +supposed to be, what information is desired, what features are +of special importance, the general direction to be followed, +whether friendly patrols are liable to be encountered, and where +messages are to be sent or the patrol is to report. Important and +comprehensive instructions should be in writing, but precautions +against capture of papers must be taken. An officer sending out a +patrol must be certain that his orders are understood. Detailed +instructions are, as a rule, avoided. When necessary the time +of return is stated. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The patrol leader should be selected with care. He should have +good judgment, courage, be able to read maps, make sketches, +and send clear and concise messages. In addition to his ordinary +equipment, he should have a map of the country, a watch, field +glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The leader of a patrol should carefully inspect it before starting +out and see that each member is in good physical condition, has +serviceable shoes, a full canteen, one ration, a first-aid packet, +and that his rifle and ammunition are in good condition. He will +see that the equipment is arranged so as not to rattle; that +nothing bright is exposed so as to glitter in the sunlight; that +nothing is taken along that will give information to the enemy +should any member fall into his hands, as, for example, copies +of orders, maps with position of troops marked thereon, letters, +newspapers, or collar ornaments. Blanket rolls should generally +be left behind, in order that the patrol may travel as light +as possible. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The leader then gives his patrol information and instructions. +These embrace instructions from higher authority; his detailed +plans; information of the country and enemy; the countersign, +if any; the point where the patrol will assemble if scattered. +He will see that the men understand the prescribed signals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>It must always be remembered that it makes no difference how +valuable may be the information that the patrol gets, it is worthless +if not sent back in time to be of service.</b> Herein is where most +patrols full. This applies particularly to the information obtained +by patrols acting as a point or flankers of advance, rear, and +flank guards. Whenever the patrol gets any information, the leader +must think whether the commanding officer would change his plans +or issue new orders if he had the information. If he would, the +information should be sent back at once. If the distance is great +or the inhabitants are hostile, it is well to send two men with +the message. These men should not travel side by side, but as +a patrol of two men. If the information is very important, and +the danger of capture is considerable, the message should be +sent by two parties, each traveling by a different route. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A message from a patrol should always show (<i>a</i>) the place +from which it is sent; (<i>b</i>) the time it is sent (date, hour, +and minute); (<i>c</i>) to whom it is sent; (<i>d</i>) the message +itself; (<i>e</i>) what the patrol intends doing after sending the +message; (<i>f</i>) the name of the sender. Under (<i>d</i>) care +must be taken to separate what has actually been seen by the patrol +from information received from other sources. Care must also be +taken not to exaggerate what is seen, but to report only the exact +facts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In their conduct patrols exercise the greatest vigilance to prevent +discovery. No formal formation is or should be prescribed. Under +the leader's guidance it moves so as to guard against surprise, +usually with point and flankers. To extend the sphere of its +observation, still smaller patrols (one or two men) may be sent +out for short distances, communication with the leader being +maintained by signals. Whatever the formation adopted, it should +favor the escape of at least one man in case of surprise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads. +In this formation few signals are necessary, the men simply +regulating their movements by his. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose +information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are +not allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol lenders are authorized +to seize telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, +reporting the facts as soon as possible. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Patrols should observe everything for signs of the enemy. Even +apparent trifles may be of great value. The finding of a collar +ornament showing a man's regiment may enable the chief of staff +to determine that the enemy has been reenforced. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Patrols should not travel on the main roads if they can observe +them and at the same time make the necessary progress by moving +some distance to the side of the roads. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Unless in case of attack or of great personal danger, no member +of the patrol should fire on hostile troops without orders from +the patrol leader. When sent out to gain information, patrols +should avoid fighting unless it is absolutely necessary in order +to carry out their orders. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered +with precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at +points affording good view, and the country is studied in all +directions, landmarks to the rear being impressed on the minds +of the men so that the way back can be readily found; the leader +consults his map and locates himself thereon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a patrol is scattered it reassembles at some place previously +selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut +off, it returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last +resort, it scatters so that at least one man may return with +information. Patrols nearing their own lines should march at a +walk unless pressed by the enemy. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Occasionally it is advisable fur the leader to conceal his patrol +and continue the reconnoissance with one or two companions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Patrols far from their commands or in contact with the enemy +often remain out overnight. In such cases they seek a place of +concealment, proceeding thereto after nightfall or under cover. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate his +main force. Information is particularly desired of his strength, +whether he has infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the route and +direction of his march, or the location of his camp and line +of outposts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Dust clouds indicate moving bodies. Infantry raises a low, thick +cloud; cavalry a high thin cloud; artillery and wagons a broken +cloud. The kind of troops, direction of march, and approximate +strength may thus sometimes be roughly estimated. If from some +position a body of troops can be seen marching along in column, +the exact time in minutes and seconds it requires for them to +pas a certain point should be noted, together with the formation +they are in, thus: Infantry, column of squads, three minutes and +twelve seconds; cavalry, columns of twos at a trot, one minute +and twenty seconds; wagons, four-mule, five minutes. From this +information the strength can be determined by the following rule: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupy half a yard +per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per man, and artillery +and wagons in single column 20 yards per gun, caisson, or wagon, +a given point would be passed in one minute by about-- +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> +<tr><td> </td><td class="right">175</td> + <td> infantry.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td><td class="right">110</td> + <td> infantry cavalry at a walk.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td><td class="right">200</td> + <td> infantry cavalry at a trot.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td><td class="right">5</td> + <td> infantry guns, caissons, or wagons.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above estimate. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Patrols should always observe the country marched over, with a +view to making a report on the same. The following information +is always of value: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Roads</b>.--Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam, +etc.; width, whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; border, +whether fenced with stone, barbed, wire, rails, etc.; steepness +in crossing hills and valleys; where they pass through defiles +and along commanding heights. etc.; crossroads. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Surrounding country</b>.--Whether generally open and passable +for infantry, cavalry, and artillery, or whether broken and +impassable, due to fences, woods, crops, ravines, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Railroads</b>.--Single or double track, narrow or broad gauge, +tunnels, bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Bridges</b>.--Material, wood, stone, steel, etc.: length and +breadth; number and kind of piers or supports. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Rivers</b>.--Direction; width, depth; kind of bottom, such as +mud, sand, rocky, etc.: banks, steep or gentle, open or wooded; +rapidity of current; variations in depth at different times as +indicated by driftwood and high-water marks; islands; heights in +vicinity commanding streams. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Woods</b>.--Extent and shape; kind of trees; free from +underbrush or not; clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Telegraph lines</b>.--Number of wires, along ronds or +railroads, stations, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Villages</b>.--Size, kind of houses, nature of streets, means +of defense, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Hills and ridges</b>.--Whether slopes are gentle or steep; +whether top is narrow or wide; whether ground is broken or smooth, +wooded or clear; whether difficult or easy to cross, etc.; whether +commanded by other hills. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Defiles</b>.--Their direction, length, and width; whether +surrounding heights are passable for infantry and artillery; kind +of country at each opening of the defile, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Ravines, ditches, etc</b>.--Width and depth; banks, whether +passable for infantry, cavalry, and wagons; whether suitable for +trenches, or for movement of troops therein, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In general, every soldier should be constantly on the lookout to +obtain information that might be of some military value. Remember +that information of the enemy and of the country is worthless +unless made known to the proper officials in time to be of use. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Every soldier should be able to find his way in a strange country; +should know how to use a compass; should know how to locate the +North Star; should be able to travel across country, keeping +a given direction, both by day and by night, and by observing +landmarks he should be able to return to the starting point either +over the same route or by a more circuitous one. This can easily +be learned by a little practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It adds a great deal to the value of a soldier if he knows how +to use a map to find his way. If he knows how to make a rough +sketch of the country, showing the position of roads, streams, +woods, railroads, bridges, houses, villages, fields, fences, +hills, etc., he has added to his value as a soldier very much, +indeed, because a rough sketch of a country will give more and +better information at a glance than can be obtained by reading +many pages of written description. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Patrolling</b> is one of the most important duties a soldier +can learn. Any enlisted man who understands thoroughly his +duties as a member of a patrol will understand also most of his +duties when with advance or rear guards or when on outpost duty. +Patrolling can not be learned merely by reading books nor by +work indoors. Thoroughness comes only by actually going out in +the country and acting as a patrol. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In carrying out this idea the following scheme is recommended: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Let four or more men and a noncommissioned officer act as a patrol. +They assemble at a certain time, at a convenient point on some +country road. An officer, whom we will call Captain A, acts as +the director; the noncommissioned officer, whom we will call +Sergeant B, acts as patrol leader; and the others (Privates C, +D, E, etc.) act as members of Sergeant B's patrol. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Assume that the company (battalion. etc.) has just made camp in +this vicinity find that the inhabitants are friendly (or hostile). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Captain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is +situated and points out where the various sentinels are posted. +(This in itself affords an opportunity for much discussion and +for teaching many valuable lessons.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him-- +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) Just what information Captain A has of the enemy, +and also any information of the country or of friendly troops +in the vicinity that might be of service to Sergeant B. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) How many men he shall take for the patrol (this is +another problem for Captain A to solve). Any men present not +used as part of the patrol go along with Captain A as observers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) How far he shall go and what country he shall cover +with the patrol. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) Just what information it is particularly desired he +shall obtain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) Where he shall send his messages and when he shall +return. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Example 1:</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that a company of +hostile infantry was in camp last night at X, about 5 miles from +here on this road. Take 5 men and proceed toward X and find out +whether the enemy is still there, and if not, when he left and +where he went. Send messages to me here, and return by 8 o'clock +this evening." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Example 2:</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns over in +that direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and proceed to that +high hill you see over there about 4 miles away. Send a message to +me here when you reach there. You may go farther if you then think +it advisable, but return before daylight. I desire particularly to +know if there are any hostile troops in this vicinity, especially +artillery. I shall send Sergeant X with 3 men to observe the +country from that hill you see over there farther to the south. +He will remain there till dark. Send messages to me here. If +the company is not here on your return you will find a note for +you underneath this rail." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Example 3:</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sergeant B, this friendly country boy has just reported that +four hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour ago at his +father's house, which he says is about 2 miles up this road. +One of the men seemed to be very sick. You will select eight +men from your section and endeavor to capture these men. If they +have disappeared you will reconnoiter in that vicinity until dark. +This boy will accompany you as a guide. I desire particularly to +learn the position, strength, and composition of any hostile +troops in this vicinity. Send reports to me here. Return before +daylight." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Example 4:</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Sergeant B, here is a map of the country in this vicinity on +a scale of 1 inch to the mile. Here is where we are camped +[indicating position on map]. I have just learned that foraging +parties of the enemy are collecting supplies over here at X +[indicating point on map], which is 10 miles off in that direction +[pointing across country toward X]. It is reported that this +bridge over this stream [indicating same on the map] which is +about 3 miles down this road [indicating road and direction on +the ground], has been destroyed. You will take three men from +your platoon and verify this report. You will also reconnoiter +the stream for a distance of 1 mile both above and below the +bridge for fords suitable for infantry. Messages will reach me +here. Return by 8 o'clock to-night." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sergeant B then inspects his men and gives them their instructions. +The patrol is then formed and moves out exactly as it would under +actual war conditions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Captain A may halt (and assemble if desirable) the patrol at +intervals in order to discuss the formation used and the movement +of any members of the patrol, their route, use of cover, etc., +with the reasons therefor, and compare the same with suggested +modifications of the formations, etc. After the discussion, the +patrol is again set in motion. Captain A may accompany any part +of the patrol. From time to time he presents certain situations +to some member of the patrol, being very careful to assume only +such situations as might naturally occur. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Thus, take Example 1: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Captain A is with Sergeant B, who, with Private C, is marching +along the road as the point of the patrol. The other members of +the patrol are distributed to suit the nature of the country +over which the patrol is marching. The point has just reached a +ridge beyond which the country is open and cultivated for about +half a mile. Beyond this the road enters a woods. Captain A now +says: "Sergeant B, from this point you see two soldiers in khaki +on the road there at the beginning of that cornfield about 200 +yards from the woods [points out same]. They are moving in this +direction. About 200 yards to the right of these find somewhat +farther to their rear you see two more men moving along that +rail fence." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in actual war. How +does he signal to his patrol? Does he assemble his men? If so, +how and where? Does he send a message back to camp; and if so, +by whom, and is it written or verbal? (If written, Sergeant B +actually writes it and delivers it to Private ----, with the +necessary instructions. If verbal, it is actually given to Private +---- with instructions.) Captain A must in this case make notes +of what the message was. In either case, Private ---- ceases to +be a member of the patrol and joins Captain A as an observer. +He should, however, at some later time be required to repeat his +message to Captain A, on the assumption that he had reached camp +with the same. The message, whether oral or written, should be +thoroughly analyzed and discussed. Was it proper to send a message +at this time? Does Sergeant B intend to remain in observation; if +so, how long? (Captain A can give such information from time to +time concerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant B might reasonably +be supposed to learn in view of his dispositions. In order that +Captain A may present natural assumptions, it is very essential +that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume a situation +for the hostile forces and that he should consider himself as +in command of all hostile troops. In this particular case he +should assume himself to be in command of the hostile patrol, +acting under certain specified orders similar to examples given, +and he should conduct this patrol in his own mind in accordance +with these orders, giving Sergeant B only such information as +he might reasonably be expected to obtain in view of whatever +action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant B attempt to capture this +patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighting and attempt to pass +it unobserved; and if so, how and why? +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In this manner the exercise is continued. Care must be taken +not to have the patrol leader or members state what they would +do, but they must actually do it. Explanations and discussions +may take place later. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In a similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or any +member of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed by +a squad (on the assumption that it is the leading unit of an +advance guard), and the exercise is then continued along these +lines. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following are examples of assumption that might be made and +carried out: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) That the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) That one or more of the patrol is wounded. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) That a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as +prisoner). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) That a friendly inhabitant gives certain information. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) That a dust cloud is seen in the distance over the +trees. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) That a column of troops can be seen marching along +a distant road. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>g</i>) That an abandoned camp is discovered and certain signs +noted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>h</i>) That the patrol is attacked by a superior force and +compelled to scatter. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +There is practically no end to the number of reasonable assumptions +that may be made. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Company officers may use this method of instructing non-commissioned +officers in patrolling, advance and rear guard duty, outposts, +and in squad leading, in writing messages, in selecting positions +for trenches, and in constructing and concealing same. This form +of instruction is called "a tactical walk." It is very greatly +used by all foreign armies. Exercises along the same general +lines are conducted for field and staff officers and even general +officers, and are called "tactical rides" and "strategical rides," +depending upon their object. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After some proficiency has been attained as a result of these +tactical walks, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be awakened +in this work by sending out two patrols the same day, one to +operate against the other. Each should wear a distinctive uniform. +The strength of each patrol, its starting point, route to be +followed, and its orders should all be unknown to the other patrol. +If blank ammunition is used, an officer should supervise its +issue and carefully inspect to see that no man carries any ball +cartridges. One umpire should accompany the commander of each +party. Each umpire should be fully informed of the strength, +orders, and route of both patrols. He must, however, carefully +avoid giving suggestions or offering any information to the +commander. Observers in these small maneuver problems are generally +in the way and none should be permitted to be along. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These small maneuvers may be gradually developed by having one +side establish al outpost or fight a delaying action, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It should always be remembered that there is no hard and fast +rule prescribing how a patrol of three, five, or any number of +men should march. The same is equally true of advance guards, +and applies also to the establishment of outposts. It is simply +a question of common sense based on military knowledge. Don't +try to remember any diagrams in a book. Think only of what you +have been ordered to do and how best you can handle your men +to accomplish your mission, and at the same time save the men +from any unnecessary hardships. Never use two or more men to do +what one can do just as well, and don't let your men get beyond +your control. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In addition to the signals prescribed in the Infantry Drill +Regulations, the following should be clearly understood by the +members of a patrol. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold rifle above the head +horizontally; enemy in force, same proceeding, raising and lowering +the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the +hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Other signals may be agreed upon, but they must be familiar to +the men; complicated signals are avoided. Signals must be used +cautiously so as not to convey information to the enemy. +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Advance Guards.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The advance guard is a detachment of the main body which precedes +and covers it on the march. The primary duty of an advance guard +is to insure the safe and uninterrupted march of the main body. +Specifically its duties are: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by +reconnoitering. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their +observing, firing upon, or delaying the main body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit +the main body to prepare for action. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to seize a +good position and locate his lines, care being taken not to bring +on a general engagement unless the advance guard commander is +empowered to do so. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way +the steady march of the column. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The strength of the advance guard will vary with the proximity +of the enemy and character of the country; for a regiment it +will generally consist of from two companies to a battalion, +for a battalion of one company; for a company of from a squad +to a platoon. The advance guard commander is responsible for +the proper performance of the duties with which it is charged +and for its conduct and formation. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The advance guard provides for its security and gains information +by throwing out to the front and flanks smaller bodies. Each part +must keep in touch with the unit from which it is sent out. An +advance guard is generally divided into a reserve and a support; +where it consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is generally +omitted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The support sends forward an advance party, which, in turn, sends +forward a point. In small advance guards the point precedes the +advance party about 150 yards, the advance party the support +about 300 yards, and the support the main body about 400 yards. +Where advance guards are large enough to require a reserve these +distances are increased about one-fourth, the reserve following +the support, the main body following the reserve at a distance +varying from 500 to 800 yards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Unless the country to the flanks is distinctly visible from the +roads for a distance of what may be said to be effective rifle +fire, approximately 1,000 yards, flanking patrols of two or three +men each should be sent out from the advance party, and, when +in proximity of the enemy, in addition from the support. When +the nature of the country is such that patrols may move across +country without undue effort and fatigue these patrols should +march at a distance of from 200 to 300 yards from the flank of +the body from which detached. For the examination of any object, +such as a wood, buildings, etc., examining patrols should be sent +out from the main body. The usual method of protecting the flanks, +particularly when the country is at all cut up or difficult, is +to send out patrols from time to time to some point from which a +good outlook can be obtained, or which will afford protection to +the enemy. These patrols remain in observation until the advance +guard has passed, when they rejoin the nearest subdivision, as +quickly as possible working their way to that to which they belong +during the halts. By sending out a succession of small patrols in +this manner the flanks are protected. Should the advance party +become depleted, it must be reenforced from the support. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A battalion acting as advance guard would have two companies +in reserve and two in support. The support would send forward +as advance party two platoons, the advance party in turn sending +forward as point one squad. A company acting as advance guard +would have no reserve and would send forward as advance party +one platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Cases may arise when the best means of covering the head and +flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extended at +intervals of from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance, when passing +through high corn, underbrush, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It must always be remembered that the principal duty of the advance +guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the main body. If +the point is fired upon, it should at once deploy and endeavor to +advance fighting. The flankers should assist in this and endeavor +to locate the enemy's flank should there be such resistance that +advance was impossible. Each succeeding body should march promptly +forward, and in turn be placed in action, with the idea of clearing +the way for the advance of the main body. Should this be impossible, +the commander of the entire body must determine what measures he +will take. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Rear guards.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +A rear guard is a detachment detailed to protect the main body +from attack in rear. In a retreat it checks pursuit and enables +the main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy +and to re-form if disorganized. The general formation is that +of an advance guard reversed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Its commander should take advantage of every favorable opportunity +to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking up +specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to +deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so +closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. +The position taken should be selected with reference to ease of +withdrawal and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long +ranges. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. Flank guards.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +A flank guard is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a +column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may +be placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so +marched as to cover the passage. The object of the flank guard +is to hold the enemy in check long enough to enable the main body +to pass, or, like the advance guard, to enable the main body +to deploy. Like all other detachments, it should be no larger +than is necessary, and should not be detailed except when its +protection is required. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance +from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable +communication must exist between it and the main body. The flank +guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with advance or +rear guards, or both, as circumstances demand, and with patrolling +on the exposed flank. +</p> + +<h3>Section 7. Outposts.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Troops not on the march provide for their security by outposts. +The general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance, observation, +and resistance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The specific duties are: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. To protect the main body, so that the troops may rest undisturbed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable +the main body to make the necessary dispositions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +During an advance the outposts are usually detailed from the +advance guard. During the retreat the outpost for the night usually +forms the rear guard the next day. If the command remains in +bivouac, the new outpost generally goes on duty at daybreak. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but they should +avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the command. +Firing disturbs the rest of troops and, if frequently indulged +in, ceases to be a warning. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +No trumpet signals except "to arms" or "to horse" are sounded, +and all unnecessary noises must be avoided. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As a rule an outpost will not exceed one-sixth the strength of +a command. For a single company a few sentinels and patrols will +suffice; for a larger command a more elaborate system must be +devised. The troops composing the outpost are generally divided +into a reserve and several supports. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At a proper distance in front of the camp of the main body a +line which offers a good defensive position is selected. This +is called the <b>line of resistance</b>, and should he so located +that an advancing enemy will be held in check beyond effective +rifle range in case of a small force, artillery range in case of +a large force, of the main body until the latter can deploy. The +reserve is stationed at some point in rear of this line, where +it can be moved quickly to reinforce any point as needed. The +line of resistance is divided into sections, the limits of each of +which are clearly defined. A support is assigned to each section, +which are numbered from right to left, and occupies a position +on or near the line, having special regard to covering avenues +of approach. The position occupied should always be intrenched. +The reserve and supports proceed to their respective positions +by the shortest routes, providing for their own protection by +sending out covering detachments. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Generally speaking, about one-half the Infantry of the advance +guard should be in the supports. As each support arrives at its +position it sends out observation groups, varying in size from +four men to a platoon, to watch the country in the direction of +the enemy. These groups are called outguards. For convenience +they are classified as pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts, +and should be sufficient in number to cover the front of the +section occupied by the support and connect with the neighboring +supports. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A picket is a group consisting of two or more squads, ordinarily +not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of outposts +to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more +sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for observation. Pickets +are placed at the more important points in the line of outguards, +such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the number +of small groups required to observe properly its sector. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A sentry squad is a squad (eight men) posted in observation at +an indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, +the remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of +sentinels. In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group +similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As a rule not more than one-third of the support should be on +outguard duty. As soon as they are sent out to their postions +the support commander selects a defensive position on the line of +resistance; gives instruction for intrenching same; establishes +a sentinel to watch for and transmit signals from outguards; +sends out patrols to reconnoiter the country to the front of +his section and, if on the flank of the line, the flank; and +then proceeds to make a careful reconnoissance of the section +assigned him, rectifying the position of outguards if necessary, +seeing that they understand their instructions in case of attack +or when strangers approach their posts, and pointing out their +lines of retreat in case they are compelled to fall back on the +support. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the outguards are established, the members of the support may +stack arms and remove equipment except cartridge belts. No fires +will be built or smoking permitted unless specially authorized, +or no loud talking or other noise. All patrolling to the front +will be done, as a rule, from the support. The support commander +should locate the position of the adjacent supports und make +arrangements with the commanders for the joint defense of the +line of resistance. At nights all roads and trails should be +carefully covered and the country to the front and between adjacent +outguards well patrolled. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The line occupied by the outguards is called the <b>line of +observation</b>. Outguards move to their positions providing for +their own protection and so us to conceal the movement from the +enemy. These positions are intrenched and are numbered from right +to left in each support. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to guard +the outpost from surprise, and to make a preliminary resistance +to the enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will vary +according to its object. When an important road which at night +will afford a line of advance, or a bridge is to be covered, or +when several posts are established from an outguard it should +be of considerable strength, two squads or a platoon. When mere +observation and alarm are all that is required four men will +suffice. A squall is a good unit to use as an outguard; this +will allow one double sentry post of three reliefs and one man in +addition to the commander, who may be used for messenger service. +The outguard should be carefully concealed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should be no cooking +or smoking. The intervals between outguards will depend upon +the situation and the terrain. The line of observation is not +necessarily continuous, but all avenues of approach must be carefully +guarded. The distance of the outguard from the support likewise +is governed by the terrain, but in general may be said to be +from 300 to 400 yards. In thick country or at night outguards +patrol along the line of observation between posts. Communication +between outguards and the support is by signal and messenger, in +special cases by wire. Members of the outguard retain possession +of their weapons and do not remove their equipment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Sentinels from the outguard are posted so as to avoid observation, +but so that they may have a clear lookout and be able to see, +if possible, by day, the sentinels of the adjacent outguards. +Double sentinels are always posted near enough to each other to +communicate easily in ordinary voice. Sentinels are generally +on post two hours out of six. For every sentinel and every patrol +there should be three reliefs, and outguards should be of a strength +sufficient to allow this. The position of a sentinel should be +selected with reference to observation. It may be advantageous +to place a sentinel in a tree. Sentinels furnished by cossack +posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those furnished +by their pickets may be kept as far sa 100 yards away. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approach sentinels +from the rear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A sentinel on the line of observation should always have the +following instructions: The names of villages, streams, and prominent +features in sight and where the roads lead. The number (if any) of +his post, and the number of his and of the adjoining outguards; +the position of the support; the line of retreat to be followed if +the outguard is compelled to fall back; the position of advance +detachments and whether friendly patrols are operating in front; +to watch to the front and flanks without intermission and devote +special attention to unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he +sees indications of the enemy, to at once notify his immediate +superior; in case of imminent danger, or when an attack is made, +to give the alarm by firing rapidly; by day to pass in or out +officers, noncommissioned officers, and detachments recognized +as part of the outposts, and officers known to have authority to +do so; to detain all others and notify the outguard commander; +at night, when persons approach his post, to come to a ready, halt +them, and notify the outguard commander; the latter challenges, +ascertains their identity, and acts accordingly. When individuals +fail to halt, or otherwise disobey, to fire upon them after a +second warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape; +to require deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a +patrol is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued +by the enemy to drop their arms and to give an alarm; if they +fail to obey they are fired upon; to require bearers of flags of +truce and their escorts to halt and to face outward; to permit +them to hold no conversation and to see that they are then +blindfolded and disposed of in accordance with instructions from +the support commander; if they fall to obey to fire upon them; +at night, to remain practically stationary, moving about for +purposes of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless +authorized to do so; in the daytime, to make use of natural or +artificial cover and assume such positions as to give him the +best field of view; to inform passing patrols of what he has +seen; to carry his weapon habitually loaded and locked and at +will. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Outpost patrols are divided into those which operate beyond the +lines and those whose duty lies principally within the lines. +The former, called reconnoitering patrols, scout in the direction +of the enemy; the latter, called visiting patrols, maintain +communication between the parts of the outpost and supervise the +performance of duty on the line of observation. Reconnoissance +should be continuous. Though scouts and detachments of cavalry +remain in contact with the enemy, or at least push forward to a +considerable distance, more detailed reconnoissance by infantry +patrols in the foreground must not be neglected. Reconnoitering +patrols are composed of at least two men and a skillful leader, who, +in important cases, would be an officer. They obtain information, +ascertain the presence of the enemy, or discover his approach. +All patrols, when they cross the line of observation, inform the +nearest sentinel of the direction in which they are to advance; +on their return they similarly report what they have seen of the +enemy; signals are agreed upon so that they can be recognized +when returning. Any ground near the line of observation which +might afford cover for troops, or for scouts or spies, and the +approach to which can not be observed by sentinels, is searched +frequently by patrols. Definite information concerning the enemy +is reported at once. Patrols fire only in self-defense or to +give the alarm. Supports on the flank of an outpost position +patrol the country on the exposed flank. Visiting patrols and +reliefs should not march in the open, and thereby expose the +position of sentinels. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +During a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts are made, +special measures for protection are taken. When the halt is for +a short period, less than half an hour, the advance party and +support remain at ease, the point and flankers move to positions +from which they can obtain a good lookout, and additional patrols +may be sent out from advance parties and supports. Where the halt +is for a period exceeding half an hour a <b>march outpost</b> +should be formed. With an advance guard consisting of a battalion, +2 companies in the reserve, 2 in the support, the latter having +as advance party one-half a company, a typical march outpost +would be formed as follows: The advance party would send one +platoon, four or five hundred yards to the right as outguard No. +1, the remaining platoon constituting outguard No. 2. A platoon +from the head of the support would be sent a similar distance to +the left as outguard No. 3. The balance of the support would +constitute the support of the march outpost, the reserve of the +advance guard acting as reserve. On signal being given to resume +the march, the various units would close in, and as soon as the +advance party had assembled the march would be taken up. +</p> + +<h3>Section 8. Rifle Trenches.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Soldiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on the +offensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The defensive may +delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy him. "Troops +dig because they are forced to halt; they do not halt to dig." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Trenches will frequently be constructed, without being used, +and soldiers must expect this as a feature of campaigning and +accept cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary labor. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the lying +position, each man scooping out a depression for his body and +throwing the earth to the front. In this position no excavation +can be conveniently made for the legs, but if time permits the +original excavation is enlarged and deepened until it is possible +to assume a sitting position, with the legs crossed and the shoulder +to the parapet. In such a position a man presents a smaller target +to shrapnel bullets than in the lying trench and can fire more +comfortably and with less exposure than in the kneeling trench. +From the sitting position the excavation may be continued until +a standing trench is secured. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The accompanying plate shows some of the more common forms of +trenches in profile. Figure 1 is the simplest form of standing +trench. Figure 2 shows the same trench deepened in rear, so as +to allow men to walk along in the rear (deeper) portion of the +trench without exposing their heads above the parapet. Figure 3 +shows a cover and firing trench, with a chamber in which men can +find shelter when under heavy artillery fire. When the excavated +earth is easily removed figure 4 shows a good profile. The enemy's +infantry, as well as his artillery, will generally have great +difficulty in seeing this type of trench. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in front of a +trench is called the <b>parapet</b>. It should be at least 30 +inches thick on top, and the front should slope gradually, as +shown in the plate, so that shells will tend to glance from it, +rather than penetrate and explode. The top should be covered with +sod, grass, or leaves, so as to hide the newly turned earth, which +could be easily seen and aimed at by the enemy. There should be +no rocks, loose stones, or pebbles on top, which might be struck +by the bullets, splintering and flying, thus adding greatly to +the number of dangerous projectiles, and often deflecting bullets +downward into the trench. A stone wall is a very dangerous thing +to be behind in a fight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and between +the parapet and the trench not covered by the parapet is to rest +the elbows on when firing, the rifle being rested on top of the +parapet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To obtain head cover in a trench fill a gunny sack or other bag +with sand or soil and place it on top of the parapet, aiming +around the right-hand side of it, or dig a small lateral trench +in the parapet large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over with +boards, small logs, or brush, and heap dirt on top, aiming through +the small trench or resulting loophole. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Figure 5 shows the plan of a section of a rifle trench.[7] Between +the portions occupied by each squad there is often placed a mound +of earth as high as the top of the parapet and projecting back into +the trench. This is called a <b>traverse</b> and protects the +occupants of the trench from fire from a flank. Bullets from this +direction hit a traverse, instead of flying down into the trench +and wounding several men. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 7: The traverse should be at least 6 feet wide instead +of 3 feet, as shown in figure 5.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Trenches are seldom continuous, but are made in sections placed +at the most advantageous points, as shown in figure 6. A company +or battalion may occupy a single section. The firing trenches +have cover trenches in rear of them, where the supports can rest +undisturbed by the hostile fire until they are needed in the +firing trench to repel a serious assault or to take part in a +counter attack. Passages consisting of deep communicating trenches +facilitate passage from the cover trenches to the firing trenches +when under fire. These communicating trenches are usually zigzag +or traversed to prevent their being swept by hostile fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When troops are likely to remain in trenches for a considerable +time drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and dressing +stations should be constructed in trenches. Water should be brought +into the trenches and holes excavated in the front wall of the +trench for extra ammunition. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In digging trenches men usually work in reliefs, one relief digging +while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to pick men +being about 3 to 1. If a plow can be obtained to turn the sod, +it will greatly facilitate the initial work of digging. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig016.jpg" width="490" height="723" alt="Plate V"> +</div> + +<h2><a name="VII">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +MARCHING AND CAMPING. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Breaking Camp and Preparation for a March.</h3> + +<p class="center"> +THE EVENING BEFORE THE MARCH. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a command learns that it is to make a march on the following +day, presumably starting early in the morning, certain details +should be attended to the evening before. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +All men should fill their canteens as there will probably be no +time for this in the morning. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The mess sergeant should find out whether lunch or the reserve +ration will be carried on the march and should attend to these +details in the evening in order that the issue can be made promptly +in the morning. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The commander of the guard should be given a memorandum as to +what time to awaken the cooks and where their tent is. The member +of the guard who does this should awaken them without noise so +as not to disturb the rest of the remainder of the command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cooks should be instructed as to what time breakfast is to +be served and what time to awaken the first sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cooks or cook's police must cut and split all firewood for +the morning before 9 p. m. There must be no chopping, talking, +or rattling of pans before reveille which will disturb the rest +of the command. This applies to every morning in camp. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE MORNING OF THE MARCH. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Cooks arise when called by the guard and start the preparation of +breakfast without noise. The first sergeant is usually awakened +by one of the cooks about half an hour before reveille in order +that he may complete his toilet and breakfast early and be able +to devote all his time to supervising the details of the morning's +work. If the officers desire to be awakened before reveille they +will notify the first sergeant accordingly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets, strike +their shelter tents (unless it has been directed to await the +sounding of the general for this), and make up their packs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille each man +must be in his proper place in ranks. This assembly is under +arms. The first sergeant starts to call the roll or commands +"Report" at the last note of assembly. Arms are stacked before +the company is dismissed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Breakfast is served to the company immediately after roll call. +Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his mess kit in +the hot water provided for that purpose at the kitchen and will +at once pack the mess kit in his haversack. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits at the +same time that breakfast is served. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Immediately after breakfast the company proceeds to the work +of breaking camp and packing in accordance with a prearranged +system similar to the following: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad assists the cooks in packing the kitchen. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad strikes and folds the officers' tents and brings them +to the kitchen. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad fills in the sink. The sink should not be filled in +earlier than is absolutely necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad polices the camp within the company police limits. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad is available for possible details from regimental +headquarters. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Officers and first sergeant supervise the work. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A permanent assignment of squads to these duties lightens the +labor and decreases the time necessary for breaking camp. After +the breaking of camp the entire company is used to police camp. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should drink all +the water they want immediately after breakfast. All canteens +should be filled before marching, one man in each squad being +detailed to fill the canteens for his squad. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At assembly for the march the men fall in in rear or the stacks +fully equipped for marching. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Marching.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The principal work of troops in the field consists of marching. +Battles take place only at indefinite intervals, but marches are +of daily occurrence. It is only by good marching that troops +can arrive at a given point at a given time and in good condition +for battle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The rate of march depends greatly upon the condition of the roads +and the weather, but the average rate for infantry is about 2-1/2 +miles per hour. This allows for a rest of 10 minutes each hour. +The total distance marched in a day depends not only on the rate +of march, but upon the size of the command, large commands often +covering only about 10 miles a day, while small commands easily +cover double that distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In order to make the march with the greatest comfort and the +least danger, it is necessary that each unit be kept well in +hand. Each man is permitted and encouraged to make himself as +comfortable as possible at all times, excepting only that he +must not interfere with the comfort of others or with the march +of the column. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Infantry generally marches in column of squads, but on narrow +roads or trails column of twos or files is used. The route step is +habitually used when silence is not required. In large commands, +in order that the column be kept in hand, it is very necessary that +each man keep his place in ranks and follow his file leader <b>at +the prescribed distance</b>. This is one of the best tests for +determining the discipline and efficiency of troops. The equipment +should be carefully adjusted before starting out, and any part that +is not comfortable should be rearranged at the first opportunity. +The rifle is carried at will, except that the muzzle must be +pointed up so as not to interfere with the other men. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Under no circumstances will any man leave the ranks without +permission from his company or higher commander. If the absence +is to be for more than a short while, he must be given a pass +showing his name, rank, and organization, and the reason he is +permitted to be absent. If sick, it is better to wait by the +roadside at some comfortable place for the arrival of the surgeon +or the ambulance. In any case, the soldier keeps his rifle and +equipment with him, if possible. Soldiers absent from their +organization without a pass will be arrested and returned to their +command for punishment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Marches in hot weather are particularly trying. Green leaves or +a damp cloth carried in the hat lessens the chance of sunstroke. +The hat should have ventilators, and when not exposed to the +direct rays of the sun it should be removed from the head. It +is well to keep the clothing about the neck and throat open, +and sometimes to turn up the shirt sleeves so as to leave the +wrists free. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The canteen should always be filled before starting out. Use +the water very sparingly. None at all should be drunk during +the first three or four hours of the march. After that take only +a few mouthfuls at a time and wash out the mouth and throat. +Except possibly in very hot weather, one canteen of water should +last for the entire day's march. Excessive water drinking on +the march will play a man out very quickly. Old soldiers never +drink when marching. A small pebble carried in the mouth keeps it +moist and therefore reduces thirst. Or a small piece of chocolate +may occasionally be eaten. Smoking is very depressing during a +march. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Canteens will not be refilled on the march without authority +from an officer, as the clearest water, whether from a well, +spring, or running stream, may be very impure and the source of +many camp diseases. If canteens are to be refilled, it should be +done by order, and a detail is generally made for this purpose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Entering upon private property without permission, or stealing +fruit, etc., from gardens and orchards, is a serious military +offense, as well as a violation of the civil laws. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When a cooked meal is carried, it should not be eaten until the +proper time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A command ordinarily marches for 50 minutes and halts for 10 +minutes. The first halt in a day's march is for about 15 minutes, +is made after about 30 minutes' marching, and is for the express +purpose of allowing the men to relieve themselves. Men who wish +to do this should attend to it at once and not wait until the +command is almost ready to march again. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At every halt get all the rest possible and don't spend the time +wandering around or standing about. Only green recruits do this. +If the ground is dry, stretch out at full length, removing the +pack or blanket roll and belt, and get in as comfortable position +as possible. The next best way is to sit down with a good back +rest against a tree or a fence or some other object. Never sit +down or lie down, however, on wet or damp ground. Sit on your +pack or blanket roll, or on anything else that is dry. At a halt +it is very refreshing to adjust the underclothing. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Making Camp.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +On reaching the camp site the men should be allowed to fall out +and rest as soon as the arms have been stacked and the shelter +tents pitched. If the blanket rolls have been carried on the +wagons, then the location of the front poles of the shelter tents +should be marked before they are allowed to fall out. The men +will not be allowed to relieve themselves until sinks are dug. +Temporary sinks may be dug with intrenching tools, if carried. +A guard should be placed over the water supply at once. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as the shelter tents are pitched the company proceeds +to the remainder of the camp work in accordance with a permanent +assignment similar to the following: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad helps arrange the kitchen. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad pitches the officers' tents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad digs the sink. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad procures wood and water. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One squad is held available for details from regimental headquarters. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officers and first sergeant supervise the work. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The sinks are located by the commanding officer. The detail to +dig them should wait until informed of the location. An officer +should inspect the sink as soon as the detail reports it as +completed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After the camp has been put in order the first sergeant makes +the details from roster for kitchen police and noncommissioned +officer in charge of quarters for the next day and for such guard +as may be ordered for that day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The details called for by regimental headquarters for pitching +the headquarters camp for the quartermaster, etc., should be +reported to the adjutant without delay. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The cooks pitch their tent at that end of the company street +nearest the kitchen. Space must be left for this tent if the +cooks are not in ranks when the company pitches tents. Unless +lunch has been carried or cooked during the march, the cooks +should get to work on a hot meal as soon as possible. The kitchen +police report at the kitchen as soon as their tent is pitched. +Wood and water will be required at once. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Officers should avoid keeping the men unnecessarily under +arms or on their feet after a hard day's march.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the details of making camp have been completed, all men +should at once care for their <b>rifles</b> and <b>feet</b>. +(For details as to the care of the rifle see Chapter II +Section 1, for the care of the feet see Chapter IV.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Camp Service and Duties.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +In camp "Reveille" is preceded by "First call," and a march played +by the band or field music, and is followed immediately by +"Assembly." If there is a reveille gun, it is fired at the first +note of the march and is the signal for all to arise. The roll +is called at the last notes of assembly after reveille. At this +formation men should fall in in the proper uniform--rifle and +belt, service hat, olive-drab flannel shirt, service breeches, +leggings, and shoes. The regimental commander may prescribe that +coats are to be worn and will prescribe the exact uniform for +all drills, parades, and other formations, as well as for men +going on pass. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Immediately after reveille roll call the sergeant next in rank +to the first sergeant takes command of the company and deploys +it for a general police of the camp within the limits assigned +to the company. Men pick up all scraps of paper and rubbish of +all kinds, depositing it in the company incinerator or place +designated for the purpose. The police limits of each company +are usually designated as extending from head to rear of camp +within the space occupied by the company street, including the +ground occupied by the tents of the company, no unassigned space +being left between companies. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Immediately after breakfast men police their tents and raise +walls of same. If the day is fair, all bedding should be spread +on the tents for several hours' airing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At sick call all men who are sick fall in and are marched to +the regimental infirmary, under charge of the noncommissioned +officer in charge of quarters. The noncommissioned officer takes +with him the company sick report previously filled in and signed +by the company commander. The surgeon examines all those reporting +and indicates their status on the sick report. This status may be +"Duty" (available for all duty), "Quarters" (patient to remain +in tent or company street), and "Hospital" (patient to be sent +to the hospital). The noncommissioned officer then returns to +the company with all the men not marked "Hospital" and hands +the sick report to the first sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At "Drill call" the company prepares for drill and falls in so +that it will be completely formed at assembly, which is usually +sounded 10 minutes after drill call. All men are required to attend +drill except those excused by sick report and those specially +excused from headquarters. The excused list should include in each +company only the mess sergeant, the two cooks, one kitchen police, +and men on regimental guard. During drill hours the guard to be +excused should be limited to a small patrol to guard against +fire and thieves in camp. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the bedding has been aired, it should be taken in immediately +after drill and placed in the tents neatly folded. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Some time during the morning, at a time designated by him, the +company commander inspects the entire company camp. At this +inspection the entire street should be policed, kitchen in order, +and tents policed, as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In permanent camp, when pyramidal, conical, or wall tents are +used: Bedding folded neatly and placed on the head of the cot. +(If bed sacks are used, they will be folded in three folds and +the bedding placed on top.) Hats on top of the bedding. Shoes +under foot of cot. Surplus kit bag at side of squad leader's +cot. Equipment suspended neatly from a frame arranged around +the tent pole. Rifles in rack constructed around the tent pole. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In shelter-tent camp: Bedding neatly folded and placed at rear +of tent, ponchos underneath. Equipment arranged on the bedding. +Rifles laid on bedding except when used as tent poles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The regimental commander prescribes the exact scheme to be followed +in the police of tents. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should there be no parade, retreat roll call is held at the same +hour. This roll call is under arms and is supervised by an officer +of the company. After the roll call and at the sounding of "Retreat," +the officer brings the company to parade rest and keeps it in +this position during the sounding of this call. At the first +note of the National Anthem ("The Star-Spangled Banner") or "To +the Color" the company is brought to attention and so stands +until the end of the playing. The officer then reports the result +of the roll call to the adjutant or officer of the day, returns +to the company, inspects the arms, and dismisses it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the sounding of "Call to quarters" all men will repair to their +company street. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After taps has sounded all talking must cease and all lights must +be extinguished, and so remain until first call for reveille. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In camp all enlisted men are prohibited from crossing the officers' +street, or from visiting officers' tents unless actually engaged +in some duty requiring them to do so, or sent for by an officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Men are not allowed to leave camp without a pass signed by the +company commander and countersigned by the regimental adjutant. +The first sergeant is sometimes allowed to give men permission +to leave camp from retreat to taps. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, detailed for +24 hours goes on duty each day at reveille. He is responsible +that the grounds around the company are kept in proper police; +that no loud noise, disturbance, or disorder occurs in the company +street; that men confined to the company street do not leave +the same without proper authority. He reports men who are sick +to the surgeon. He may be required to report all other details +called for. He accompanies the captain in his daily inspection +of the company. He will not leave the company street during his +tour of duty except as provided above. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One or two privates are detailed daily as kitchen police. They +go on duty at reveille. It is their duty to assist the cooks in +the kitchen. They assist in the preparation of meals, wait on +the table, wash dishes, procure water and wood, chop firewood, +and keep the kitchen, mess tent, and surrounding ground policed. +They are under the orders of the mess sergeant and the cooks. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Rifles need careful attention in camp. They should be cleaned +and oiled daily, preferably just before retreat or parade. It +is advisable for each man to have a canvas cover to keep off +the dust and dampness. In a shelter-tent camp tie the rifle, +muzzle up, to the pole of the tent, placing a chip of wood under +the butt plate and an oily rag over (never inside) the muzzle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Wet shoes should be filled with oats or dry sand, and set in a +cool place to dry. Never dry them by a fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Uniforms need special care, as camp service is very hard on them. +In a permanent camp every man should have two pair of breeches. +The coat will seldom be worn except at parade or retreat. One +pair of breeches and the coat should be kept neat, clean, and +pressed for use on ceremonies, inspections, and when going on +pass. Woolen uniforms may be cleaned and freed from spots by +rubbing with a flannel rag saturated with gasoline. Cotton uniforms +may be washed with water, soap, and a scrubbing brush, wrung +out, and stretched, properly creased, on a flat wood surface in +the sun to dry. Leggings can be similarly washed. Hats should +be cleaned with gasoline, and dampened and ironed to restore +their shape. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Enlisted men should be very careful to observe all the sanitary +regulations of the camp. Flies are the greatest spreaders of camp +disease. All fecal matter and food should be carefully guarded from +them. In camps extreme precautions are taken to screen the sinks +and kitchens from flies, and all enlisted men should cooperate in +the effort to make these precautions successful. One fly carrying +germs on his feet from the sinks to the food can start a serious +and fatal epidemic in a camp. Defecating on the ground in the +vicinity of camp or urinating in camp are extremely dangerous +to the health of the command, and are serious military offenses. +At night a urinal can is provided in each company street. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In a permanent camp cots or bed sacks are usually provided for +the men to sleep on. In a shelter tent camp beds should be made +of hay, grass, leaves, pine or spruce boughs, or pine needles, +on top of which the poncho and blanket are spread, thus softening +the ground and keeping the sleeper away from the cold and dampness. +Neglect to prepare the bed when sleeping without cot or bed sack +means a loss of sleep, and may lead to colds, bowel disorders, +and rheumatism. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In wet weather tents should be ditched, and in windy or cold +weather dirt may be banked around them. A place for washing the +person and clothes should be arranged for in each company street, +and the waste water disposed of by means of drainage or rock-filled +pits. In dry weather the streets in camp should frequently be +sprinkled with water to keep down the dust. This is specially +necessary around the kitchen. +</p> + +<h2><a name="VIII">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +TARGET PRACTICE. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Preliminary training in markmanship.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Effective rifle fire is generally what counts most in battle. +To have effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must +be able to HIT what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no +man who can not be taught how to shoot. It is not necessary or +even desirable to begin instruction by firing on a rifle range. +A perfectly green recruit who has never fired a rifle may be made +into a good shot by a little instruction and some preliminary +drills and exercises. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Before a man goes on the range to fire it is absolutely necessary +that he should know-- +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. How to set the rear sight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. How to sight or aim. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. How to squeeze the trigger. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. How to hold the rifle in all positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If he does not know these things it is worse than useless for +him to fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse +he will shoot, and it will become more difficult to teach him. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Sight Adjustment.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Men must be able to adjust their sights correctly and quickly. +An error in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it +on the sight leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at +500 yards and over. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Notice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the <b>battle +sight</b> appears on top. This sight is set for 547 yards and is +not adjustable. When the leaf is raised four sights come into +view. The extreme range sight for 2,850 yards at the top of the +leaf is seldom used. The open sight at the upper edge of the +drift slide is adjustable from 1,400 to 2,750 yards. To set it +the upper edge of the slide is made to correspond with the range +reading on the leaf, and the slide is then clamped with the slide +screw. This sight also is seldom used. The open sight at the +bottom of the triangular opening in the drift slide is adjustable +from 100 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index line at the lower +corners of the triangle is set opposite the range graduation on +the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peep sight just +below it are the sights most commonly used. To set the peep sight, +the index lines on either side of the peephole are set opposite +the range desired and the slide clamped. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Notice the scales for the various ranges on either side of the +face of the leaf. The odd-numbered hundreds of yards are on the +right and the even on the left. <b>The line below the number is +the index line for that range.</b> Thus to set the sight for 500 +yards the index line of the slide is brought in exact line with +the line on the leaf below the figure 5 and the slide clamped. +To set for 550 yards the index lines of the slide are set half +way between the index lines on the leaf below the figure 5 on +the right side and the figure 6 on the left side. Look at your +sight carefully when setting it and take great pains to get it +exact. An error in setting the width of one of the lines on the +leaf will cause an error of about 8 inches in where your bullet +will strike at 500 yards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The <b>wind guage</b> is adjusted by means of the windage screw at +the right front end of the base of the sight. Each graduation on +the wind-gauge scale is called a "point." For convenience in +adjusting the line of each third point on the scale is longer +than the others. If you turn the windage screw so that the movable +base moves to the right, you are taking right windage, which +will cause your rifle to shoot more to the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It is seldom that a rifle will shoot correctly to the point aimed +at at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly to the scale +graduations for that range. If your sight is not correctly adjusted +for your shooting and you wish to move it slightly to make it +correct, remember to <b>move it in the direction you wish your shot +to hit</b>. If you wish to shoot higher raise your sight. If to the +right, move the wind gauge to the right. Always move your sight +the correct amount in accordance with the following table: +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Table of sight corrections.</h3> + +<p class="center"> +<i>Showing to what extent the point of impact is moved by a change +of 25 yards in elevation or 1 point in windage.</i> +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=1 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=6> +<tr><th>Range.</th> + <th>Correction<br>by a change + <br>in elevation<br>of 25 yards.</th> + <th>Correction <br>by a change + <br>in windage<br>of 1 point.</th></tr> +<tr><td class="center"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td class="center"><i>Yards.</i></td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">100</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">200</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">300</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">400</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">500</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">600</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">800</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">1,000</td></tr> + </table></td> + <td class="center"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td class="center"><i>Inches.</i></td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">0.72</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">1.62</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">2.79</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">4.29</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">6.22</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">8.59</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">15.43</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">25.08</td></tr> + </table></td> + <td class="center"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td class="center"><i>Inches.</i></td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">4</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">8</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">12</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">16</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">20</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">24</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">32</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">40</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +An easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A change +of 1 point of wind changes the point of impact 4 inches for every +100 yards of range." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Copy this table and take it to the range with you. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Example of sight adjustment: Suppose you are firing at 500 yards. +The first two or three shots show you that your shots are hitting +about a foot below and a foot to the right of the center of the +bull's-eye. From the above table you will see that if you will +raise your sight 50 yards and move the wind gauge half a point to +the left the rifle will be sighted so that if you aim correctly +the bullets will hit well inside the bull's eye. +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Aiming.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Open sight:</b> Always align your sights with the front sight +squarely in the middle of the "U" or notch of the rear sight, and +the top of the front sight even with the upper corners of the "U." +(See fig. 1.) All the sights on the rifle except the peep sight +are open sights. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Peep sight:</b> Always center the tip of the front sight in the +center of the peephole when aiming with this sight. (See fig. 2.) +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="491"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig017.jpg" width="487" height="281" alt="Fig. 17"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"><span class="image"><b>Figure + 1.</b></span></td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +Always aim below the bull's-eye. Never let your front sight appear +to touch the bull's-eye in aiming. Try to see the same amount of +white target between the top of the front sight and the bottom +of the bull's-eye each time. The eye must be focused on the +bull's-eye or mark and not on the front or rear sight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Look at figures 1 and 2 until your eye retains the memory of +them, then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim. Aim +consistently, always the same. Never change your aim; change +your sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in the right +place. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Battle sight.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf is laid +flat. It is adjusted for a range of 547 yards. It is intended +to be used in battle, when you get nearer to the enemy than 600 +yards. Always aim at the belt of a standing enemy, or just below +him if he is kneeling, sitting, or lying. On the target range +this sight is used for rapid fire. With it the rifle shoots about +2 feet high at ranges between 200 and 400 yards, so you must aim + +<table summary="" border=0 width="336" class="right"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig018.jpg" width="332" height="335" alt="Fig. 18"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"><span class="image"><b>Figure + 2.</b></span></td></tr> +</table> + +<p> +below the figure on the target "D." Find out in four instruction +practice just how much you must aim below to hit the figure. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. Trigger squeeze.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Use the first joint of the fore finger to squeeze the trigger. +It is the most sensitive and best controlled portion of the body. +As you place the rifle to your shoulder squeeze the trigger so +as to pull it back about one-eighth of an inch, thus taking up +the safety portion, or slack, of the pull. Then contract the +trigger finger gradually, slowly and steadily increasing the +pressure on the trigger while the aim is being perfected. Continue +the gradual increase of pressure so that when the aim has become +exact the additional pressure required to release the point of +the sear can be given almost insensibly and without causing any +deflection of the rifle. Put absolutely all your mind and will +power into holding the rifle steady and squeezing the trigger +off without disturbing the aim. Practice squeezing the trigger +in this way every time you have your rifle in your hand until +you can surely and quickly do it without a suspicion of a jerk. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger squeeze +of his rifle, and knowing this, he is able to judge at any time, +within limits, what additional pressure is required for its +discharge. By constant repetition of this exercise he should be +able finally to squeeze the trigger to a certain point beyond +which the slightest movement will release the sear. Having squeezed +the trigger to this point, the aim is corrected, and, when true, +the additional pressure is applied and the discharge follows +and the bullet flies true to the mark. +</p> + +<h3>Section 7. Firing positions.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +When in ranks at close order the positions are those described +in the Infantry Drill Regulations. When in extended order, or +when firing alone, these positions may be modified somewhat to +better suit the individual. The following remarks on the various +positions are offered as suggestions whereby steady positions +may be learned by the soldier. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Standing position:</b> Face the target, then execute right half +face. Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you raise the ride +to the shoulder lean very slightly backward just enough to preserve +the perfect balance on both feet which the raising of the rifle +has somewhat disturbed. Do not lean far back, and do not lean +forward at all. If your body is out of balance it will be under +strain and you will tremble. The right elbow should be at about +the height of the shoulder. The left hand should grasp well around +the stock and handguard in front of the rear sight, and the left +elbow should be almost directly under the rifle. The right hand +should do more than half the work of holding the rifle up and +against the shoulder, the left hand only steadying and guiding +the piece. Do not try to meet the recoil; let the whole body +move back with it. Do not be afraid to press the jaw hard against +the stock; this steadies the position, and the head goes back +with the recoil and insures that your face is not hurt. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Kneeling position:</b> Assume the position very much as +described in the Infantry Drill Regulations. Sit on the right +heel. The right knee should point directly to the right, that is, +along the firing line. The point of the left elbow should rest +over the left knee. There is a flat place under the elbow which +fits a flat place on the knee and makes a solid rest. Lean the +body well forward. This position is uncomfortable until +practiced, when it quickly ceases to be uncomfortable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Sitting position:</b> Sit down half faced to the right, feet +from 6 to 8 inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher +than the left, left leg pointed toward the target. Rest both +elbows on the knees, hands grasping the piece the same as in the +prone position. This is a very steady position, particularly if +holes can be found or made in the ground for the heels. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Prone position and use of the gun sling:</b> To adjust the +sling for firing, unhook the straight strap of the sling and +let it out as far as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when +stretched along the bottom of the stock its rear end (bight) +comes about opposite the comb of the stock. A small man needs a +longer loop than a tall man. Lie down facing at an angle of about +60° to the right of the direction of the target. Spread the +legs as wide apart as they will go with comfort. Thrust the left +arm through between the rifle and the sling, and then back through +the loop of the sling, securing the loop, by means of the keeper, +around the upper left arm as high up as it will go. Pass the +hand under and then over the sling from the left side, and grasp +the stock and handguard just in rear of the lower band. Raise +the right elbow off the ground, rolling slightly over on the +left side. Place the butt to the shoulder and roll back into +position, clamping the rifle hard and steady in the firing position. +The rifle should rest deep down in the palm of the left hand +with fingers almost around the handguard. Shift the left palm +a little to the right or left until the rifle stands perfectly +upright (no cant) without effort. The left elbow should rest +on the ground directly under the rifle, and right elbow on the +ground about 5 inches to the right of a point directly under +the stock. In this position the loop of the sling, starting at +the lower band, passes to the right of the left wrist, and thence +around the left upper arm. The loop should be so tight that about +50 pounds tension is placed on it when the position is assumed. +This position is uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly +ceases to be uncomfortable. It will be steadier if small holes +can be found or dug in the ground for the elbows. In this position +the sling binds the left forearm to the rifle and to the ground +so that it forms a dead rest for the rifle, with a universal +joint, the wrist, at its upper end. Also the rifle is so bound +to the shoulder that the recoil is not felt at all. This is the +steadiest of all firing positions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The gun sling can also be used in this manner with advantage in +the other positions. +</p> + +<h3>Section 8. Calling the shot.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted at each range +that the rifle will hit where you aim. In order to determine +that the sights are so adjusted it is necessary that you shall +know each time just where you were aiming on the target at the +instant your rifle was discharged. If you know this and your +rifle hits this point your rifle is correctly sighted. If your +shot does not hit near this point, you should change your sight +adjustment in accordance with the table of sight corrections +in section 3. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle trembles slightly, +and the sights seem to wobble and move over the target. You try +to squeeze off the last ounce of the trigger squeeze just as +the sights move to the desired alignment under the bull's-eye. +At this instant, just before the recoil blots out a view of the +sights and target, you should catch with your eye a picture, as +it were, of just where on the target your sights were aligned, and +call to yourself or to the coach this point. This point is where +your shot should strike if your sights are correctly adjusted, +and if you have squeezed the trigger without disturbing your +aim. Until a man can call his shots he is not a good shot, for +he can never tell if his rifle is sighted right or not, or if +a certain shot is a good one or only the result of luck. +</p> + +<h3>Section 9. Coordination.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly the details +of-- +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0> +<tr><td class="left">Holding the rifle in the various + positions.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Aiming.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Squeezing the trigger.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Calling the shot.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Adjusting the sights.</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +And, when these have been mastered in detail, then the coordination +of them in the act of firing. This coordination consists in putting +absolutely all of one's will power into an effort to hold the +rifle steadily, especially in getting it to steady down when +the aim is perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off easily +at the instant the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected; in +calling the shot at this instant; and, if the shot does not hit +near the point called, then in adjusting the sights the correct +amount so that the rifle will be sighted to hit where you aim. +</p> + +<h3>Section 10. Advice to riflemen.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Before going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing +every trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done with +a rag saturated with gasoline. Put a light coat of oil on the +bolt and cams. Blacken the front and rear sights with smoke from +a burning candle or camphor or with liquid sight black. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Look through the bore and see that there is no obstruction in +it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb dampness, +the sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Watch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the line +of sight is at discharge. It is only in this way that the habit +of calling shots, which is essential to good shooting, can be +acquired. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Study the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before +going to the firing point. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Look at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it +has not changed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If sure of your hold and if the hit is not as called, determine +and make FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the +next shot in the bull's-eye. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Keep a written record of the weather conditions and the corresponding +elevation and windage for each day's firing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Less elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet +days; in a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a +cold barrel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +More elevation will generally be required on cold days; on very +dry days; with a 12 o'clock wind; with a hot barrel; in a dull +or cloudy light. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the barrel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready to fire. +Do not place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot and shoot +high. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Do not rub the eyes--especially the sighting eye. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In cold weather warm the trigger hand before shooting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oil it to prevent +rust. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam, properly +cut to size, for use in cleaning. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass cleaning +rod when available. An injury to the rifling at the muzzle causes +the piece to shoot very irregularly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will cause a +marked improvement in shooting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Frequent practice of the "Position and aiming drills" is of the +greatest help in preparing for shooting on the range. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Rapid firing:</b> Success is rapid firing depends upon catching +a quick and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly, +and in squeezing the trigger without a jerk. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, +the soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, +and working the bolt, so that no time will be lost in these +operations. With constant practice all these movements may be +made quickly and without false motions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with enough force +to start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled +back, it must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell +well away from the chamber and far enough to engage the next +cartridge. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one motion. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, must be held +and the trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding, +aim, and squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with +all the precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in +getting ready to fire, loading, and working the bolt. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Firing with rests:</b> In order that the shooting may be uniform +the piece should always be rested at the same point. +</p> + +<h3>Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The course in small-arms firing consists of-- +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) Nomenclature and care of rifle. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Sighting drills. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) Position and aiming drills. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) Deflection and elevation correction drills. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) Gallery practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) Estimating distance drill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>g</i>) Individual known-distance firing, instruction practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>h</i>) Individual known-distance firing, record practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>i</i>) Long-distance practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>j</i>) Practice with telescopic sights. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>k</i>) Instruction combat practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>l</i>) Combat practice. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>m</i>) Proficiency test. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The regulations governing these are found in Small Arms Firing +Manual, 1913. There should be several copies of this manual in +every company. +</p> + +<h3>Section 12. Targets.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The accompanying plates show the details and size of the targets: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="550"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig019.jpg" width="533" height="682" alt="Fig. 19"> +</td></tr><tr><td> +<img src="fig020.jpg" width="546" height="567" alt="Fig. 20"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<h3>Section 13. Pistol and Revolver Practice.[8]</h3> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 8: Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol" +appears the regulation applies with equal force to the revolver, +if applicable to that weapon.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>135.[9] Nomenclature and care of the weapon; handling and +precautions against accidents.</b>--The soldier will first be +taught the nomenclature of those parts of the weapon necessary to +an understanding of its action and use and the proper measures for +its care and preservation. Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description +of the Colt's automatic pistol), 1919, and 1927 (description of the +Colt's revolver, calibers .38 and .45, respectively) contain full +information on this subject, and are furnished to organizations +armed with these weapons. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 9: The number refer to paragraphs in the Small Arms +Firing Manual, 1918.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many +accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The following +rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) On taking the <b>pistol</b> from the armrack or holster, +take out the magazine and see that it is empty before replacing +it; then draw back the slide and make sure that the piece is +unloaded. Observe the same precaution after practice on the target +range, and again before replacing the pistol in the holster or +in the armrack. When taking the <b>revolver</b> from the armrack +or holster and before returning it to the same, open the cylinder +and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before beginning a drill +and upon arriving on the range observe the same precaution. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Neither load nor cock the weapon until the moment of +firing, nor until a run in the mounted course is started. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position +of "Raise pistol" (par. 146, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916), +except when it is pointed at the target. (The position of "Lower +pistol" is authorized for mounted firing only.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or +earth can enter the bore or mechanism. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) Before loading the <b>pistol</b>, draw back the slide +and look through the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. +Before loading the <b>revolver</b>, open the cylinder and look +through the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. When +loading[10] the pistol for target practice place five cartridges +in the magazine and insert the magazine in the handle; draw back +the slide and insert the first cartridge in the chamber and +carefully lower[11] the hammer fully down. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 10: <b>TO LOAD PISTOL: Being at raise pistol</b> (right +hand grasping stock at the height of and 6 inches in front of the +point of the right shoulder, forefinger alongside barrel, barrel +to the rear and inclined forward about 30°). +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +Without deranging position of the hand, rotate the pistol so +the sights move to the left, the barrel pointing to the right +front and up. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +With the thumb and forefinger of the <b>left</b> hand (thumb to +the right) grasp the slide and pull it toward the body until it +stops, and then release it. The pistol is thus loaded, and the +hammer at full cock. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +If the pistol is to be kept in the hand and not to be fired at +once, engage the safety lock with the thumb of the <b>right</b> +hand. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +If the pistol is to be carried in the holster, remove safety lock, +if on, and lower the hammer fully down.] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 11: <b>TO LOWER THE HAMMER: Being at the loading +position</b> at full cock. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +I. Firmly seat thumb of <b>right</b> hand on the hammer: insert +forefinger inside trigger guard. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +II. With thumb of <b>left</b> hand exert a momentary pressure on the +grip-safety to release hammer from sear. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +III. At the same instant exert pressure or the trigger and carefully +and slowly lower the hammer fully down. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +IV. Remove finger from trigger. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +V. Insert pistol in holster. +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +CAUTION.--The pistol must <b>never</b> be placed in the holster +until hammer is <b>fully down</b>.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In loading the <b>revolver</b> place five cartridges in the cylinder +and let the hammer down on the <b>empty chamber</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) Whenever the pistol is being <b>loaded</b> or +<b>unloaded</b>, the muzzle must be kept up. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>g</i>) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an +accidental discharge might do harm. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>h</i>) After loading do not cock the pistol or the revolver +until ready to fire. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>i</i>) Keep the working parts properly lubricated. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>136. Position, dismounted.</b>--Stand firmly on both feet, body +perfectly balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most +comfortable when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet +far enough apart to insure firmness and steadiness or position +(about 8 to 10 inches); weight of body borne equally upon both feet; +right arm fully extended, left arm hanging naturally. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +REMARKS.--The right arm may be slightly bent, although the difficulty +of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping it as well as the +forearm in the same vertical plane makes this objectionable. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>137. The grip</b>.--Grasp the stock as high as possible with the +thumb and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger +guard, the thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and +forearm should be as nearly in one line as possible when the +weapon is pointed toward the target. The grasp should not be so +tight as to cause tremors of the hand or arm to be communicated +to the weapon, but should be firm enough to avoid losing the grip +when the recoil takes place. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +REMARKS.--The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted +in a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the +stock is grasped the greater will be the movement or "jump" of +the muzzle caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe +strain upon the wrist, but in loss of accuracy. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the +stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon +toward the opposite side. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, +generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock +overcomes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged +to practice this method of holding until it becomes natural. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the +same grip for each shot. Not only must the hand grasp the stock +at the same point for each shot, but the tension of the grip +must be uniform. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>138.</b> (<i>a</i>) <b>The trigger squeeze.</b>--The trigger must +be squeezed in the same manner as in rifle dring. (See Chapter VIII, +section 6.) The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger should be +steadily increased and should be straight back, not sideways. The +pressure should continue to that point beyond which the slightest +movement will release the sear. Then, when the aim is true, the +additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the +trigger squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the +most important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) <b>Self-cocking action.</b>--The force required to +squeeze the trigger of the revolver when the self-cocking device +is used is considerably greater than with the single action. To +accustom a soldier to the use of the self-cocking mechanism, and +also to strengthen and develop the muscles of the hand, a few +minutes practice daily in holding the unloaded revolver on a +mark and snapping it, using the self-cocking mechanism, is +recommended. The use of the self-cocking device in firing is not +recommended except in emergency. By practice in cocking the +revolver the soldier can become sufficiently expert to fire very +rapidly, using single action, while his accuracy will be greater +than when using double action. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>139. Aiming.</b>--Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, +the rear and front sights of the pistol are used in the same +manner as the rifle sights. The normal sight is habitually used +(see Pl. VI), and the line of sight is directed upon a point just +under the bull's-eye at "6 o'clock." The front sight must be +seen through the middle of the rear-sight notch, the top being +on a line with the top of the notch. Care must be taken not to +cant the pistol to either side.[12] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 12: The instructor should take cognizance of the fact +that the proper aiming point is often affected by the personal +and fixed peculiarities of the firer, and if unable to correct +such abnormalities, permit firer to direct sight at such point +as promises effective results.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's +instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for +the rifle so far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar +with open sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to +demonstrate errors likely to be committed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see Pl. VI) take +a piece of wood about 10 inches long, 1-1/4 inches wide, and +9/16 inch thick. Shape one end so that it will fit snugly in +the handle of the pistol when the magazine has been removed. +Screw or nail this stick to the top of a post or other object +at such an angle that the pistol when placed on the stick will +be approximately horizontal. A suitable sighting rest for the +revolver may be easily improvised. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="539"> +<tr><td> +<img src="fig021.jpg" width="535" height="636" alt="Fig. 21"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>140.</b> (<i>a</i>) <b>How to cock the pistol.</b>--The pistol +should be cocked by the thumb of the right hand and with the least +possible derangement of the grip. The forefinger should be clear +of the trigger when cocking the pistol. Some men have difficulty +at first in cocking the pistol with the right thumb. This can be +overcome by a little practice. Jerking the pistol forward while +holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) <b>How to cock the revolver.</b>--The revolver should +be cocked by putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right +angle to the hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb +muscles alone bringing the hammer back to the position of full +cock. Some men with large hands are able to cock the revolver +with the thumb while holding it in the position of aim or raise +pistol. Where the soldier's hand is small this can not be done, +and in this case it assists the operation to give the revolver +a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the right). Particular +care should be taken that the forefinger is clear of the trigger +or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver forward +while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>141. Position and aiming drills, dismounted.</b>--For this +instruction the squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace +between files. Black pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be +pasted opposite each man on the barrack or other wall, from +which the squad is 10 paces distant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives +the command: 1. <i>Raise</i>, 2. <i>Pistol</i> (par. 156, Cavalry +Drill Regulations), and cautions, "Position and aiming drill, +dismounted." The men take the positions described in paragraph +136, except that the pistol is held at "Raise pistol." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise." At the command +<b>READY</b>, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At the +command, 1. <i>Squad</i>, 2. <b>FIRE</b>, slowly extend the arm till +it is nearly horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 +inches below the bull's-eye. At the same time put the forefinger +inside the trigger guard and gradually "feel" the trigger. Inhale +enough air to comfortably fill the lungs and gradually raise +the piece until the line of sight is directed at the point of +aim, i. e., just below the bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the +sights are directed upon the mark, gradually increase the pressure +on the trigger until it reaches that point where the slightest +additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when the aim +is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece is +given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights. +The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the +hammer falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, +the squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the +line of sight is directed on the point of aim a slight additional +pressure is applied to the trigger until the piece is finally +discharged at one of the moments when the sights are correctly +aligned upon the mark. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position, +the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor +prefaces the preparatory command by "At will" and gives the command +<b>HALT</b> at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will +return to the position of "Raise pistol." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but +gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly +and to lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing +it to the point where the slightest additional pressure will +release the sear. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +REMARKS.--In service few opportunities will be offered for slow +aimed fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be +made of the weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing +and rapid manipulation are of vital importance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed +upon the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing +pressure on the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights +as nearly on the mark as possible before the hammer again falls. +The great difficulty in quick firing with the pistol lies in +the fact that when the front sight is brought upon the mark, +the rear sight is often found to be outside the line joining the +eye with the mark. This tendency to hold the pistol obliquely +can be overcome only by a uniform manner of holding and pointing. +This uniformity is to be attained only by acquiring a grip which +can be taken with certainty each time the weapon is fired. It +is this circumstance which makes the position and aiming drills +so important. The soldier should constantly practice pointing +the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on the +mark in the briefest interval of time and practically without +the aid of sights. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the +left hand, the left side being turned toward the target. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>142. To draw and fire quickly--Snap shooting.</b>--With the +squad formed as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol +is in the holster and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor +cautions "Quick-fire exercise." And gives the command, 1. +<i>SQUAD</i>; 2. Fire. At this command each soldier, keeping his eye +on the target, quickly draws his pistol, cocks it as in paragraph +140, thrusts it toward the target, squeezes the trigger, and at the +instant the weapon is brought in line with the eye and the objective +increases the pressure, releasing the sear. To enable the soldier +to note errors in pointing, the weapon will be momentarily held +in position after the fall of the hammer. Efforts at deliberate +aiming in this exercise must be discouraged. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Remarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to +this type of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in +the details of this exercise, it should be repeated at will; +the instructor cautions, "At will; quick fire exercise." The +exercise should be practiced until the mind, the eye, and trigger +finger act in unison. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places +the squad so that the simulated bull's-eyes are in turn, to the +<b>RIGHT</b>, to the <b>LEFT</b>, to the <b>RIGHT FRONT</b>, to +the <b>LEFT FRONT</b>, to the <b>RIGHT REAR</b>. With the squad in +one of these positions, the instructor cautions, "Position and +aiming drill, mounted." At this caution the right foot is carried +20 inches to the right and the left hand to the position of the +bridle hand (par. 246, Cavalry Drill Regulations). The exercise is +carried out as described for the exercise dismounted, using the +commands and means laid down in paragraphs 161 to 168, inclusive, +Cavalry Drill Regulations, for firing in the several directions. +The exercise is to be executed at will when the squad has been +sufficiently well instructed in detail. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite +the left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45° to the +left; when firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about +45° to the right. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol +in the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left +hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Revolver or pistol range practice.</b>--The courses in range +practice are given in paragraphs 147 to 199, Small Arms Firing +Manual, 1913. +</p> + +<h2><a name="IX">CHAPTER IX.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1914. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<p class="center"> +[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.] +</p> + +<h3>Section 1. Introduction.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>1.</b> Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards, +interior guards, military police, and provost guards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>2.</b> Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong +to the domain of tactics and are treated of in the Field Service +Regulations and in the drill regulations of the different arms +of the service, +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay +attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main +body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, +and flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>3.</b> Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve +order, protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time +of war such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary +are placed close in or about a camp, and normally there is an +exterior guard further out consisting of outposts. In time of +peace the interior guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>4.</b> Military police differ somewhat from either of these +classes. (See Field Service Regulations.) They are used in time of +war to guard prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to +maintain order and enforce police regulations in the rear of +armies, along lines of communication, and in the vicinity of large +camps. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>5.</b> Provost guards are used in the absence of military police, +generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near +large posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers +beyond the interior guard. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Classification of interior guards.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>6.</b> The various elements of an interior guard classified +according to their particular purpose and the manner in which they +perform their duties are as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) The main guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner +guards, herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc. +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Details and rosters.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>7.</b> At every military post, and in every regiment or separate +command in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly +mounted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as +the commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded +by the senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under +the supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed +by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>8.</b> The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in +discipline and training because of the direct individual +responsibility which is imposed and required to be discharged in a +definite and precise manner. While the desirability of this type +of duty is recognized, it should only be put in practice to an +extent sufficient to insure thorough instruction in this method of +performing guard duty and should not be the routine method of its +performance. The usual guard duty will be performed by watchmen, +patrols, or such method as, in the opinion of the commanding +officer, may best secure results under the particular local +conditions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>9.</b> At posts where there are less than three companies the +main guard and special guards may all be furnished by one company +or by details from each company. It is directed that whenever +possible such guards shall be furnished by a single company, for +the reason that if guard details are taken from each organization +at a post of two companies, troops, or batteries it will result +in both being so reduced as to seriously interfere with drill +and instruction, whereas if details are taken from only one, +the other is available for instruction at full strength. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, +if practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far +as practicable, the same organization will supply all details +for that day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In +this case the officer of the day and the officers of the guard, +if there are any, will, if practicable, be from the company +furnishing the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>10.</b> At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than +one regiment are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in +the field, if but one guard be necessary for the whole command, +the details will be made from the headquarters of the command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant +major, and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by +the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>11.</b> When a single organization furnishes the guard, a +roster of organizations will be kept by the sergeant major under +the supervision of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>12.</b> When the guard is detailed from several organizations, +rosters will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and +officers of the guard by name; by the sergeant major under the +supervision of the adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, +and privates of the guard by number per organization; and by first +sergeants, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates by +name. (See Appendix A.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>13.</b> When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable +and park guards, credit will be given each for the number of +enlisted men so furnished as though they had been detailed for +main guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>14.</b> Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will +be credited the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue +duty, carried on special duty, or credited as the commanding +officer may direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 247, and 300.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>15.</b> Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters +and see that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. +355-364, A. R., for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. +O., for instructions as to how rosters should be kept.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>16.</b> There will be an officer of the day with each guard, +unless in the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so +small that his services are not needed. In this case an officer +will be detailed to supervise the command and instruction of the +guard for such period as the commanding officer may direct. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>17.</b> When more than one guard is required for a command, a +field officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his +orders from the brigade or division commander, as the latter may +direct. When necessary captains may be placed on the roster for +field officer of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>18.</b> The detail of officers of the guard will be limited +to the necessities of the service and efficient instruction; +inexperienced officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers +of the guard for purposes of instruction. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>19.</b> Officers serving on staff departments are, in the +discretion of the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>20.</b> Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or +published the day preceding the beginning of the tour, and +officers notified personally by a written order at the same time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>21.</b> The strength of guards and the number of consecutive +days for which an organization furnishes the guard will be so +regulated as to insure privates of the main guard an interval of +not less than five days between tours. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty +men will be detailed for night guard duty, still performing their +daily duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the +adjutant showing the duty performed by them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>22.</b> The members of main guards and stable and park guards +will habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour +of enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than stable +or park guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these men +being held accountable for a strict performance of their duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>23.</b> Should the officer of the day be notified that men are +required to fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be +supplied from the organization to which the guard belongs. If +none are available in that organization, the adjutant will be +notified and will cause them to be supplied from the organization +that is next for guard. (Par. 68.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>24.</b> The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at +his office all data needed by company commanders in making details +from their companies. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At first sergeant's call, first sergeants will go to headquarters +and take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making +the details required from their companies; these details will +be made from their company rosters. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>25.</b> In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, +when practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company +bulletin board all details made from the company for duties to +be performed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>26.</b> Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, +all details will be made by roster. +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Commander of the guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>41.</b> The commander of the guard is responsible for the +instruction and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of +its members are correctly instructed in their orders and duties +and that they understand and properly perform them. He will visit +each relief at least once while it is on post, and at least one +of these visits will be made between 12 o'clock midnight and +daylight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>42.</b> He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding +officer and the officer of the day, and reports to the latter +without delay all orders to the guard not received from the +officer of the day; he transmits to his successor all material +instructions and information relating to his duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>43.</b> He is responsible under the officer of the day for +the general safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard +marches away from the guardhouse. In case of emergency, while +both guards are at the guardhouse, the senior commander of the +two guards will be responsible that the proper action is taken. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>44.</b> Officers of the guard will remain constantly with +their guards, except while visiting patrols or necessarily +engaged elsewhere in the performance of their duties. The +commanding officer will allow a reasonable time for meals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>45.</b> A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose +will inform the next in command of his destination and probable +time of return. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>46.</b> Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may +divide the night with the next in command, but retains his +responsibility; the one on watch must be constantly on the alert. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>47.</b> When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard +will be informed immediately. (Par, 234.) If the case be serious, +the proper call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard +will cause the commanding officer and the officer of the day +to be at once notified. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>48.</b> If a sentinel calls: "The guard," the commander of the +guard will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the +danger be great, in which case the sentinel will discharge his +piece, the patrol will be as strong as possible. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>49.</b> When practicable, there should always be an officer or +noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the +guardhouse in addition to the sentinels there on post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>50.</b> Between reveille and retreat, when the guard had been +turned out for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars. +222 and 224), the commander of the guard, if an officer, will +receive the report of the sergeant, returning the salute of the +latter with the right hand. He will then draw his saber and place +himself two paces in front of the center of the guard. When the +person for whom the guard has been turned out approaches, he +faces his guard and commands: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; +faces to the front and salutes. When his salute is acknowledged, +he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: 1. <i>Order</i>, +2. <b>ARMS</b>; and faces to the front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting +and before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the +guard reports: "<b>Sir, all present or accounted for</b>"; or +"<b>Sir, (so-and-so) is absent</b>"; or if the roll call has been +omitted: "<b>Sir, the guard is formed</b>," except that at guard +mounting the commanders of the guards present their guards and +salute without making any report. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Between retreat and reveille the commander of the guard salutes +and reports but does not bring the guard to a present. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>51.</b> To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not +entitled to inspect it, no report will be made; nor will a report +be made to any officer unless he halts in front of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>52.</b> When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is +turned out as a compliment or for inspection, the noncommissioned +officer, standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right +guide, commands: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>. He then executes +the <b>rifle salute</b>. If a report be also required, he will, +after saluting, and before bringing his guard to an order, report as +prescribed for the officer of the guard. (Par. 50.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>53.</b> When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and +commanded by an officer, the commander of the guard salutes his +regimental, battalion, and company commander, by bringing the guard +to attention and saluting in person. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment +from a guard (par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in +person, but does not bring the guard to attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When commanded by a noncommissioned officer, the guard is brought +to attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer +salutes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders +of all other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention +during the exchange. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned +out for inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies +of guard mounting and relieving the old guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>54.</b> In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the +principles of paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes right" is executed only +in the ceremonies of guard mounting and relieving the old guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>55.</b> If a person entitled to the compliment, or the +regimental, battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a +guard, neither the compliment nor the salute is given, but the +guard is brought to attention while such person is opposite the +post of the commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After any person has received or declined the compliment, or +received the salute from the commander of the guard, official +recognition of his presence thereafter while he remains in the +vicinity will be taken by bringing the guard to attention. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>56.</b> The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at +reveille and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, +to assure himself that the men are in proper condition to perform +their duties and that their arms and equipments are in proper +condition. For inspection by other officers, he prepares the +guard in each case as directed by the inspecting officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>57.</b> The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless +directed by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>58.</b> At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will +execute inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of +their arm. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>59.</b> The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels +are habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or +other cause makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or +longer intervals, as directed by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>60.</b> He will question his noncommissioned officers and +sentinels relative to the instructions they may have received from +the old guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection +are made as directed by the officer of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>61.</b> He will see that the special orders for each post and +member of the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the +guardhouse and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other +sheltered place to which the member of the guard has constant +access. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>62.</b> He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the +hours appointed by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>63.</b> Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be +arrested, or desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify +the officer of the day. ( Par. 23.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>64.</b> He will, when the countersign is used (pars. 210 to +216), communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard +and see that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the +hour for challenging; the countersign will not be given to +sentinels posted at the guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>65.</b> He will have the details for hoisting the flag at +reveille and lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille +and retreat gun, made in time for the proper performance of these +duties. (See pars. 338, 344, 345, and 346.) He will see that the +flags are kept in the best condition possible, and that they are +never handled except in the proper performance of duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>66.</b> He may permit members of the guard while at the +guardhouse to remove their head dress, overcoats, and gloves; +if they leave the guardhouse for any purpose whatever, he will +require that they be properly equipped and armed, according to +the character of the service in which engaged, or as directed by +the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>67.</b> He will enter in the guard report a report of his +tour of duty and, on the completion of his tour, will present +it to the officer of the day. He will transmit with his report +all passes turned in at the post of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>68.</b> Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or +guard tent for confinement, he will cause him to be searched, +and will without unnecessary delay, report the case to the +officer of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>69.</b> Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out +of camp at night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard +who will have him passed beyond the sentinels. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>70.</b> The commander of the guard will detain at the +guardhouse all suspicious characters, or parties attempting to +pass a sentinel's post without authority, reporting his action +to the officer of the day, to whom persons so arrested will be +sent, if necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>71.</b> He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the +irons of such prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during +his tour, and at such other times as he may deem necessary. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>72.</b> He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs +to verify together, immediately before each relief goes on post, +the number of prisoners who should then properly be at the +guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>73.</b> He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his +charge are executed strictly in accordance with the action of +the reviewing authority. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>74.</b> When no special prisoner guard has been detailed +(par. 300), he will, as far as practicable, assign as guards +over working parties of prisoners sentinels from posts guarded +at night only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>75.</b> The commander of the guard will inspect all meals +sent to the guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality +of food are in accordance with regulations. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>76.</b> At guard mounting he will report to the old officer +of the day all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence +expire on that day, and also all cases of prisoners concerning +whom no statement of charges has been received. (See par. +241.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>77.</b> The commander of the guard is responsible for the +security of the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he +becomes responsible for them after their number has been +verified and they have been turned over to the custody of his +guard by the old guard or by the prisoner guard or overseers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>78.</b> The prisoners will be verified and turned over to +the new guard without parading them, unless the commanding +officer or the officer of the day shall direct otherwise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>79.</b> To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they +have been paraded and after they have been verified by the +officers of the day, the commander of the new guard directs his +sergeant to form his guard with an interval, and commands: 1. +<i>Prisoners</i>, 2. <i>Right</i>, 3. <b>FACE</b>, 4. +<i>Forward</i>, 5. <b>MARCH</b>. The prisoner's having arrived +opposite the interval in the new guard, he commands: +1. <i>Prisoners</i>, 2. <b>HALT</b>, 3. <i>Left</i>, 4. +<b>FACE</b>, 5. <i>Right (or left)</i>, 6. <b>DRESS</b>, 7. +<b>FRONT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Sergeant of the guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>80.</b> The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always +acts as sergeant of the guard, and if there be no officer of the +guard, will perform the duties prescribed for the commander of +the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>81.</b> The sergeant of the guard has general supervision +over the other noncommissioned officers and the musicians and +privates of the guard, and must be thoroughly familiar with all +of their orders and duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>82.</b> He is directly responsible for the property under +charge of the guard, and will see that it is properly cared for. +He will make lists of articles taken out by working parties and +see that all such articles are duly returned. If they are not, +he will immediately report the fact to the commander of the +guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>83.</b> Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare +duplicate lists of the names of all noncommissioned officers, +musicians, and privates of the guard, showing the relief and post +or duties of each. One list will be handed as soon as possible to +the commander of the guard; the other will be retained by the +sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>84.</b> He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the +proper time, and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and +are prompt and efficient in, the discharge of their duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>85.</b> During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of +the sergeant of the guard, the next in rank of the +noncommissioned officers will perform his duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>86.</b> Should the corporal whose relief is on post be +called away from the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard +will designate a noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's +place until his return. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>87.</b> The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all +times for the proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, +including the ground about them and the prison cells. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>88.</b> At <b>first sergeant's call</b> he will proceed to the +adjutant's office and obtain the guard report book. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>89.</b> When the national or regimental colors are taken from +the stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the +sergeant of the guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, +will escort the colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed +for the color guard in the drill regulations of the arm of the +service to which the guard belongs. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>90.</b> He will report to the commander of the guard any +suspicious or unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, +will warn him of the approach of any armed body, and will send +to him all persons arrested by the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>91.</b> When the guard is turned out its formation will be as +follows: The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the +guard, is on the right of the right guide; if not commander of +the guard, he is in the line of file closers, in rear of the +right four of the guard; the next in rank is right guide; the +next left guide: the others in the line of file closers, usually +each in rear of his relief; the field music, with its left three +paces to the right of the right guide. The reliefs form in the +same order as when the guard was first divided, except that if +the guard consists of dismounted cavalry and infantry, the +cavalry forms on the left. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>92.</b> The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if +not in command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard +as prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming +a troop or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or +sections, and, except when the whole guard is formed prior to +marching off, fours are not counted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>93.</b> The sergeant reports as follows: "<b>Sir, all present +or accounted for</b>," or "<b>Sir, (so-and-so) is absent</b>"; or +if the roll call has been omitted, "<b>Sir, the guard is +formed.</b>" Only men absent without proper authority are reported +absent. He then takes his place, without command. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>94.</b> At night the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers +instead of names; thus, the first relief being on post: <b>Second +relief: No. 1; No. 2, etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, +etc.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>95.</b> Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the +guard when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of +an armed body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the +roll may be called before dismissing the guard. If the guard +be turned out for an officer entitled to inspect it, the roll +will, unless he directs otherwise, always be called before a +report is made. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>96.</b> The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the +prisoners, except during such time us they may be under the +charge of the prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible +to the commander of the guard for their security. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>97.</b> He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, +and will not suffer them to leave his personal possession while +he is at the guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. +99.) Should he leave the guardhouse for any purpose he will +turn the keys over to the noncommissioned officer who takes his +place. (Par. 85.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>98.</b> He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the +prisoners with their food, and see that none of these articles +remain in their possession. He will see that no forbidden +articles of any kind are conveyed to the prisoners. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>99.</b> Prisoners when paraded with the guard are placed in +line, in its center. The sergeant, immediately before forming +the guard, will turn over his keys to the noncommissioned +officer at the guardhouse. Having formed the guard, he will +divide it into two nearly equal parts. Indicating the point of +division with his hand, he commands: 1. <i>Right</i> (or +<i>left</i>), 2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>, +5. <i>Guard</i>, 6. <b>HALT</b>, 7. <i>Left</i> (or +<i>right</i>), 8. <b>FACE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the first command be <b>right face</b>, the right half of the +guard only will execute the movements; if <b>left face</b>, the +left half only will execute them. The command <b>halt</b> is +given when sufficient interval is obtained to admit the prisoners. +The doors of the guardroom and cells are then opened by the +noncommissioned officer having the keys. The prisoners will file +out under the supervision of the sergeant, the noncommissioned +officer, and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and such other +sentinels all may be necessary; they will form in line in the +interval between the two parts of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>100.</b> To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, +the sergeant commands; 1. <i>Prisoners</i>, 2. <i>Right</i> (or +<i>left)</i>, 3. <b>FACE</b>, 4. <i>Column right</i> (or +<i>left</i>), 5. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to +their proper rooms or cells. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>101.</b> To close the guard. the sergeant commands: 1. +<i>Left</i> (or <i>right</i>), 2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <i>Forward</i>, +4. <b>MARCH</b>, 5. <i>Guard</i>, 6. <b>HALT</b>, 7. +<i>Right</i> (or <i>left</i>), 8. <b>FACE</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes +the movement. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>102.</b> If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may +indicate the point of division as above, and form the necessary +interval by the commands: 1. <i>Right</i> (or <i>left</i>) +<i>step</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. 3. <i>Guard</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, +and close the intervals by the commands: 1. <i>Left</i> (or +<i>right</i>) <i>step</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Guard</i>, 4. +<b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>103.</b> If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the +discretion of the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, +and sergeants, as well as corporals, required to relieve and +post them. +</p> + +<h3>Section 6. Corporal of the Guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>104.</b> A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders +from none but noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to +himself, the officers of the guard, the officer of the day, and +the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>105.</b> It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post +and relieve sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief +in their orders and duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>106.</b> Immediately after the division of the guard into +reliefs the corporals will assign the members of their respective +reliefs to posts by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post +will not be changed to another during the same tour of guard +duty, unless by direction of the commander of the guard or higher +authority. Usually, experienced soldiers are placed over the arms +of the guard, and at remote and responsible posts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>107.</b> Each corporal will then make a list of the members of +his relief, including himself. This list will contain the number +of the relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every +member thereof, and the post to which each is assigned. The list +will be made in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant +of the guard as soon as completed, the other to be retained by +the corporal. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>108.</b> When directed by the commander of the guard, the +corporal of the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: +<b>CALL OFF</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately rear and +<b>front rank</b>, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; it in +single rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then +commands: 1. <i>Right</i>, 2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <i>Forward</i>, 4. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in +order to observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches +on the right of the leading file, and takes command when the +last one of the old sentinels is relieved, changing places with +the corporal of the new guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>109.</b> When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel +(see par. 168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to +the number of the post: No. (----.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel +approaches the old, halting about one pace from him. (See par. +172.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>110.</b> The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each +other, a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on +his right, the new corporal on his left, both at right shoulder, +and observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly his +instructions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken: +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="center"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td colspan=4> </td> + <td class="center">R</td> + <td colspan=4> </td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td></tr> + <tr><td class="center">|</td><td colspan=3> </td> + <td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td><td> </td> + <td class="center">|</td></tr> + </table> +</td><td class="center"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td colspan=3> </td> + <td class="center">A</td> + <td colspan=3> </td></tr> + <tr><td colspan=3> </td> + <td class="center">--</td> + <td colspan=3> </td></tr> + <tr><td class="right">C</td> + <td class="left">|</td> + <td> </td><td> </td><td> </td> + <td class="right">|</td> + <td class="right">D</td></tr> + <tr><td colspan=3> </td> + <td class="center">--</td> + <td colspan=3> </td></tr> + <tr><td colspan=3> </td> + <td class="center">B</td> + <td colspan=3> </td></tr> + </table> +</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new +sentinel; D, the old. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>111.</b> The instructions relative to the post having been +communicated, the new corporal commands. Post: both sentinels +then resume the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal and +step back so as to allow the relief to pass in front of them. +The new corporal then commands: "1. <i>Forward</i>, 2. +<b>March</b>"; the old sentinel takes his place in rear of the +relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position as those +of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a right shoulder +until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he walks +his post. The corporals take their places as the relief passes +them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>112.</b> Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in +accordance with the same principles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>113.</b> On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the +new guard falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the +old guard forms his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, +and reports to the commander of his guard: "Sir, the relief is +present"; or "Sir, (so and so) is absent," and takes his place +in the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>114.</b> To post a relief other than that which is posted +when the old guard is relieved, its corporal commands: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. <i>(Such) relief</i>, 2. <b>FALL IN</b>; and if arms are +stacked, they are taken at the proper commands. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order, +the men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective +posts, viz, <b>two, four, six</b>, and so on, in the <b>front +rank</b>, and <b>one, three, five</b>, and so on, in the <b>rear +rank</b>. The corporal, standing about two paces in front of the +center of his relief, then commands: <b>CALL OFF</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: 1. +<i>Inspection</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <i>Order</i>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>; +faces the commander of the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: +"<b>Sir, the relief is present</b>"; or "<b>Sir, (so and so) is +absent</b>"; he then takes his place on the right at order arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>115.</b> When the commander of the guard directs the corporal, +<b>post your relief</b>, the corporal salutes and posts his relief +as prescribed (Pars. 108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post +does not go with the new relief, except when necessary to show the +way. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>116.</b> To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to +the front at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, +who then falls out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in +front of the relief and dismisses it by the proper commands. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>117.</b> Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief +was posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see +that no cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The +same rule applies to sentinels over prisoners. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>118.</b> Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with +all the special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see +that each understands and correctly transmits such order in detail +to his successor. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>119.</b> There should be at least one noncommissioned officer +constantly on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal +whose relief is on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post +near the entrance of the guardhouse, and does not fall in with +the guard when it is formed. He will have his rifle constantly +with him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>120.</b> Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to +leave his post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will +notify the sergeant of the guard, who will at once take his +place, or designate another noncommissioned officer to do so. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>121.</b> He will see that no person enters the guardhouse or +guard tent, or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted +without proper authority. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>122.</b> Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the +guard, the corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly +proceed to such sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the +guard before leaving the guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>123.</b> He will at once report to the commander of the guard any +violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported +to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other +way. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>124.</b> Should a sentinel call "<b>The Guard</b>," the corporal +will promptly notify the commander of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>125.</b> Should a sentinel call "<b>Relief</b>," the corporal +will at once proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him +the man next for duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for +a short time only, the corporal will again post him as soon as +the necessity for his relief ceases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>126.</b> When the countersign is used, the corporal at the +posting of the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin +gives the countersign to the members of the relief, excepting +those posted at the guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>127.</b> He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on +post in time for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his +relief, and post it at the proper hour. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>128.</b> Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will +call his own relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>129.</b> Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated +for the reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if +necessary, be found and turned out by the corporal in the least +time and with the least confusion. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>130.</b> When challenged by a sentinel while posting his +relief, the corporal commands: 1. <i>Relief</i>, 2. <b>HALT</b>; +to the sentinel's challenge he answers "<b>Relief</b>," and at +the order of the sentinel he advances alone to give the +countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel says, +"<b>Advance relief</b>," the corporal commands: 1. +<i>Forward</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>131.</b> Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the +guard will challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties +he may observe, first halting his patrol or relief, if either +be with him. He will advance them in the same manner that +sentinels on post advance like parties (pars. 191 to 197), but +if the route of a patrol is on a continuous chain of sentinels, +he should not challenge persons coming near him unless he has +reason to believe that they have eluded the vigilance of +sentinels. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>132.</b> Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered +by an officer entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will +call: "<b>Turn out the guard</b>," announcing the title of the +officer, and then, if not otherwise ordered, he will salute and +return to his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>133.</b> As a general rule he will advance parties +approaching the guard at night in the same manner that +sentinels on post advance like parties. Thus, the sentinel +at the guardhouse challenges and repeats the answer to the +corporal, as prescribed hereafter (par. 200); the corporal, +advancing at port arms, says: "<b>Advance (so and so) with the +countersign</b>," or "<b>to be recognized</b>," if there be +no countersign used; the countersign being correctly +given, or the party being duly recognized, the corporal says: +"<b>Advance (so and so)</b>," repeating the answer to the +challenge of the sentinel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>134.</b> When officers of different rank approach the +guardhouse from different directions at the same time, the +senior will be advanced first, and will not be made to wait +for his junior. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>135.</b> Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes +with the rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether +by day or night. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>136.</b> The corporal will examine parties halted and detained +by sentinels, and, if he have reason to believe the parties have +no authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to +the commander of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>137.</b> The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious +looking characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of +a disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken +in the act of committing crime against the Government on a military +reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the +guard or by sentinels will at once be conducted to the commander +of the guard by the corporal. +</p> + +<h3>Section 7. Musicians of the guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>138.</b> The musicians of the guard will sound calls as +prescribed by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>139.</b> Should the guard be turned out for national or +regimental colors or standards, uncased, the field music of the +guard will, when the guard present arms, sound, "<b>To the +color</b>" or "<b>To the standard</b>"; or, if for any person +entitled thereto, the march, flourishes, or ruffles, prescribed +in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A. R. +</p> + +<h3>Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>140.</b> When so directed by the commanding officer, the +officer who inspects the guard at guard mounting will select +from the members of the new guard an orderly for the commanding +officer and such number of other orderlies and color sentinels +as may be required. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>141.</b> For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who +are most correct in the performance of duty and in military +bearing, neatest in person and clothing, and whose arms and +accouterments are in the best condition. Clothing, arms, and +equipments must conform to regulations. If there is any doubt +as to the relative qualifications of two or more soldiers, the +inspecting officer will cause them to fall out at the guardhouse +and to form in line in single rank. He will then, by testing +them in drill regulations, select the most proficient. The +commander of the guard will be notified of the selection. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>142.</b> When directed by the commander of the guard to fall +out and report an orderly will give his name, company, and +regiment to the sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in +the arm rack in his company quarters, will proceed at once to +the officer to whom he is assigned, reporting: "<b>Sir, Private +----, Company ----, reports all orderly.</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>143.</b> If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will +leave his rifle in the arm rack of his troop quarters, and +report with his belt on, but without side arms unless specially +otherwise ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>144.</b> Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only +to the orders of the commanding officer and of the officers to +whom they are ordered to report. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>145.</b> When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he +will be careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>146.</b> His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the +orderly selected from the guard relieving his own. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>147.</b> Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, +company, and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists +of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>148.</b> If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels +are placed on the color line to guard the colors and stacks. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>149.</b> Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks +are formed. The commander of the guard will divide the time +equally among them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>150.</b> When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be +permitted to return to their respective companies. They are +required to report in person to the commander of the guard at +reveille and retreat. They will fall in with the guard, under +arms, at guard mounting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>151.</b> Color sentinels are not placed on the regular +reliefs, nor are their posts numbered. In calling for the +corporal of the guard, they call: "<b>Corporal of the guard. +Color line.</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>152.</b> Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors +will render the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the +stacks, the salute will be made on crossing the color line or +on passing the colors. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>153.</b> A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit +them to be moved except in the presence of an armed escort. +Unless otherwise ordered by the commanding officer, he will +allow no one to touch them but the color bearer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks or +to touch them except by order of an officer or noncommissioned +officer of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line falls +to salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, +and if the caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of +the guard and report the facts. +</p> + +<h3>Section 9. Privates of the Guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>154.</b> Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander or +the guard, and to posts usually by the corporal of their relief. +They will not change from one relief or post to another during +the same tour of guard duty unless by proper authority. +</p> + +<h3>Section 10. Orders for Sentinels.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>155.</b> Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General +orders and special orders. General orders apply to all +sentinels. Special orders relate to particular posts and duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>156.</b> Sentinels will be required to memorize the +following: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +My general orders are: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. <b>To take charge of this post and all Government property in +view.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. <b>To walk my post in a military manner keeping always on the +alert and observing everything that takes place within sight +or hearing.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. <b>To report all violations of orders I am instructed to +enforce.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. <b>To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guard +house than my own.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. <b>To quit my post only when properly relieved.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +6. <b>To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves +me all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, +and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +7. <b>To talk to no one except in line of duty.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +8. <b>In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +9. <b>To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my +post.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +10. <b>In any case not covered by instructions to call the +corporal of the guard.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +11. <b>To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not +cased.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +12. <b>To be especially watchful at night and during the time +for challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post +and to allow no one to pass without proper authority.</b> +</p> + +<p class="center"> +REGULATIONS RELATING TO THE GENERAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 1: <b>To take charge of this post and all Government +property in view.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>157.</b> All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are +required to observe respect toward sentinels and members of the +guard when such are in the performance of their duties. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>158.</b> A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of +the guard every unusual or suspicious occurrence noted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>159.</b> He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about +the post or camp at any time, all parties to a disorder +occurring on or near his post, and all, except authorized +persons, who attempt to enter the camp at night, and will turn +over to the corporal of the guard all persons arrested. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>160.</b> The number, limits, and extent of his post will +invariably constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel +on post. The limits of his post should be so defined as to +include every place to which he is required to go in the +performance of his duties. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 2: <b>To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on +the alert and observing everything that takes place within sight +or hearing.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>161.</b> A sentinel is not required to halt and change the +position of his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to +execute <b>to the rear, march</b>, precisely as prescribed in the +drill regulations, but faces about while walking in the manner +most convenient to him and at any part of his post as may be best +suited to the proper performance of his duties. He carries his +rifle on either shoulder, and in wet or severe weather, when not +in a sentry box, may carry it at a secure. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>162.</b> Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry +boxes will be used in wet weather only, or at other times when +specially authorized by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>163.</b> In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to +stand at ease on their posts, provided they can effectively +discharge their duties in this position; but they will take +advantage of this privilege only on the express authority of +the officer of the day or the commander of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>164.</b> A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead +his horse, but will not relax his vigilance. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 3: <b>To report all violations of orders I am instructed to +enforce.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>165.</b> A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of +orders when he is inspected or relieved, but if the case be +urgent, he will call the corporal of the guard, and also, if +necessary, will arrest the offender. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 4: <b>To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the +guardhouse than my own.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>166.</b> To call the corporal of the guard for any purpose +other than relief, fire, or disorder (pars. 167 and 178), a +sentinel will call, "<b>Corporal of the guard, No. (----),</b>" +adding the number of his post. In no case will any sentinel +call, "<b>Never mind the corporal</b>"; nor will the corporal +heed such call if given. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 5: <b>To quit my post only when properly relieved.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>167.</b> If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness +or other cause, a sentinel will call, "<b>Corporal of the guard, +No. (----), Relief</b>," giving the number of his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>168.</b> Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, +and with arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief, +when it is 30 paces from him. He will come to a port arms with +the new sentinel, and in a low tone will transmit to him all the +special orders relating to the post and any other information +which will assist him to better perform his duties. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 6: <b>To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who +relieves me, all orders from the commanding officer, officer +of the day, and officers and noncommissioned officers of the +guard only.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>169.</b> During his tour of duty a soldier is subject to the +orders of the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers +and noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is +competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by +members of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>170.</b> A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order +from any person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on +post; under no circumstances will he yield it to any other person. +Unless necessity therefor exists, no person will require a +sentinel to quit his piece, even to allow it to be inspected. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>171.</b> A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (pars. +209 to 217) to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or +to a person from whom he properly receives orders, on such +person's verbal order given personally. Privates of the guard +will not use the countersign except in the performance of +their duties while posted as sentinels. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 7: <b>To talk to no one except in line of duty.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>172.</b> When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding +communication with any person a dismounted sentinel armed with +a rifle or saber will take the position of port arms or saber. +At night a dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol takes the +position of raised pistol in challenging or holding communication. +A mounted sentinel does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the +daytime when challenging or holding conversation; but if drawn, he +holds it at advance rifle, raise pistol, or port saber, according +as he is armed with a rifle, pistol, or saber. At night in +challenging and holding conversation his weapon is drawn and +held as just prescribed, depending on whether he is armed with +a rifle, pistol, or saber. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 8: <b>In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>173.</b> In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "<b>Fire, No. +(----)</b>," adding the number of his post; if possible, he will +extinguish the fire himself. In case of disorder he will call, +"<b>The Guard, No. (----)</b>," adding the number of his post. If +the danger be great, he will in either case discharge his piece +before calling. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 11: <b>To salute all officers and all colors and standards +not cased.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>174.</b> When not engaged in the performance of a specific +duty, the proper execution of which would prevent it, a member +of the guard will salute all officers who pass him. This rule +applies at all hours of the day or night, except in the case +of mounted sentinels armed with a rifle or pistol, or +dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after challenging. +(See par. 181.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>175.</b> Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted +sentinel armed with a rifle or saber, salutes by presenting +arms; if otherwise armed, he salutes with the right hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn, +salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases +with the right hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>176.</b> To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a +right shoulder or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the +person to be saluted when the latter arrives within 30 paces. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be +readily recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and therefore +at this distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to +be saluted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>177.</b> The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person +to be saluted does not arrive within that distance, then when +he is nearest. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>178.</b> A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, +stands at attention in the doorway on the approach of a person +or party entitled to salute, and salutes by presenting arms +according to the foregoing rules. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>179.</b> A mounted sentinel on a regular post, halts, faces, +and salutes in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing +patrol duty, he salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>180.</b> Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing +rules, all persons and parties entitled to compliments from the +guards (pars. 224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, +and Marine Corps; military and naval officers of foreign powers; +officers of volunteers and militia officers when in uniform. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>181.</b> A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer +comes on his post; if the officer holds communication with the +sentinel, the sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute +is given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and +advanced. A mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a +dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after +challenging. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>182.</b> In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, +the sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing +toward the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not +himself relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself +so that the party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking +his post when the party has reached six paces beyond him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>183.</b> An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, +whether in uniform or not. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>184.</b> A sentinel in communication with an officer will not +interrupt the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the +officer will salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>185.</b> When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel +on post and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the +first note of the Star Spangled Banner or to the color will come +to a present arms. At the sounding of the last note he will resume +walking his post. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +No. 12: <b>To be especially watchful at night and during the time +for challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, +and to allow no one to pass without proper authority.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>186.</b> During challenging hours, it a sentinel sees any person +or party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his +post toward such person or party and when within about 30 yards +will challenge sharply, "<b>Halt, Who is there!</b>" He will place +himself in the best possible position to receive or, if necessary, +to arrest the person or party. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>187.</b> In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel +will call, "<b>Halt, Dismount. Who is there?</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>188.</b> The sentinel will permit only one of any party to +approach him for the purpose of giving the countersign (pars. 209 +to 217), or, if no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. +When this is done the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to +pass. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>189.</b> In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a +reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves +to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause +them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if +he have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or +when the party has not the countersign, or gives all incorrect +one. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>190.</b> A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so +close as to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before +recognizing the person or receiving the countersign. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>191.</b> When two or more persons approach in one party, the +sentinel, on receiving an answer that indicates that some one in +the party has the countersign, will say, "<b>Advance one with the +countersign</b>," and, if the countersign is given correctly, will +then say, "<b>Advance (so-and-so)</b>," repeating the answer to +his challenge. Thus it the answer be "<b>Relief (friend with the +countersign, patrol, etc.)</b>," the sentinel will say, "<b>Advance +one with the countersign</b>"; then "<b>Advance, relief (friends, +patrol, etc.)</b>." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>192.</b> If a person having the countersign approach alone, he +advanced to give the countersign. Thus if the answer be "<b>Friend +with the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)</b>." the +sentinel will say, "<b>Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or +etc.) with the countersign</b>"; then "<b>Advance, friend (or +officer of the day, or etc.)</b>." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>193.</b> If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post +from different directions at the same time, all such persons are +challenged in turn and required to halt and to remain halted +until advanced. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing +rules. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>194.</b> If a party is already advanced and in communication +with a sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that +may approach; if the party challenged be senior to the one already +on his post, the sentinel will advance the new party at once. The +senior may allow him to advance any or all of the other parties; +otherwise the sentinel will not advance any of them until the +senior leaves him. He will then advance the senior only of the +remaining parties, and so on. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>195.</b> The following order of rank will govern a sentinel +in advancing different persons or parties approaching his post: +Commanding officers, officer of the day, officer of the guard, +officers, patrols, reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard +in order of rank, friends. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>196.</b> A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, +nor permit two parties to advance upon him at the same time. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>197.</b> If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging +are the same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only +as follows: Instead of saying "<b>Advance (so-and-so) with the +countersign</b>," the sentinel will say; "<b>Advance (so-and-so) +to be recognized.</b>" Upon recognition he will say, "<b>Advance +(so-and-so).</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>198.</b> Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse +or mislead him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as +"<b>Friends with the countersign</b>," is not to be understood as +misleading, but as the usual answer made by officers, patrol, +etc., when the purpose of their visit makes it desirable that +their official capacity should not be announced. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>199.</b> Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to +memorize the following: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all +persons designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or +standards not cased, and in time of war for all armed parties +approaching my post, except troops at drill and reliefs and +detachments of the guard.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>At night after challenging any person or party, to advance +no one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer +to the challenge.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>200.</b> After receiving an answer to his challenge, the +sentinel calls, "<b>Corporal of the guard (so and so)</b>," +repeating the answer to the challenge. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>201.</b> He remains in the position assumed in challenging +until the corporal has recognized or advanced the person or +party challenged, when he resumes walking his post, or, if the +person or party he entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon +as the salute has been acknowledged, resumes walking his post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>202.</b> The sentinel at the post of the guard will be +notified by direction of the commanding officer of the presence +in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. +224.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>203.</b> The following examples illustrate the manner in which +the sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon +the approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment +(pars. 224, 227, and 228), "<b>Turn out the guard, commanding +officer</b>"; "<b>Turn out the guard, governor of a Territory</b>"; +"<b>Turn out the guard, national colors</b>"; "<b>Turn out the +guard, armed party</b>"; etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel +will call, "<b>Turn out the guard, armed party.</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>204.</b> Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the +guard formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call +"<b>Never mind the guard.</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>205.</b> After having culled "<b>Turn out the guard</b>," the +sentinel will never call "<b>Never mind the guard</b>," on the +approach of an armed party. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>206.</b> Though the guard be already formed he will not fail +to call, "<b>Turn out the guard</b>," as required in his special +orders, except that the guard will not be turned out for any +person while his senior is at or coming to the post of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>207.</b> The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the +commander of the approach of any armed body and of the presence +in the vicinity of all suspicious or disorderly persons. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>208.</b> In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the +sentinel at the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard +and report the facts to him. +</p> + +<h3>Section 11. Countersigns and Paroles.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>209.</b> <i>Seventy-seventh article of war</i>.--Any person +subject to military law who makes known the parole or countersign +to any person not entitled to receive it according to the rules +and discipline of war, or gives a parole or countersign different +from that which he received, shall, if the offense be committed +in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. (See par. 171.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>210.</b> The <b>countersign</b> is a word given daily from the +principal headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels +in identifying persons who may be authorized to pass at night. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and +repass sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, +noncommissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>211.</b> The <b>parole</b> is a word used as a check on the +countersign in order to obtain more accurate identification of +persons. It is imparted only to those who are entitled to +inspect guards and to commanders of guards. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form +of an order to those entitled to them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>212.</b> When the commander of the guard demands the parole, +he will advance and receive it as the corporal receives the +countersign. (See par. 133.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>213.</b> As the communications containing the parole and +countersign must at times be distributed by many orderlies, +the parole intrusted to many officers, and the countersign +and parole to many officers and sentinels, and as both the +countersign and parole must, for large commands, be prepared +several days in advance, there is always danger of their being +lost or becoming known to persons who would make improper use +of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for granted +that any person who gives the right countersign is what he +represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is +greater security in omitting the use of the countersign and +parole, or in using them with great caution. The chief reliance +should be upon personal recognition or identification of all +persons claiming authority to pass. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or +concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, +should not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal +of the guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take +to his next superior any person about whom he is not competent +to decide. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>214.</b> The <b>countersign</b> is usually the name of a battle; +the <b>parole</b>, that of a general or other distinguished person. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>215.</b> When they can not be communicated daily, a series of +words for some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments +that are to use the same parole or countersign as the main body. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>216.</b> If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard +deserts with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another +for it and report the case at once to headquarters. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>217.</b> In addition to the countersign, use may be made of +pre-concerted signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand +or striking the hands together a certain number of times as agreed +upon. Such signals may be used only by guards that occupy exposed +points. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +They are used before the countersign is given and must not be +communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. +Their use is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief +in a prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate +with the guard or with each other. +</p> + +<h3>Section 12. Guard Patrols.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>218.</b> A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for +the performance of some special service connected with guard duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>219.</b> If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of +sentinels, the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will +be furnished with the countersign and the outposts and sentinels +warned. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>220.</b> If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted +by its commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying +it advances alone and gives the countersign. +</p> + +<h3>Section 13. Watchmen.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>221.</b> Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as +overseers over prisoners, and as such will receive their orders +and perform their duties as the commanding officer may direct. +</p> + +<h3>Section 14. Compliments from Guards.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>222.</b> The compliment from a guard consists in the guard +turning out and presenting arms. (See par. 50.) No compliments +will be paid between retreat and reveille except as provided in +paragraphs 361 and 362, nor will any person other than those +named in paragraph 224 receive the compliment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>223.</b> Though a guard does not turn out between retreat +and reveille as a matter of compliment it may be turned out +for inspection at any time by a person entitled to inspect it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>224.</b> Between reveille and retreat, the following persons +are entitled to the compliment: The President; sovereign or chief +magistrate of a foreign country and members of a royal-family; +Vice President: President and President pro tempore of the Senate; +American and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief +Justice; Speaker of the House of Representatives; committees of +Congress officially visiting a military post; governors within +their respective States and Territories; governors general; Assistant +Secretary of War officially visiting a military post; all general +officers of the Army; general officers of foreign services visiting +a post; naval, marine, volunteer, and militia officers in the +service of the United States and holding the rank of general +officer; American or foreign envoys or ministers; ministers +accredited to the United States; charges d'affaires accredited +to the United States; consuls general accredited to the United +Suites; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer of the +day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>225.</b> The relative rank between officers of the Army and +Navy is as follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with +vice admiral, major general with rear admiral, brigadier general +with commodore,[13] colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel +with commander, major with lieutenant commander, captain with +lieutenant, first lieutenant with lieutenant (junior grade), +second lieutenant with ensign. (A. R. 12.) +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 13: The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a grade +on the active list of the Navy of the United States on Mar. 3, +1899. By section 7 of the act of Mar. 3. 1899, the nine junior +rear admirals are authorized to receive the pay and allowances +of a brigadier general of the Army.] +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>226.</b> Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph +224, and, except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the +commanding officer and the officer of the day will be advised in +each case of the presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled +to the compliment. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>227.</b> Guards will turn out and present arms when the +national or regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried +past by a guard or an armed party. This rule also applies when the +party carrying the colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted +in the vicinity of the guardhouse, the guard will be turned out +when the colors first pass, and not thereafter. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>228.</b> In ease the remains of a deceased officer or soldier +are carried past, the guard will turn out and present arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>229.</b> In time of war all guards will turn out under arms +when armed parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or +detachments of the guard, approach their post. (See par. 53.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>230.</b> The commander of the guard will be notified of the +presence in camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the +compliment except general officers of the Army, the commanding +officer, and the officer of the day. Members of the guard will +salute all persons entitled to the compliment and all officers +in the military or naval service of foreign powers, officers +of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps, officers of volunteers, +and officers of militia when in uniform. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>232.</b> <i>Eighty-fifth article of war</i>.-- Any person +subject to military law, except an officer, who is found drunk +on duty shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>233.</b> All material instructions given to a member of +the guard by an officer having authority will be promptly +communicated to the commander of the guard by the officer +giving them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>234.</b> Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in +ranks under arms. At roll call each man, as his name or number +and relief are called, will answer "Here," and come to an +<b>order arms</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>235.</b> Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each +member not at once required for duty will place his rifle in +the arm racks, if they be provided, and will not remove it +therefrom unless he requires it in the performance of some duty. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>236.</b> Without permission from the commander of the guard, +members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the +immediate vicinity of the guardhouse. Permission to leave will +not be granted except in cases of necessity. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>237.</b> Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will +not remove their accouterments or clothing without permission +from the commander of the guard. (Par. 66.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 15. Prisoners.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>238.</b> Articles of war 69, 70, 71, 72, and 73 have special +reference to the confinement of prisoners and should be carefully +borne in mind. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>239.</b> The commander of the guard will place a civilian in +confinement on an order from higher authority only, unless such +civilian is arrested while in the act of committing some crime +within the limits of the military jurisdiction, in which case +the commanding officer will be immediately notified. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>240.</b> Except as provided in the sixty-eighth article of +war, or when restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined +without the order of an officer, who shall previously inquire +into his offense. (A. R. 930.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>241.</b> An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will +send, as soon as practicable, a written statement, signed by +himself, to the commander of the guard, setting forth the name, +company, and regiment of such soldier, and a brief statement of +the alleged offense. It is a sufficient statement of the offense +to give the number and article of war under which the soldier is +charged. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>242.</b> A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and +until his sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as +held in confinement by the commanding officer. After due +promulgation of his sentence, the prisoner is held in confinement +by authority of the officer who reviews the proceedings of the +court awarding sentence. The commander of the guard will state +in his report, in the proper place, the name of the officer by +whom the prisoner was originally confined. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>243.</b> Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred +will be designated as "awaiting trial"; enlisted men who have been +tried will, prior to the promulgation of the result, be designated +as "awaiting result of trial"; enlisted men serving sentences +of confinement not involving dishonorable discharge, will be +designated as "garrison prisoners." Persons sentenced to dismissal +or dishonorable discharge and to terms of confinement at military +posts or elsewhere will be designated as "general prisoners." +(A. R. 928.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>244.</b> The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when +the order promulgating the same is received. The officer of the +guard, or the officer of the day if there be no officer of the +guard, will lead them unless the commanding officer shall direct +otherwise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>245.</b> When the date for the commencement of a term of +confinement imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not +expressly fixed by sentence, the term of confinement begins +on the date of the officer promulgating it. The sentence is +continuous until the term expires, except when the person +sentenced is absent without authority. (A. R. 969.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>246.</b> When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, +or undergoing sentence commit offenses for which they are tried, +the second sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the +first. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>247.</b> Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence +of, a general court-martial and those confined for serious +offenses will be kept apart, when practicable, from those +confined by sentence of an inferior court or for minor offenses. +Enlisted men in confinement for minor offenses, or awaiting +trial or the result of trial for the same, will ordinarily be +sent to work under charge of unarmed overseers instead of armed +sentinels and will be required attend drills unless the +commanding officer shall direct otherwise. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>248.</b> Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be +furnished with food from their respective companies or from the +organizations to which they may be temporarily attached. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their +places of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send +the prisoners, under proper guard, to their messes for meals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will +be attached for rations to companies. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be allowed +to enter the prison room. (See par. 289.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>249.</b> With the exception of those specially designated by +the commanding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the +guardhouse unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an +officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard. The commanding +officer may authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled +general prisoners to leave the guardhouse, not under the charge +of a sentinel, for the purpose of working outside under such +surveillance and restrictions as he may impose. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>250.</b> Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick cull, or +at the time designated by the commanding officer, will be sent +to the hospital under charge of proper guard, with a sick report +kept for the purpose. The recommendation of the surgeon will +be entered in the guard report. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>251.</b> The security of sick prisoners in the hospital +devolves upon the post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply +to the post commander for a guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>252.</b> Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when +directed by the commanding officer or the officer of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>253.</b> A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not +salute an officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>254.</b> All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, +and his blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for +his confinement, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list +sent to that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner during +transfer will be furnished with a duplicate of this list, and +will be held responsible for the delivery of all articles itemized +therein with the prisoner. At least one serviceable woolen blanket +will be sent with every such prisoner so transferred. (A.R. 939.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>255.</b> When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in +the guardhouse will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw +per month for bedding. So far as practicable iron bunks will be +furnished to all prisoners in post guardhouses and prison room. +(A. R. 1084.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>256.</b> If the number of prisoners, including general +prisoners, confined at a post justifies it, the commanding +officer will detail a commissioned officer as "officer in +charge of prisoners." At posts where the average number of +prisoners continually in confinement is less than 12, the +detail of an officer in charge of prisoners will not be made. +</p> + +<h3>Section 16. Guarding Prisoners.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>299.</b> The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge +of the prisoners except when they have been turned over to the +prisoner guard or overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>(a) He will allow none to escape.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the +guardhouse except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned +officer of the guard.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners +without permission from proper authority.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard +any suspicious noise made by the prisoners.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how many +prisoners are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work +or elsewhere.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work +or elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the +guard, notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: +"<b>Corporal of the guard, (so many). Prisoners.</b>" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until +the corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered +him to do so. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>300.</b> Whenever practicable, special guards will be detailed +for the particular duty of guarding working parties composed of +such prisoners as can not be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>301.</b> The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded +by the police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the +officer of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>302.</b> The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner +guard and overseers, and as such receives orders from the +commanding officer and the commander of the prisoner guard only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>303.</b> Details for prisoner guard are marched to the +guardhouse and mounted by being inspected by the commander of +the main guard, who determines whether all of the men are in +proper condition to perform their duties and whether their arms +and equipments are in proper condition, and rejects any men +found unfit. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>304.</b> When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner +guard or overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for +them under their commander, and all responsibility and control +of the main guard ceases until they are returned to the main +guard. (Par. 306.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>305.</b> It a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will +call "<b>Halt</b>." If he fails to halt when the sentinel has +once repeated his call, and if there be no other possible means +of preventing his escape, the sentinel will fire upon him. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following will more fully explain the important duties of +a sentinel in this connection: +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="left">(Circular.)</td><td class="center">WAR DEPARTMENT.</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td><td class="center">ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE,</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td><td class="center"><i>Washington, November 1,1887.</i></td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +By direction of the Secretary of War, the following is published +for the information of the Army: +</p> + +<p class="center"> +UNITED STATES CIRCUIT COURT, EASTERN DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN, AUGUST +1, 1887. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +THE UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLARK. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by +one soldier upon another within a military reservation of the +United States. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice +and in the performance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such +homicide is excusable, unless it was manifestly beyond the scope +of his authority or was such that a man of ordinary sense and +understanding would know that it was illegal. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It seems that the sergeant of the guard has a right to shoot a +military convict if there be no other possible means of preventing +his escape. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has +no application to military offenses. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner +of all blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled +to weight as an expression of the views of the military court +of the necessity of using a musket to prevent the escape of the +deceased. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<pre> * * * * *</pre> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +By order of the Secretary of War: +</p> + +<p class="right"> +R. C. DRUM, <i>Adjutant General.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following is taken from Circular No. 3, of 1883, from +Headquarters Department of the Columbia: +</p> + +<p class="right"> +VANCOUVER BARRACKS, W. T., <i>April 20, 1883.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To the ASSISTANT ADJUTANT GENERAL, +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<i>Department of the Columbia.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +SIR: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<pre> * * * * *</pre> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their +escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, with +ammunition. To prevent escape is his first and most important +duty. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<pre> * * * * *</pre> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall not use more +force or violence to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is +necessary to effect that object, but if the prisoner, after being +ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel may maim or +even kill him, and it is his duty to do so. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon +him, and firing to hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most +serious military offense, for which he should and would be severely +punished by a general court-martial. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<pre> * * * * *</pre> +</div> + +<p class="center"> +(Signed) HENRY A. MORROW,<br> +<i>Colonel Twenty-first Infantry, Commanding Post.</i> +</p> + +<p class="center"> +[Third indorsement.] +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td> </td> + <td class="center">OFFICE JUDGE ADVOCATE,</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td class="center">MILITARY DIVISION OF THE + PACIFIC,</td></tr> +<tr><td> </td> + <td class="right"><i>May 11, 1883.</i></td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +Respectfully returned to the assistant adjutant general, Military +Division of the Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed +by Col. Morrow. I was not aware that such a view had ever been +questioned. That the period is a time of peace does not affect +the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the +escaping prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise be prevented. +He should, of course, attempt to stop the prisoner before firing +by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn him by the words +"Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect. +</p> + +<p class="right"> +W. WINTHROP, <i>Judge Advocate.</i> +</p> + +<p class="center"> +[Fourth indorsement.] +</p> + +<p class="center"> +HEADQUARTERS MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC, +</p> + +<p class="right"> +<i>May 11, 1883.</i> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Respectfully returned to the commanding general, Department of +the Columbia, approving the opinion of the commanding officer, +Twenty-first Infantry, and of the judge advocate of the division, +in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by sentinels +in preventing prisoners from escaping. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<pre> * * * * *</pre> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +By command of Maj. Gen. Schofield: +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 class="right"> +<tr><td class="center">J. C. KELTON,</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"><i>Assistant Adjutant + General.</i></td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>306.</b> On approaching the post of the sentinel at the +guardhouse, a sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in +charge of prisoners will halt them and call, "No. 1, (so many) +prisoners." He will not allow them to cross the post of the +sentinel until so directed by the corporal of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>307.</b> Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed +over prisoners for work will receive specific and explicit +instructions covering the required work; they will be held +strictly responsible that the prisoners under their care +properly and satisfactorily perform the designated work. +</p> + +<h3>Section 17. Flags.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>337.</b> The garrison, post, and storm flags are national flags +and shall be of bunting. The union of such is as described in +paragraph 216, Army Regulations, and shall be of the following +proportions: Width, seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; +length, seventy-six one-hundredths of the hoist of the flag. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It +will be furnished only to posts designated in orders from time +to time from the War Department, and will be hoisted only on +holidays and important occasions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be +furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant +weather. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. +It will be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and +windy weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. +(A. R. 223.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>338.</b> At every military post or station the flag will be +hoisted at the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or +of the first note of the march, if a march be played before the +reveille. The flag will be lowered at the sounding of the last +note of the retreat, and while the flag is being lowered the +band will play "The Star Spangled Banner," or, if there be no +band present, the field music will sound "to the color." When +"to the color" is sounded by the field music while the flag is +being lowered the same respect will be observed as when "The +Star-Spangled Banner" is played by the band, and in either case +officers and enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the +flag, stand at attention, and render the prescribed salute at +the last note of the music. (A: R. 437.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be completed +at the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or "to the color." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>339.</b> The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or +lake fort at the beginning of and during an action in which a +fort may be engaged, whether by day or by night. (A. R. 437.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>340.</b> The national flag will always be displayed at the +time of firing a salute. (A. R. 397.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>341.</b> The flag of a military post will not be dipped by +way of salute or compliment. (A. R. 405.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>342.</b> On the death of an officer at a military post the +flag is displayed at halfstaff and so remains between reveille +and retreat until the last salvo or volley is fired over the +grave; or if the remains are not interred at the post until +they are removed therefrom. (A. R. 422.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>343.</b> During the funeral of all enlisted man at a military +post the flag is displayed at halfstaff. It is hoisted to the +top after the final volley or gun is fired or after the remains +are taken from the post. The same honors are paid on the occasion +of the funeral of a retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>344.</b> When practicable, a detail consisting of a +noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard will raise +or lower the flag. This detail wears side arms or if the special +equipments do not include side arms then belts only. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail +in line, takes his post in the center and marches it to the staff. +The flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly +hoisted. The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat +on the staff and the detail marched to the guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>345.</b> When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are +loosened from the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the +flag is lowered at the last note of retreat. It is then neatly +folded and the halyards made fast. The detail is then re-formed +and marched to the guardhouse, where the flag is turned over to +the commander of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should +always be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, +the halyards being held by two persons. +</p> + +<h3>Section 18. Reveille and Retreat Gun.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>346.</b> The morning and evening gun will be fired by a +detachment of the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a +corporal and two privates. The morning gun is fired at the first +note of reveille, or, if marches be played before the reveille, +it is fired at the beginning of the first march. The retreat gun +is fired at the last note of retreat. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which +is fired, sponged out, find secured under his direction. +</p> + +<h3>Section 19. Guard Mounting.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>347.</b> Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the +commanding officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in +the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the +guard belongs. If none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In +case the guard is composed wholly of mounted organizations, +guard mounting may be held mounted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>348.</b> When infantry and mounted troops dismounted are +united for guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for +infantry. +</p> + +<h3>Section 20, Formal Guard Mounting for Infantry.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>349.</b> Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only +in posts or camps where a band is present. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>350.</b> At the assembly, the men designated for the guard +fall in on their company parade grounds as prescribed in +paragraph 106, I. D. R. The first sergeant then verifies the +detail, inspects it, replaces any man unfit to go on guard, +turns the detail over to the senior noncommissioned officer, +and retires. The band takes its place on the parade ground so +that the left of its front rank shall be 12 paces to the right +of the front rank of the guard when the latter is formed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>351.</b> At adjutant's call, the adjutant, dismounted and +the sergeant major on his left, marches to the parade ground. The +adjutant halts and takes post so as to be 12 paces in front of and +facing the center of the guard when formed; the sergeant major +continues on, moves by the left flank and takes post facing to the +left, 12 paces to the left of the front rank of the hand; the band +plays in quick or double time; the details are marched to the +parade ground by the senior noncommissioned officers; the detail +that arrives first is marched to the line so that, upon halting, +the breast of the front rank men shall be near to and opposite +the left arm of the sergeant major; the commander of the detail +halts his detail, places himself in front of and facing the sergeant +major, at a distance equal to or a little greater than the front +of his detail, and commands: 1. <i>Right</i>, 2. <b>DRESS</b>. The +detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and its +commander, the right front rank man placing his breast against the +left arm of the sergeant major; the noncommissioned officers take +post two paces in rear of the rear rank of the detail. The detail +aligned, the commander of the detail commands: <b>FRONT</b>, +salutes, and then reports; "<b>The detail is correct,</b>" or +"<b>(So many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent</b>"; +the sergeant major returns the salute with the right hand after +the report is made. The commander then passes by the right of the +guard and takes post in the line of noncommissioned officers in +rear of the right file of his detail. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like manner +on the left of the one preceding. The privates, noncommissioned +officers, and commander of each detail dress on those of the +preceding details in the same rank or line. Each detail commander +closes the rear rank to the right and fills blank files as far +as practicable with the men from his front rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should the guard from a company not include a noncommissioned +officer, one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander +of the detail. In this case the commander of the detail, after +reporting to the sergeant major, passes around the right flank +between the guard and the band and retires. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>352.</b> When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major +takes a side step to the right, draws sword, verifies the detail, +takes post two paces to the right and two paces to the front of the +guard, facing to the left, causes the guard to count off, completes +the left squad, if necessary, as in the School of the Company, +and if there be more than three squads, divides the guard into +two platoons, again takes post as described above and commands: +1. <i>Open ranks</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command march, the rear rank and file closers march backward +four steps, halt, and dress to the right. The sergeant major aligns +the ranks and file closers and again taking post as described +above, commands: <b>FRONT</b>, moves parallel to the front rank +until opposite the center, turns to the right, halts midway to the +adjutant, salutes and reports: "<b>Sir, the details are +correct</b>," or "<b>Sir, (so many) sergeants, corporals, or +privates are absent</b>"; the adjutant returns the salute, directs +the sergeant major: <b>Take your post</b>, and then draws saber; +the sergeant major faces about, approaches to within two paces of +the center of the front rank, turns to the right, moves three paces +beyond the left of the front rank, turns to the left, halts on the +line of the front rank, faces about, and brings his sword to the +order. When the sergeant major has reported the officer of the +guard takes post, facing to the front three paces in front of the +center of the guard, and draws saber. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then commands: 1. <i>Officer (or officer) and +noncommissioned officers</i>, 2. <i>Front and center</i>, 3. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command center, the officers carry saber. At the command +<b>march</b>, the officer advances and halts three paces from the +adjutant, remaining at the carry; the noncommissioned officers +pass by the flanks, along the front, and form in order of rank +from right to left, three paces in rear of the officer, remaining +at the right shoulder; if there is no officer of the guard the +noncommissioned officers halt on a line three paces from the +adjutant; the adjutant then assigns the officers and +noncommissioned officers according to rank, as follows: +<b>Commander of the guard, leader of first platoon, leader of +second platoon, right guide of first platoon, left guide of +second platoon, left guide of first platoon, right guide of +second platoon</b>, and <b>file closers</b>, or, if the guard +is not divided into platoons: <b>Commander of the guard, right +guide, left guide</b>, and <b>file closers</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then commands: 1. <i>Officer (or officers) and +noncommissioned officers</i>, 2. <b>POSTS</b>, 3. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +At the command posts, all, except the officer commanding the +guard, face about. At the command <b>march</b>, they take the posts +presented in the school of the company with open ranks. The adjutant +directs: <b>Inspect your guard, sir</b>; at which the officer +commanding the guard faces about, commands: <b>Prepare for +inspection</b>, returns saber and inspects the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +During the inspection the band plays; the adjutant returns saber, +observes the general condition of the guard, and falls out any +man who is unfit for guard duty or does not present a creditable +appearance. Substitutes will report to the commander of the guard +at the guardhouse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>353.</b> The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and +color sentinels, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, and +notifies the commander of the guard of his selection. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>354.</b> If there be a junior officer of the guard he takes +post at the same time as the senior, facing to the front, three +paces in front of the center of the first platoon; in going to the +front and center he follows and takes position on the left of +the senior and is assigned as lender of the first platoon; he may +be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in inspecting +the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If there be no officer of the guard, the adjutant inspects the +guard. A noncommissioned officer commanding the guard takes post +on the right of the right guide when the guard is in line, and +takes the post of the officer of the guard when in column or +passing in review. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>355.</b> The inspection ended, the adjutant faces himself about +thirty paces in front of and facing the center of the guard and +draws saber; the new officer of the day takes post in front of and +facing the guard, about thirty paces from the adjutant; the old +officer of the day takes post three paces to the right of and +one pace to the rear of the new officer of the day; the officer +of the guard takes post three paces in front of its center, draws +saber with the adjutant, and comes to the order; thereafter he +takes the same relative position as a captain of a company. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then commands: 1. <i>Parade</i>, 2. <b>REST</b>, 3. +<b>SOUND OFF</b>, and comes to the order and parade rest. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard +to the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when +it ceases playing. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then comes to attention, carries saber and commands: +1. <i>Guard</i>, 2. <b>ATTENTION</b>, 3. <i>Close ranks</i>, 4. +<b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The ranks are opened and closed as in paragraph 745, I. D. R. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then commands: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, +faces toward the new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports: +Sir, the guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the +adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and directs +the adjutant: March the guard in review, sir. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant caries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an +order, and commands: 1. <i>At trail, platoons (or guard) right</i>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Guard</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The platoons execute the movement; the band turns to the right +and places itself 12 paces in front of the first platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant places himself six paces from the flank and abreast +of the commander of the guard; the sergeant major six paces from +the left flank of the second platoon. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The adjutant then commands: 1. <i>Pass in review</i>, 2. +<b>FORWARD</b>, 3. <b>MARCH</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, +according to the principles of review, and is brought to <b>eyes +right</b> at the proper time by the commander of the guard; the +adjutant, commander of the guard, leaders of platoons, sergeant +major, and drum major salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the +left of the column, places itself opposite and facing him, and +continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The +field music detaches itself from the band when the latter turns +out of the column, and, remaining in front of the guard, commences +to play when the band ceases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Having passed 12 paces beyond the officer of the day, the adjutant +halts; the sergeant major halts abreast of the adjutant and 1 +pace to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire; +the commander of the guard then commands: 1. <i>Platoons, right +by squads</i>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, and marches the guard to its post. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officers of the day face toward each other and salute; the +old officer of the day turns over the orders to the new officer +of the day. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +While the band is sounding off, and while the guard is marching +in review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with +arms folded. They take this position when the adjutant comes +to parade rest, resume the attention with him, again take the +parade rest at the first note of the march in review, and resume +attention as the head of the column approaches. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander +of the guard and the adjutant, making one salute with the hand. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>356.</b> If the guard be not divided into platoons, the +adjutant commands: 1. <i>At trail, guard right</i>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>, 3. <i>Guard</i>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, and it passes in +review as above; the commander of the guard is 3 paces in front +of its center; the adjutant places himself 6 paces front the +left flank and abreast of the commander of the guard; the +sergeant covers the adjutant on a line with the front rank. +</p> + +<h3>Section 21. Informal guard mounting for Infantry.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>357.</b> Informal guard mounting will be held on the parade +ground of the organization from which the guard is detailed. +If it is detailed from more than one organization, then at such +place as the commanding officer may direct. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>358.</b> At assembly, the detail for guard falls in on the +company parade ground. The first sergeant verifies the detail, +inspects their dress and general appearance, and replaces any +man unfit to march on guard. He then turns the detail over to +the commander of the guard and retires. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>359.</b> At adjutant's call, the officer of the day takes his +place 15 paces in front of the center of the guard and commands: +1. <i>Officer (or officers) and noncommissioned officers</i>, 2. +<i>Front and center</i>, 3. <b>MARCH</b>; whereupon the officers +and noncommissioned officers take their positions, are assigned +and sent to their posts as prescribed in formal guard mounting. +(Par. 352.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The officer of the day will then inspect the guard with especial +reference for its fitness for the duty for which it is detailed +and will select, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, the +necessary orderlies and color sentinels. The men found unfit +for guard will be returned to quarters and will be replaced by +others found to be suitable, if available in the company. If +none are available in the company the fact will be reported to +the adjutant immediately after guard mounting. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the inspection shall have been completed the officer of +the day resumes his position and directs the commander of the +guard to march the guard to its post. +</p> + +<h3>Section 22. Relieving the Old Guard.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>360.</b> As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old +guard is formed in line, with its field music three paces to +its right; and, when the field music at the head of the new +guard arrives opposite its left, the commander of the new guard +commands: 1. <i>Eyes</i>, 2. <b>RIGHT</b>; the commander of the +old guard commands: 1. <i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; +commanders of both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick +time past the old guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music +of the old guard, he commands: <b>FRONT</b>; the commander of +the old guard commands: 1. <i>Order</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, as soon +as the new guard shall have cleared the old guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The field music having marched three paces beyond the field music +of the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed +by the guard, changes direction to the left when on a line with +the old guard; the changes of direction are without command. +The commander of the guard halts on the line of the front rank +of the old guard, allows his guard to march past him, and, when +its rear approaches, forms it in line to the left, establishes +the left guide three paces to the right of the field music of the +old guard, and on a line with the front rank, and then dresses +his guard to the left; the field music of the new guard is three +paces to the right of its front rank. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>361.</b> The new guard being dressed the commander of each +guard, in front of and facing its center, commands: 1. +<i>Present</i>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, resumes his front, salutes, +carries saber, faces his guard, and commands: 1. <i>Order</i>, +2. <b>ARMS</b>. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he +stands on the right or left of the front rank, according as he +commands the old or new guard, and executes the rifle salute. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>362.</b> After the new guard arrives at its post and has +saluted the old guard, each guard is presented by its commander +to its officer of the day; if there be but one officer of the +day present, or if one officer acts in the capacity of old and +new officer of the day, each guard is presented to him by its +commander. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>363.</b> If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each +commander of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if +not already at attention. The senior commander of the two guards +will then command: "1. <i>Old and new guards</i>, 2. +<i>Present</i>, 3. <i>Arms</i>." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The junior will salute at the command "<b>Present Arms</b>" +given by the senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the +senior brings both guards to the order. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>364.</b> After the salutes have been acknowledged by the +officers of the day, each guard is brought to an order by its +commander; the commander of the new guard then directs the +orderly or orderlies to fall out and report and causes bayonets +to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding officer; bayonets +will not then be unfixed during the tour except in route marches +while the guard is actually marching or when specially directed +by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the +guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs, +<b>first</b>, <b>second</b>, and <b>third</b>, from right to left, +and directs a list of the guard to be made by reliefs. When the +guard consists of troops of different arms combined, the men are +assigned to reliefs so as to insure a fair division of duty under +rules prescribed by the commanding officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>365.</b> The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are +at once relieved by members of the new guard, the two guards +standing at ease or at rest while these changes are being made. +The commander of the old transmits to the commander of the new +guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning +the guard and its duties. The commander of the new guard then +takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in +charge of the guard. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>366.</b> If considerable time is required to bring in that +portion of the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may +direct that as soon as the orders and property are turned over to +the new guard the portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be +marched off and dismissed. In such a case the remaining detachment +or detachments of the old guard will be inspected by the commander +of the new guard when they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the +senior noncommissioned officer present to march these detachments +off and dismiss them in the prescribed manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>367.</b> In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when +the guard is very small, the field music may be dispensed with. +</p> + +<h2><a name="X">CHAPTER X.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +MAP READING AND SKETCHING. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h3>Section 1. Military map reading.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +When you pick up a map, the first question is, Where is the north? +This can usually be told by an arrow (see fig. 1, section 1) +which will be found in one of the corners of the map, and which +points to the true north--the north of the north star. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On some maps no arrow is to be found. The chances are a hundred +to one that the north is at the top of the map, as it is on almost +all printed maps. But you can only assure yourself of that fact +by checking the map with the ground it represents. For instance, +if you ascertain that the city of Philadelphia is due east of +the city of Columbus, then the Philadelphia-Columbus line on +the map is a due east-and-west line, and establishes at once all +the other map directions. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Now, the map represents the ground as nearly as it can be represented +on a flat piece of paper. If you are standing up. facing the +north, your right hand will be in the east, your left in the +west, and your back to the south. It is the same with a map; +if you look across it in the direction of the arrow--that is, +toward its north--your right hand will be toward what is east +on the map; your left hand to the west; the south will be at +the bottom of the map. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +There is another kind of an arrow that sometimes appears on a +map. It is like the one in figure 2, section 1, and points not +to the true north but to the magnetic north, which is the north +of the compass. Though the compass needle, and therefore the arrow +that represents it on the map, does not point exactly north, the +deviation is, from a military point of view, slight, and appreciable +error will rarely result through the use of the magnetic instead +of the true north in the solution of any military problems. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig022.jpg" width="467" height="679" alt="Fig. 22"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +Should you be curious to know the exact deviation, consult your +local surveyor or any civil engineer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Both arrows may appear on your map. In that case disregard the +magnetic arrow unless you are using the map in connection with +a compass. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If a map is being used on the ground, the first thing to be done +is to put the lines of the map parallel to the real outlines of +the ground forms, and roads, fences, railroads, etc., that the +map shows; for the making of a map is no more than the drawing +on paper of lines parallel to and proportional in length to real +directions and distances on the ground. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For instance, the road between two places runs due north and south. +Then on the map a line representing the road will be parallel to +the arrow showing the north and will be proportional in length +to the real road. In this way a map is a picture, or, better, a +bare outline sketch; and, as we can make out a picture, though +it be upside down, or crooked on the wall, so we call use a map +that is upside down or not parallel to the real ground forms. +But it is easier to make out both the picture and the map if +their lines are parallel to what they represent. So in using a +map on the ground we always put the lines parallel to the actual +features they show. This is easy if the map has an arrow. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the map has no arrow, you must locate objects or features on +the ground, and on the map, their representations. Draw on the +map a line connecting any two of the features; place this line +parallel to all imaginary line through the two actual features +located, and your map will be correctly placed. Look to it that +you do not reverse on the map the positions of the two objects +or features, or your map will be exactly upside down. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the map has been turned into the proper position--that is +to say, "oriented"--the next thing is to locate on the map your +position. If you are in the village of Easton and there is a +place on the map labeled Easton, the answer is apparent. But +if you are out in the country, at an unlabeled point that looks +like any one of a dozen other similar points, the task is more +complicated. In this latter case you must locate and identify, +both on the map and on the ground, other points--hills, villages, +peculiar bends in rivers, forests--any ground features that have +some easily recognizable peculiarity and that you can see from +your position. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Suppose, for instance, you were near Leavenworth and wanted to +locate your exact position, of which you are uncertain. You have +the map shown in this manual, and, looking about, you see southwest +from where you stand the United States Penitentiary; also, halfway +between the south and the southeast--south-southeast a sailor would +say--the reservoir (rectangle west of "O" in "Missouri"). Having +oriented your map, draw on it a line from the map position of the +reservoir toward its actual position on the ground. Similarly +draw a line from the map position of penitentiary toward its +actual position. Prolong the two lines until they intersect. +The intersection of the lines will mark the place where you +stand--south Merritt Hill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This method consists merely in drawing on the map lines that +represent the lines of sight to known and visible places. The +lines pass through the map position of the places you see and +are parallel to the actual lines of sight; therefore they are the +map representations of the lines of sight, and their intersection +is the map position of the eye of the observer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After this orientation and location of position, one can deduce +from the map everything there is to know in regard to directions. +In this respect, study of the ground itself will show no more +than will study of the map. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After "What direction?" comes "How far?" To answer this, one +must understand that the map distance between any two points +shown bears a fixed and definite relation or proportion to the +real distance between the two points. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +For instance: We measure on a map and find the distance between +two points to be 1 inch. Then we measure the real distance on +the ground and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence the relation +between the map distance and the real distance is 1 to 10,000, +or 1/10000. Now, if the map is properly drawn, the same relation +will hold good for all distances, and we can obtain any ground +distance by multiplying by 10,000 the corresponding map distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This relation need not be 1/10000, but may be anything from 1/100 +that an architect might use in making a map or plan of a house up +to one over a billion and a half, which is about the proportion +between map and real distances in a pocket-atlas representation of +the whole world on a 6-inch page. Map makers call this relation +the "scale" of the map and put it down in a corner in one of +three ways. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +First. 1 inch equals 100. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Second. 1/100. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Third. As shown in figure 3 (section 1). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +These expressions mean one and the same thing. A variation of +the first method on a map of different scale might be: 1 inch +equals 1 mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 inches, then the +real distance between any two points shown on the map is 63,360 +times the map distance. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To find the ground distance by the third kind of scale, copy it +on the edge of a slip of paper, apply the slip directly to the +map, and read off the distance; and so we answer the question, +"How far?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +After direction and distance comes the interpretation of the +signs, symbols, and abbreviations on the map. Those authorized +are given in section 2 (a reprint of Appendix 4, Field Service +Regulations, 1914); but there are a good many other conventional +signs in common use. A key to them is published by the War +Department, and is called "Conventional Signs, United States +Army." From these you read at once the natural and artificial +features of the country shown on your map. It should be borne in +mind that these conventional signs are not necessarily drawn to +scale, as are the distances. They show the position and outline +of the features rather than the size. This, for the reason that +many of the features shown, if drawn to scale, would be so small +that one could not make them out except with a magnifying glass. +If the exact dimensions are of any importance, they will be written +in figures on the map. For instances, bridges. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In addition to te above conventional signs, we have <b>contours</b> +to show the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape of the +ground. Abroad, <b>hachures</b> are much used, but they serve only +to indicate elevation, and, as compared to contours, are of little +value. Contours resemble the lines shown in figure 4 (section +1) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Hachures are shown in figure 5 (section 1), and may be found on +any European map. They simply show slopes, and, when carefully +drawn, show steeper slopes by heavier shading and gentler slopes +by the fainter hachures. The crest of the mountain is within +the hachures. (See fig. 5, section 1.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<i>Contours</i>.--A certain student, when asked by his instructor +to define "space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can +not put it into words." The Instructor replied: "I suppose that +under those circumstances, Mr. ----, the definition really would +not help much." And so it is with contours--the definition does +not help much if you know a contour when you meet it on a map. For +examples of contours, turn to the map in section 2 and, starting +at the United States penitentiary, note the smooth, flowing, +irregular curved lines marked 880, 860, 840, 840, 860, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The only other lines on the map that at all resemble contours +are stream lines, like "Corral Creek," but the stream lines are +readily distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross the +contours squarely, while the contours run approximately parallel +to each other. Note the stream line just to the west of South +Merritt Hill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The contours represent lines on the ground that are horizontal +and whose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edge of +a flood would follow the irregularities of the hills about it. +Those lines that contours stand for are just as level as the +water's edge of a lake, but horizontally they wander back and +forth to just as great a degree. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The line marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes through on that +particular piece of ground every point that is 880 feet above +sea level. Should the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet, +the penitentiary would be on an island, the edge of which is +marked by the 880 contour. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Contours show several things; among them the height of the ground +they cross. Usually the contour has labeled on it in figures the +height above some starting point, called the <b>datum +plane</b>--generally sea level. If, with a surveying instrument, +you put in on a piece of ground a lot of stakes, each one of which +is exactly the same height above sea level--that is, run a line of +levels--then make a map showing the locution of the stakes, a line +drawn on the map through all the stake positions is a contour and +shows the position of all points of that particular height. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On any given map all contours are equally spaced in a vertical +direction, and the map shows the location of a great number of +points at certain fixed levels. If you know the vertical interval +between any two adjacent contours, you know the vertical interval +for all the contours on that map, for these intervals on a given +map are all the same. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +With reference to a point through which no contour passes, we +can only say that the point in question is not higher than the +next contour up the hill, nor lower than the next one down the +hill. For the purposes of any problem, it is usual to assume +that the ground slopes evenly between the two adjacent contours +and that the vertical height of the point above the lower contour +is proportional to its horizontal distance from the contour, as +compared to the whole distance between the two contours. For +instance, on the map, find the height of point A. The horizontal +measurements are as shown on the map. The vertical distance between +the contours is 20 feet. A is about one-quarter of the distance +between the 800 and the 820 contours, and we assume its height +to be one-quarter of 20 feet (5 feet) higher than 800 feet. So +the height of A is 805 feet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The vertical interval is usually indicated in the corner of the +map by the letters "V. I." For instance: V. I.=20 feet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On maps of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is usually +small--perhaps as small as 1 foot; on maps of large areas on a +small scale it may be very great--even 1,000 feet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Contours also show <b>slopes</b>. It has already been explained +that from any contour to the next one above it the ground rises a +fixed number of feet, according to the vertical interval of that +map. From the scale of distances on the map the horizontal +distance between any two contours can be found. For example: +On the map the horizontal distance between D and E is 90 +yards, or 270 feet. The vertical distance is 20 feet the V. I. of +the map. The slope then is 20/270 = 1/13.5 = 7-1/2% = 4-1/2°, +in all of which different ways the slope can be expressed, +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig023.jpg" width="332" height="89" alt="Fig. 23"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +On a good many contoured maps a figure like this will be found +in one of the corners: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig024.jpg" width="457" height="51" alt="Fig. 24"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +On that particular map contours separated by the distance +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig025.jpg" width="204" height="51" alt="Fig. 25"> +</div> + +<p> +on the vertical scale show a slope of 1°: if separated by the +distance +<img src="fig026.jpg" width="112" height="51" alt="Fig. 26"> +they show a 2° slope. etc. A slope of 1° is a rise of +1 foot in 57. To use this scale of slopes copy it on the edge +of a piece of paper just as you did the scale of distances and +apply it directly to the map. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +You will notice that where the contours lie closest the slope +is steepest; where they are farthest apart the ground is most +nearly flat, +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It has already been set forth how contours show height and slope; +in addition to this they show the shape of the ground, or GROUND +FORMS. Each single contour shows the shape at its particular level +of the hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the 880 contour +about the penitentiary shows that the hill at that level has a +shape somewhat like a horse's head. Similarly, every contour +on the map gives us the form of the ground at its particular +level, and knowing these ground forms for many levels we can form +a fair conception of what the whole surface is like. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A round contour like the letter O outlines a round ground feature; +a long narrow one indicates a long narrow ground feature. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Different hills and depressions have different shapes. A good +many of them have one shape at one level and another shape at +another level, all of which information will be given you by +the contours on the map. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +One of the ways to see how contours show the shape of the ground +is to pour half a bucket of water into a small depression in +the ground. The water's edge will be exactly level, and if the +depression is approximately round the water's edge will also be +approximately round. The outline will look something like figure +6. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Draw roughly on a piece of paper a figure of the same shape and +you will have a contour showing the shape of the bit of ground +where you poured your water. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your little pond +a small round bay. The water will rush in and the water-mark +on the soil will now be shaped something like figure 7. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Alter your drawing accordingly, and the new contour will show +the new ground shape. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Again do violence to the face of nature by digging with a stick a +narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, and the watermark +will now look something like figure 8. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Alter your drawing once more and your contour shows again the +new ground form. Drop into your main pond a round clod and you +will have a new watermark, like figure 9, to add to your drawing. +This new contour, of the same level with the one showing the +limit of the depression, shows on the drawing the round island. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the watermark +will be like figure 10, and the drawing of it, properly placed, +will show another island of another shape. Your drawing now will +look like figure 11. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It shows a depression approximately round, off which open a round +bay and a long narrow bay. There is also a round elevation and a +long, narrow one; a long, narrow ridge, jutting out between the +two bays, and a short, broad one across the neck of the round +bay. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig027.jpg" width="469" height="684" alt="Fig. 27"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +Now flood your lake deeply enough to cover up the features you +have introduced. The new water line, about as shown by the dotted +line in figure 11, shows the oblong shape of the depression at a +higher level; the solid lines show the shape farther down; the +horizontal distance between the two contours at different points +shows where the bank is steep and where the slope is gentler. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Put together the information that each of these contours gives +you, and you will see how contours show the shape of the ground. +On the little map you have drawn you have introduced all the +varieties of ground forms there are; therefore all the contour +forms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The contours on an ordinary map seem much more complicated, but +this is due only to the number of them, their length, and many +turns before they finally close on themselves. Or they may close +off the paper. But trace each one out, and it will resolve itself +into one of the forms shown in figure 11. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Just as the high-tide line round the continents of North and +South America runs a long and tortuous course, but finally closes +back on itself, so will every contour do likewise. And just as +truly as every bend in that high-tide mark turns out around a +promontory, or in around a bay, so will every bend in a contour +stand for a hill or a valley, pointing to the lowlands if it +be a hill, and to the height if it mark a valley. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the map embrace a whole continent or an island, all the contours +will be of closed form, as in figure 11, but if it embrace only +it part of the continent or island, some of the contours will be +chopped off at the edge of the map, and we have the open form +of contours, as we would have if figure 11 were cut into two +parts. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The closed form may indicate a hill or a basin; the open form, +a ridge or a valley; sometimes a casual glance does not indicate +which. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Take up, first, the contour of the open type. If the map shows +a stream running down the inside of the contour, there is no +difficulty in saying at once that the ground feature is a valley; +for instance, V, V, V, and the valley of Corral Creek on the +map. But if there is no stream line, does the contour bend show +a valley or a ridge? +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +First of all, there is a radical difference between the bend +of a contour round the head of a valley and its bend round the +nose of a ridge, +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Compare on the map the valleys V and the ridges R. The bend of +the contour round the head of the valley is much sharper than +the bend of the contour round the nose of the ridge. This is a +general truth, not only in regard to maps, but also in regard +to ground forms. Study any piece of open ground and note how +much wider are the ridges than the valleys. Where you find a +"hog back" or "devil's backbone," you have an exception to the +rule, but the exceptions are not frequent enough to worry over. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To tell whether a given point is on a ridge or in a valley, start +from the nearest stream shown on the map and work across the +map to the undetermined point, keeping in mind that in a real +trip across the country you start from the stream, go up the +hill to the top of a ridge, down the other side of the hill to a +water-course, then up a hill to the top of a ridge, down again, +up again, etc. That is all traveling is--valley, hill, valley, +hill, valley, etc., though you wander till the crack o' doom. +And so your map travels must go--valley, hill, valley, hill--till +you run off the map or come back to the starting point. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +On the map, follow the R-V line, V indicating valley and R ridge +or hill. Note first the difference in sharpness in the contour +bends; also how the valley contours point to the highland and +the ridge contours to the lowland. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The contours go thus: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig028.jpg" width="541" height="204" alt="Fig. 28"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The streams flow down the valleys, and the sharp angle of the +contour points always <i>up</i> stream. Note also how the junction +of a stream and its tributary usually makes an angle that points +<i>down</i> stream. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"Which way does this stream run?" +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Water flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a stream, contours +representing higher ground must be to your right and to your +left. Get the elevations of these contours. Generally the nearest +contour to the bank of the stream will cross the stream and there +will be an angle or sharp turn in the contour at this crossing. +If the point of the angle or sharp turn is toward you, you are +going downstream; if away from you, you are going upstream. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the contours are numbered, you have only to look at the numbers +to say where the low and where the high places are; but to read a +map with any speed one must be quite independent of these numbers. +In ordinary map reading look, first of all, for the stream lines. +The streams are the skeleton upon which the whole map is hung. +Then pick out the hilltops and ridges and you have a body to +clothe with ail the details that will be revealed by a close and +careful study of what the map maker has recorded. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As to closed contours, they may outline a depression or a hill. +On the map, "881" or "885" might be hills or ponds, as far as +their shape is concerned. But, clearly, they are hills, for on +either side are small streams running <i>away</i> from them. If +they were ponds, the stream lines would run <i>toward</i> the +closed contours. The rest of "hill, valley, hill," will always +solve the problem when there are not enough stream lines shown +to make evident at once whether a closed contour marks a pond or +a hill. Look in the beginning for the stream lines and valleys, +and, by contrast, if for no other reason, the hills and ridges +at once loom up. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +To illustrate the subject of contours to aid those who have +difficulty in reading contoured maps the following is suggested: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. Secure modeling clay and build a mound. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at equal vertical +intervals into zones; then insert vertical dowels through the +mound of clay. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. Remove the top zone, place on paper, and draw outline of the +bottom edge. Trim your paper roughly to the outline drawn. Indicate +where the holes made by the dowels pierce the paper. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. Do the above with each zone of your mound. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. Place these papers in proper order on dowels similarly placed +to ones in original mound at, say, 1 inch vertical interval apart. +A skeleton mound results. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +6. Replace the zones of the clay mound and form the original clay +mound along the side of skeleton mound. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +7. New force all the paper sheets down the dowels onto the bottom +sheet, and we have a map of clay mound with contours. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--One-inch or 2-inch planks can be made into any desired +form by the use of dowels and similar procedure followed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +People frequently ask, "What should I see when I read a map?" +and the answer is given, "The ground as it is." This is not true +any more than it is true that the words, "The valley of the Meuse," +bring to your mind vine-clad hills, a noble river, and green +fields where cattle graze. Nor can any picture ever put into +your thought what the Grand Canyon really is. What printed word +or painted picture can not do, a map will not. A map says to you, +"Here stands a hill," "Here is a valley," "This stream runs so," +and gives you a good many facts in regard to them. But you do not +have to "see" anything, any more than you have to visualize Liege +in order to learn the facts of its geography. A map sets forth +cold facts in an alphabet all its own, but an easy alphabet, and +one that tells with a few curving lines more than many thousand +words could tell. +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Sketching.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +Noncommissioned officers and selected privates should be able +to make simple route sketches. This is particularly useful in +patrolling as thereby a patrol leader is able to give his commander +a good idea of the country his patrol has traversed. Sketches +should be made on a certain scale, which should be indicated +on the sketch, such as 3 inches on the sketch equals 1 mile on +the ground. The north should be indicated on the sketch by means +of an arrow pointing in that direction. Any piece of paper may +be used to make the sketch on. The back of the field-message +blank is ruled and prepared for this purpose. The abbreviations +and conventional signs shown on the following pages should be +used in making such simple sketches. +</p> + +<h4>Field Maps and Sketches.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +The following abbreviations and signs are authorized for use on +field maps and sketches. For more elaborate map work the authorized +conventional signs as given in the manual of "Conventional Signs, +United States Army Maps," are used. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Abbreviations other than those given should not be used. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +ABBREVIATIONS. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td>A.</td><td>Arroyo.</td> + <td>G. S</td><td>General Store.</td> + <td>Pt.</td><td>Point.</td></tr> +<tr><td>abut.</td><td>Abutment.</td> + <td>gir.</td><td>Girder.</td> + <td>q.p.</td><td>Queen-post</td></tr> +<tr><td>Ar.</td><td>Arch.</td> + <td>G. M.</td><td>Gristmill.</td> + <td>R.</td><td>River.</td></tr> +<tr><td>b.</td><td>Brick.</td> + <td>I.</td><td>Iron.</td> + <td>R. H.</td><td>Roundhouse.</td></tr> +<tr><td>B. S.</td><td>Blacksmith Shop.</td> + <td>I.</td><td>Island.</td> + <td>R. R.</td><td>Railroad.</td></tr> +<tr><td>bot.</td><td>Bottom.</td> + <td>Jc.</td><td>Junction.</td> + <td>S.</td><td>South.</td></tr> +<tr><td>Br.</td><td>Branch.</td> + <td>k.p.</td><td>King-post.</td> + <td>s.</td><td>Steel.</td></tr> +<tr><td>br.</td><td>Bridge.</td> + <td>L.</td><td>Lake.</td> + <td>S. H.</td><td>Schoolhouse.</td></tr> +<tr><td>C.</td><td>Cape.</td> + <td>Lat.</td><td>Latitude.</td> + <td>S. M.</td><td>Sawmill.</td></tr> +<tr><td>cem.</td><td>Cemetery.</td> + <td>Ldg.</td><td>Landing.</td> + <td>Sta.</td><td>Station.</td></tr> +<tr><td>con.</td><td>Concrete.</td> + <td>L. S. S.</td> + <td>Life-Saving Station.</td> + <td>st.</td><td>Stone.</td></tr> +<tr><td>cov.</td><td>Covered.</td> + <td>L. H.</td><td>Lighthouse</td> + <td>str.</td><td>Stream.</td></tr> +<tr><td>Cr.</td><td>Creek.</td> + <td>Long.</td><td>Longitude.</td> + <td>T. G.</td><td>Tollgate.</td></tr> +<tr><td>d.</td><td>Deep.</td> + <td>Mt.</td><td>Mountain.</td> + <td>Tres.</td><td>Trestle.</td></tr> +<tr><td>cul.</td><td>Culvert.</td> + <td>Mts.</td><td>Mountains.</td> + <td>tr.</td><td>Truss.</td></tr> +<tr><td>D. S.</td><td>Drug Store.</td> + <td>N.</td><td>North.</td> + <td>W. T.</td><td>Water Tank.</td></tr> +<tr><td>E.</td><td>East.</td> + <td>n. f.</td><td>Not fordable.</td> + <td>W. W.</td><td>Water Works.</td></tr> +<tr><td>Est.</td><td>Estuary.</td> + <td>P.</td><td>Pier.</td> + <td>W.</td><td>West.</td></tr> +<tr><td>f.</td><td>Fordable.</td> + <td>pk.</td><td>Plank.</td> + <td>w.</td><td>Wood.</td></tr> +<tr><td>Ft.</td><td>Fort.</td> + <td>P. O.</td><td>Post Office</td> + <td>wd.</td><td>Wide.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center"> +SIGNS--FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig029.jpg" width="390" height="291" alt="Fig. 29"> +</div> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig030.jpg" width="510" height="623" alt="Fig. 30"> +</div> + +<h2><a name="XI">CHAPTER XI.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +MESSAGE BLANKS +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig031.jpg" width="526" height="352" alt="Fig. 31"> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The heading "From" is filled in with the <i>name</i> of the +detachment sending the information: as "Officer's Patrol, 7th +Cav." Messages sent on the same day from the same source to the +same person are numbered consecutively. The address is written +briefly, thus: "Commanding officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade," In +the signature the writer's surname only and rank are given. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +This blank is four and a half by six and three quarters-inches, +including the margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled +in squares, the side of each square representing 100 yards on a +scale of 3 inches to one mile, for use in making simple sketches +explanatory of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in +blocks of forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope +is three by five and one-fourth inches and is printed as follows: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig032.jpg" width="538" height="156" alt="Fig. 32"> +</div> + +<p> </p> + +<div class="center"> +<img src="fig033.jpg" width="424" height="672" alt="Fig. 33"> +</div> + +<h2><a name="XII">CHAPTER XII.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +SIGNALS AND CODES. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +(Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.) +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<h4>General Instructions for Army Signaling.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>1.</b> Each signal station will have its call, consisting of +one or two letters, as Washington, "W"; and each operator or +signalist will also have his personal signal of one or two +letters, as Jones, "Jo." These being once adopted will not be +changed without due authority. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>2.</b> To lessen liability of error, numerals which occur in +the body of a message should be spelled out. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>3.</b> In receiving a message the man at the telescope should +call out each letter as received, and not wait for the completion +of a word. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>4.</b> A record of the date and time of the receipt or +transmission of every message must be kept. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>5.</b> The duplicate manuscript of messages received at, or +the original sent from, a station should be carefully filed. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>6.</b> In receiving messages nothing should be taken for +granted, and nothing considered as seen until it has been +positively and clearly in view. Do not anticipate what will +follow from signals already given. Watch the communicating +station until the last signals are made, and be very certain +that the signal for the end of the message has been given. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>7.</b> Every address must contain at least two words and +should be sufficient to secure delivery. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>8.</b> All that the sender writes for transmission after +the word "To" is counted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>9.</b> Whenever more than one signature is attached to a +message count all initials and names as a part of the message. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>10.</b> Dictionary words, initial letters, surnames of +persons, names of cities, towns, villages, States, and +Territories, or names of the Canadian Provinces will be counted +each as one word: <i>e. g.</i>, New York, District of Columbia, +East St. Louis should each be counted as one word. The +abbreviation of the names of cities, towns, villages, States, +Territories, and provinces will be counted the same as if +written in full. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>11.</b> Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use, +figures, decimal points, bars of division, and in ordinal +numbers the affixes "st," "d," "nd," "rd," and "th" will be each +counted as one word. Letters and groups of letters, when such +groups do not form dictionary words and are not combinations of +dictionary words, will be counted at the rate of five letters or +fraction of five letters to a word. When such groups are made up +of combinations of dictionary words, each dictionary word so +used will be counted. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>12.</b> The following are exceptions to paragraph 55, and are +counted as shown: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="50%"> +<tr><td class="left">A. M.</td> + <td class="left">1 word</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">P. M.</td> + <td class="left">1 word</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">O. K.</td> + <td class="left">1 word</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Per cent</td> + <td class="left">1 word</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>13.</b> No message will be considered sent until its receipt +has been acknowledged by the receiving station. +</p> + +<h4>The International Morse or General Service Code.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>18.</b> The International Morse Code is the General Service +Code and is prescribed for use by the Army of the United States +and between the Army and the Navy of the United States. It +will be used on radio systems, submarine cables using siphon +recorders, and with the heliograph, flash-lantern, and all visual +signaling apparatus using the wigwag. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<i>Alphabet</i>. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="80%" class="center"> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>A . -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>N - .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>B - . . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>O - - -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>C - . - .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>P . - - .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>D - . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>Q - - . -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>E .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>R . - .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>F . . - .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>S . . .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>G - - .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>T -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>H . . . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>U . . -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>I . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>V . . . -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>J . - - -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>W . - -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>K - . -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>X - . . -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>L . - . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>Y - . - -</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>M - -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>Z - - . .</b></td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="center"> +<i>Numerals</i>. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="80%" class="center"> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>1 . - - - -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>6 - . . . .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>2 . . - - -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>7 - - . . .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>3 . . . - -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>8 - - - . .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>4 . . . . -</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>9 - - - - .</b></td></tr> +<tr><td class="left"> + <b>5 . . . . .</b></td> + <td class="left"> + <b>0 - - - - -</b></td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="center"> +<i>Punctuation</i>. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 class="center" width="100%"> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Period</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. . . . . .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Comma</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. - . - . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Interrogation</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. . - - . .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Hyphen or dash</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . . . . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Parentheses (before and after the words)</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . - - . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Quotation mark (beginning and ending)</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. - . . - .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Exclamation</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- - . . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Apostrophe</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. - - - - .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Semicolon</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . - . - .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Colon</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- - - . . .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Bar indicating fraction</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . . - .</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Underline (before and after the word or + words it is wished to underline)</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. . - - . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Double dash (between preamble and address, + between address and body of message, + between body of message and signature, + and immediately before a fraction)</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . . . -</b> + </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + Cross</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. - . - .</b> + </td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<h4>Visual Signaling in General.</h4> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>21.</b> Methods of visual signaling are divided as follows: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) By flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight +(without shutter). (General Service Code). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) By heliograph, flash lantern, or searchlight (with +shutter). (General Service Code). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) By Ardois. (General Service Code). +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) By hand flags or by stationary semaphore. (Two-arm +semaphore Code.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) By preconcerted signals with Coston lights, rockets, +bombs, Very pistols, small arms, guns, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) By flag signals by permanent hoists. (International +Code.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>22.</b> The following conventional signals, with exceptions +noted, will be used in the first four classes. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td colspan=2> </td> + <td class="center"><i>Exceptions</i></td></tr> +<tr><td colspan=2> </td> + <td class="left">Ardois and semaphore.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">End of word.</td> + <td class="left">Interval.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">End of sentence.</td> + <td class="left">Double interval.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">End of message.</td> + <td class="left">Triple interval.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Signal separating preamble from + address; address from text; text from signature. + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>- . . . -</b></td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom">Double interval, + signature preceded also by "Sig." Interval.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Acknowledgement.</td> + <td class="left">R.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Error.</td> + <td class="left"> + <b>. . . . . . . .</b> + </td><td class="left" valign="bottom">A.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Negative.</td> + <td class="left">K.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Preparatory.</td> + <td class="left">L.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Annulling.</td> + <td class="left">N.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Affirmative.</td> + <td class="left">P.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Interrogatory.</td> + <td class="left"> + <b>. . - - . .</b> + </td><td class="left" valign="bottom">O.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">Repeat after word.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Interrogatory. + A (word).</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">Repeat last message.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Interrogatory three + times.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Send faster.</td> + <td class="left">QRQ.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Send slower.</td> + <td class="left">QRS.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Cease sending.</td> + <td class="left">QRT.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">Wait a moment.</td> + <td class="left" valign="bottom"> + <b>. - . . .</b> + </td><td class="left" valign="bottom">None.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Execute.</td> + <td class="left">IX, XI.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Move to your right.</td> + <td class="left">MR.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Move to your left.</td> + <td class="left">ML.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Move up.</td> + <td class="left">MU.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Move down.</td> + <td class="left">MD.</td><td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Finished (end of work).</td> + <td class="left"> + <b>. . . - . -</b> + </td><td class="left" valign="bottom">None.</td></tr> +</table> + +<h4>Visual Signaling: By Flag (Wig-Wag), Torch, Hand Lantern, or +Beam or Searchlight (Without Shutter).</h4> + +<p class="center"> +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>23.</b> For the flag used with the General Service Code there +are three motions and one position. The position is with the flag +held vertically, the signalman facing directly toward the station +with which it is desired to communicate. The first motion (the +dot) is to the right of the sender, and will embrace an arc of +90°, starting with the vertical and returning to it, and will +be made in a plane at right angles to the line connecting the +two stations. The second motion (the dash) is a similar motion +to the left of the sender. The third motion (front) is downward +directly in front of the sender and instantly returned upward +to the first position. Front is used to indicate an interval. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>24.</b> The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used +with the shutter like the heliograph, may be used for +long-distance signaling, when no shutter is suitable or +available, in a similar manner to the flag or torch, the first +position being a vertical one. A movement of the beam 90° to +the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar movement to +the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically for +front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>25.</b> To use the torch or hand lantern, a foot light must +be employed as a point of reference to the motion. The lantern +is most conveniently swung out upward to the right of the +footlight for a dot, to the left for a dash, and raised +vertically for front. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, +at intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. +If the call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until +acknowledged. In using the searchlight without shutter throw +the beam in a vertical position and move it through an arc of +180° in a plane at right angles to the line connecting the +two stations until acknowledged. To acknowledge a call, signal +"Acknowledgment" followed by the call letter of the acknowledging +station. +</p> + +<h4>Signaling with Heliograph, Flash Lantern, and Searchlight +(With Shutter).</h4> + +<p class="center"> +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>26.</b> The first position is to turn a steady flash on the +receiving station. The signals are made by short and long +flashes. Use a short flash for dot and a long steady flash for +dash. The elements of a letter should be slightly longer than +in sound signals. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>27.</b> To call a station, make its call letter until +acknowledged. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>28.</b> If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal +A until acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a steady +flash and adjust. When adjustment is satisfactory to the called +station, it will cut off its flash and the calling station will +proceed with its message. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>29.</b> If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror or +light needs adjustment, he will turn on a steady flash until +answered, by a steady flash. When the adjustment is +satisfactory the receiver will cut off his flash and the +sender will resume his message. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 width="414"> +<tr><th>THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE</th></tr> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig034.jpg" width="410" height="685" alt="Fig. 34"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig035.jpg" width="408" height="687" alt="Fig. 35"> +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>30.</b> To break the sending station for other purposes, +turn on a steady flash. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SOUND SIGNALS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>56.</b> Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, +trumpet, and drum may well be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, +or at night. They may be used with the dot and dash code. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In applying the General Service Code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, +or trumpet, one short blast indicates a dot and one long blast +a dash. With the drum, one tap indicates a dot and two taps in +rapid succession a dash. Although these signals can be used with +a dot and dash code, they should be so used in connection with +a preconcerted or conventional code. +</p> + +<h4>Signaling by Two-Arm Semaphore.</h4> + +<p class="center"> +HAND FLAGS. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>43.</b> Signaling by the two-arm semaphore is the most rapid +method of sending spelled-out messages. It is, however, very +liable to error if the motions are slurred over or run together +in an attempt to make speed. Both arms should move rapidly and +simultaneously, but there should be a perceptible pause at the +end of each letter before making the movements for the next +letter. Rapidity is secondary to accuracy. For alphabet see +pages following. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--In making the interval the flags are crossed downward in +front of the body (just above the knees); the double interval +is the "chop-chop" signal made twice; the triple interval is +"chop-chop" signal made three times. In calling a station face +it squarely and make its call. If there is no immediate reply +wave the flags over the head to attract attention, making the call +at frequent intervals. When the sender makes "end of message" the +receiver, if message is understood, extends the flags horizontally +and waves them until the sender does the same, when both leave +their stations. Care must be taken with hand flags to hold the +staffs so as to form a prolongation of the arms. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>LETTER CODES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="center"> +INFANTRY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>47.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand +flags. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=1 cellspacing=0> +<tr><th>Letter of alphabet.</th> + <th>If signaled from the rear to the firing line.</th> + <th>If signaled from the firing line to the rear.</th></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">AM</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Ammunition going forward.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Ammunition required.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">CCC</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Charge (mandatory at all + times).</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Am about to charge if no + instructions to the contrary.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">CF</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Cease firing.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Cease firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">DT</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Double time or "rush."</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Double time or "rush."</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">F</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Commence firing.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">FB</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Fix bayonet.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">FL</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Artillery fire is causing us + losses.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">G</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Move forward.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Preparing to move + forward.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">HHH</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Halt.</td> + <td> </td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">K</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Negative.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Negative.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">LT</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Left.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">O (Ardois and + Semaphore only.)</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">What is the (R. N., + etc.)? Interrogatory.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">What is the (R. N., + etc.)? Interrogatory.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top"> + <b>. . - - . .</b> + (Ardois and Semaphore only.)</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">What is the (R. N., + etc.)? Interrogatory.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">What is the (R. N., + etc.)? Interrogatory.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">P</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Affirmative.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Affirmative.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">RN</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Range.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Range.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">RT</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Right.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">SSS</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Support going + forward.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Support needed.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">SUF</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Suspend firing.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Suspend firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left" valign="top">T</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Target.</td> + <td class="left" valign="top">Target.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center"> +CAVALRY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>48.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand +flags. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AM--</td> + <td valign="top">Ammunition going forward (if signaled from + the rear to the front).<br>Ammunition required (If signaled + from the front).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CCC--</td> + <td valign="top">Charge (if signaled rear the rear to the + front).<br>About to charge if no instructions to the + contrary (if signaled from the front).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CF--</td> + <td valign="top">Cease firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">DT--</td> + <td valign="top">Double time, rush, or hurry.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">F--</td> + <td valign="top">Commence firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">FL--</td> + <td valign="top">Artillery fire is causing us + losses.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">G--</td> + <td valign="top">Move forward (if signaled from the rear + to the front). Preparing to move forward (if signaled from + the front).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">HHH--</td> + <td valign="top">Halt.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">K--</td> + <td valign="top">Negative.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LT--</td> + <td>Left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">M--</td> + <td valign="top">Bring up the horses (if signaled from front + to rear). Horses going forward (if signaled from rear + to front).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">O--</td> + <td valign="top">What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. + (Ardois and semaphore only.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top"> + <b>. . - - . .--</b></td> + <td valign="top">What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. + (All methods but ardois and semaphore.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">P--</td> + <td valign="top">Affirmative.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">R--</td> + <td valign="top">Acknowledgment.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RN--</td> + <td valign="top">Range.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RT--</td> + <td valign="top">Right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SSS--</td> + <td valign="top">Support going forward (if signaled from + the rear to the front). Support needed (if signaled + from the front).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SUF--</td> + <td valign="top">Suspend firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">T--</td> + <td valign="top">Target.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center"> +FIELD ARTILLERY. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +<b>49.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand +flags. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top"> + <b>. . . . . . . .</b>--</td> + <td valign="top">Error. (All methods but ardois and + semaphore.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">A--</td> + <td valign="top">Error. (Ardois and semaphore only.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AD--</td> + <td valign="top">Additional.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AKT--</td> + <td valign="top">Draw ammunition from combat tram.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AL--</td> + <td valign="top">Draw ammunition from limbers.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AM--</td> + <td valign="top">Ammunition going forward.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AMC--</td> + <td valign="top">At my command.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">AP--</td> + <td valign="top">Aiming point.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">B (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">Battery (so many) rounds.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">BS (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">(Such.) Battalion station.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">BL--</td> + <td valign="top">Battery from the left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">BR--</td> + <td valign="top">Battery from the right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CCC--</td> + <td valign="top">Charge (mandatory at all times). Am + about to charge if not instructed to contrary.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CF--</td> + <td valign="top">Cease firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CS--</td> + <td valign="top">Close station.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">CT--</td> + <td valign="top">Change target.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">D--</td> + <td valign="top">Down.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">DF--</td> + <td valign="top">Deflection.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">DT--</td> + <td valign="top">Double time. Rush. Hurry.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">F--</td> + <td valign="top">Commence firing.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">FCL (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 1st piece close by (so much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">FL--</td> + <td valign="top">Artillery fire is causing us + losses.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">FOP (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 1st piece open by (so much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">G--</td> + <td valign="top">Move forward. Preparing to move + forward.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">HHH--</td> + <td valign="top">Halt. Action suspended.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">IX--</td> + <td valign="top">Execute. Go ahead. Transmit.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">JI--</td> + <td valign="top">Report firing data.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">K--</td> + <td valign="top">Negative. No.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">KR--</td> + <td valign="top">Corrector.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">L--</td> + <td valign="top">Preparatory. Attention.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LCL (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 4th piece close by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LOP (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 4th piece open by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LT--</td> + <td valign="top">Left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LL--</td> + <td valign="top">Left from the left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LR--</td> + <td valign="top">Left from the right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">LE (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">Left (so much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">MD--</td> + <td valign="top">Move down.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">ML--</td> + <td valign="top">Move to your left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">MR--</td> + <td valign="top">Move to your right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">MU--</td> + <td valign="top">Move up.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">MO (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">Move (so much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">N--</td> + <td valign="top">Annul, cancel.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">O--</td> + <td valign="top">What is the (R. N., etc.)? + Interrogatory. (Ardois and semaphore only.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top"> + <b>. . - - . .</b>--</td> + <td valign="top">What is the (R. N.. etc.)? + Interrogatory. (All methods but ardois and + semaphore.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">P--</td> + <td valign="top">Affirmative. Yes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">PS--</td> + <td valign="top">Percussion. Shrapnel.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">QRQ--</td> + <td valign="top">Send faster.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">QRS--</td> + <td valign="top">Send slower.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">QRT--</td> + <td valign="top">Cease sending.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">R--</td> + <td valign="top">Acknowledgment. Received.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RS--</td> + <td valign="top">Regimental station.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RL--</td> + <td valign="top">Right from the left.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RR--</td> + <td valign="top">Right from the right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RN--</td> + <td valign="top">Range.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">RT--</td> + <td valign="top">Right.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">S--</td> + <td valign="top">Subtract.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SCL + (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 2d piece close by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SOP + (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 2d piece open by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SH--</td> + <td valign="top">Shell.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SI--</td> + <td valign="top">Site.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">SSS--</td> + <td valign="top">Support needed.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">T--</td> + <td valign="top">Target.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">TCL + (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 3d piece close by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">TOP + (numerals)--</td> + <td valign="top">On 3d piece open by (so + much).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">U--</td> + <td valign="top">Up.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="right" valign="top">Y (letter)--</td> + <td valign="top">Such battery station.</td></tr> +</table> + +<h2><a name="XIII">CHAPTER XIII.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +FIRST AID RULES. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The bandages and dressings contained in the first-aid packet +have been so treated as to destroy any germs thereon. Therefore, +when dressing a wound, be careful not to touch or handle that +part of the dressing which is to be applied to the wound. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A sick or injured person should always be made to lie down on his +back, if practicable, as this is the most comfortable position, +and all muscles may be relaxed. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="308" class="left"> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig036.jpg" width="304" height="312" alt="Fig. 36"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center">FIG. 1.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +All tight articles of clothing and equipment should be loosened, +so as not to interfere with breathing or the circulation of the +blood. Belts, collars, and the trousers at the waist should be +opened. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Don't let mere onlookers crowd about the patient. They prevent +him from getting fresh air and also make him nervous and excited. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In case of injury the heart action is generally weak from shock, +and the body, therefore, grows somewhat cold. So don't remove +any more clothing than is necessary to expose the injury. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Cut or rip the clothing, but don't pull it. Try to disturb the +patient as little as possible. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Don't touch a wound with your fingers or a handkerchief, or with +anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wash the wound +with water, as you may infect it. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Don't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) unless +ordered to do so by a doctor. While in a few cases stimulants +are of benefit, in a great many cases they do positive harm, +especially where there has been any bleeding. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The heart may be considered as a pump and the arteries as a rubber +hose, which carry the blood from the heart to every part of the +body. The veins are the hose which carry the blood back to the +heart. Every wound bleeds some, but, unless a large artery or +a large vein is cut, the bleeding will stop after a short while +if the patient is kept quiet and the first-aid dressing is bound +over the wound so as to make pressure on it. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 class="center"> +<tr><td class="center"> +<img src="fig037.jpg" width="388" height="398" alt="Fig. 37"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center">FIG. 2.</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +When a large artery is cut the blood gushes out in spurts every +time the heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop the +flow of blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere between the +heart and the leak. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the leak is in the arm or hand, apply pressure as in figure +1. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the leak is in the leg, apply pressure as in figure 2. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +If the leak is in the shoulder or armpit, apply pressure as in +figure 3. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The reason for this is that at the places indicated the arteries +may be pressed against a bone more easily than at any other places. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="246" class="left"> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig038.jpg" width="242" height="301" alt="Fig. 39"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center">FIG. 3.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +Another way of applying pressure (by means of a tourniquet) is +shown in figure 4. Place a pad of tightly rolled cloth or paper, +or any suitable object, over the artery. Tie a bandage loosely +about the limb and then insert your bayonet, or a stick, and +twist up the bandage until the pressure of the pad on the artery +stops the leak. Twist the bandage slowly and stop as soon as +the blood ceases to flow, in order not to bruise the flesh or +muscles unnecessarily. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A tourniquet may cause pain and swelling of the limb, and it +left on too long may cause the limb to die. Therefore, about +every half hour or so, loosen the bandage very carefully, but if +the bleeding continues pressure must be applied again. In this +case apply the pressure with the thumb for five or ten minutes, +as this cuts off only the main artery and leaves some of the +smaller arteries and the veins free to restore some of the +circulation. When a tourniquet is painful, it is too tight and +should be carefully loosened a little. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +It the leg or arm is held upright, this also helps to reduce +the bleeding in these parts, because the heart then has to pump +the blood uphill. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A broken bone is called a fracture. The great danger in the case +of a fracture is that the sharp, jagged edges of the bones may +stick through the flesh and skin, or tear and bruise the arteries, +veins, and muscles. If the skin is not broken, a fracture is +not so serious, as no germs can get in. <b>Therefore never move a +person with a broken bone until the fracture has been so fixed +that the broken ends of the bone can not move.</b> +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 class="center"> +<tr><td class="center"> +<img src="fig039.jpg" width="408" height="462" alt="Fig. 39"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center">FIG. 4.--Improvised tourniquet.</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +If the leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and if +necessary pull upon the end firmly to get the bones in place. +Then bind the limb firmly to a splint to hold it in place. A +splint may be made of any straight, stiff material--a shingle +or piece of board, a bayonet, a rifle, a straight branch of a +tree, etc. Whatever material you use must be well padded on the +side next to the limb. Be careful never to place the bandages +over the fracture, but always above and below. (Figs. 5, 6, 7, +8.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Many surgeons think that the method of binding a broken leg to +the well one, and of binding the arm to the body, is the best +plan in the field as being the quickest and one that serves the +immediate purpose. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="center" valign="bottom"> + <img src="fig040.jpg" width="181" height="299" alt="Fig. 40"> +</td><td class="center" valign="bottom"> + <img src="fig041.jpg" width="258" height="311" alt="Fig. 41"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center" valign="top">FIG. 5.</td> + <td class="center" valign="top">FIG. 6.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +With wounds about the body the chest and abdomen you must not +meddle except to protect them when possible without much handling +with the materials of the packet. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +FAINTING, SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat exhaustion are very +similar. The face is pale, the skin cool and moist, the pulse is +weak, and generally the patient is unconscious. Keep the patient +quiet, resting on his back, with his head low. Loosen the clothing, +but keep the patient warm, and give stimulants (whisky, hot coffee, +tea, etc.). +</p> + +<p class="center"> +SUNSTROKE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, the skin is dry +and very hot, and the pulse is full and strong. In this case +place the patient in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make +every effort to lessen the heat in the body by cold applications +to the head and surface generally. Do not, under any circumstances, +give any stimulants or hot drinks. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="center" valign="bottom"> + <img src="fig042.jpg" width="130" height="613" alt="Fig. 42"> +</td><td class="center" valign="bottom"> + <img src="fig043.jpg" width="133" height="386" alt="Fig. 43"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center" valign="top">FIG. 7.</td> + <td class="center" valign="top">FIG. 7.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center"> +FREEZING AND FROSTBITE. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The part frozen, which looks white or bluish white, and is cold, +should be very slowly raised in temperature by brisk but careful +rubbing in a cool place and never near a fire. Stimulants are to +be given cautiously when the patient can swallow, and followed by +small amounts of warm liquid nourishment. The object is to restore +the circulation of the blood and the natural warmth gradually and +not violently. Care and patience are necessary to do this. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +RESUSCITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In the instruction of the Army in First Aid the method of +resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as described by "Schaefer," +will be taught instead of the "Sylvester Method," heretofore +used. The Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also +applicable in cases of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and +of the failure of respiration following concussion of the brain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Being under water for four of five minutes is generally fatal, +but an effort to revive the apparently drowned should always +be made, unless it is known that the body has been under water +for a very long time. The attempt to revive the patient should +not be delayed for the purpose of removing his clothes or placing +him in the ambulance. Begin the procedure as soon as he is out +of the water, on the shore or in the boat. The first and most +important thing is to start artificial respiration without delay. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out +by one person without assistance, and because its procedure is +not exhausting to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, +to continue it for one or two hours. When it is known that a +person has been under water for but a few minutes continue the +artificial respiration for at least one and a half to two hours +before considering the case hopeless. Once the patient has begun to +breathe watch carefully to see that he does not stop again. Should +the breathing be very faint, or should he stop breathing, assist +him again with artificial respiration. After he starts breathing +do not lift him nor permit him to stand until the breathing has +become full and regular. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him face +to the ground, clasp your hands under his waist, and raise the +body so any water may drain out of the air passages while the +head remains low. (Figure 9.) +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 class="center"> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig044.jpg" width="322" height="628" alt="Fig. 44"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"> +FIG. 9.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Inspiration. +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his body +beyond his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and +nose do not touch the ground. This position causes the tongue to +fall forward of its own weight and so prevents its falling back +into the air passages. Turning the head to one side prevents the +face coming into contact with mud or water during the operation. +This position also facilitates the removal from the mouth of +foreign bodies, such as tobacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., +and favors the expulsion of mucus, blood, vomitus, serum, or +any liquid that may be in the air passages. +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 class="center"> +<tr><td class="center"> + <img src="fig045.jpg" width="324" height="631" alt="Fig. 45"> +</td></tr> +<tr><td class="center"> +FIG. 10.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Expiration. +</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient's thighs, +and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, with +his thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his hands so +that the little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands +are on the pelvic bones the object of the work is defeated; hence +the bones of the pelvis are first located in order to avoid them. +The hands must be free from the pelvis and resting on the lowest +rib. By operating on the bare back it is easier to locate the +lower ribs and avoid the pelvis. The nearer the ends of the ribs +the hands are placed without sliding off the better. The hands +are thus removed from the spine, the fingers being nearly out +of sight. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the +heels (thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the +weight coming straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy +to bend the arms at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because +the muscles of the back are stronger than the muscles of the +arms. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought +from his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. +This weight is gradually increased until at the end of the three +seconds of vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient +the force is felt to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then +the weight is suddenly removed. If there is danger of not returning +the hands to the right position again, they can remain lightly +in place; but it is usually better to remove the hands entirely. +If the operator is light and the patient an overweight adult, +he can utilize over 80 per cent of his weight by raising his +knees from the ground and supporting himself entirely on his +toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly placed on +the ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner +he can work as effectively as a heavy man. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +A light feather or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin +and held near the nose by some one will indicate by its movements +whether or not there is a current of air going and coming with +each forced expiration and spontaneous inspiration. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The +rate of operation should not exceed this. The lungs must be +thoroughly emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling +takes care of itself. Pressure and release of pressure--one complete +respiration--occupies about five seconds. If the operator is +alone, he can be guided in each act by his own deep, regular +respiration or by counting or by his watch lying by his side. +If comrades are present, he can be advised by them. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The duration of the efforts as artificial respiration should +ordinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any +evidences of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, +or movements. There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 +minutes in patients who will recover from electric shock, but +where there is doubt the patient should be given the benefit +of the doubt. In drowning, especially, recoveries are on record +after two hours or more of unconsciousness; hence, the Schaefer +method, being easy of operation, is more likely to be persisted +in. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and +held continuously within 3 inches of the face and nose. If other +ammonia preparations are used, they should be diluted or held +farther away. Try it on your own nose first. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him +not to bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them +might be broken. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while +unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot-water bottles as soon +as they can be obtained. +</p> + +<h2><a name="XIV">CHAPTER XIV.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +LAWS AND REGULATIONS. +</p> + +<h3>Section 1. General Provisions.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The Army of the United States is governed by certain laws called +"The Articles of War" and certain regulations called "Army +Regulations." +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The following list includes the offenses most often committed +by soldiers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather +than viciousness. Violations of any rule or regulation should +be carefully guarded against, since they not only subject the +offender to punishment, but also bring discredit on his comrades, +his organization, and on the military profession: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. Selling, pawning, or, through neglect, losing or spoiling +any Government property, such as uniforms, blankets, equipment, +ammunition, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. Disobedience of the orders of any officer or noncommissioned +officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. Disrespect to an officer or noncommissioned officer. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. Absence from camp without leave. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. Absence from any drill, formation, or other duty without +authority. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +6. Drunkenness on duty or off duty, whether in camp or when absent +either with or without leave. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +7. Bringing liquor into camp. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +8. Noisy or disorderly conduct in camp or when absent either with +or without leave. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +9. Entering on private property, generally for the purpose of +stealing fruit, etc. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +10. Negligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, +particularly while on guard or as a sentinel over prisoners. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +11. Wearing an unauthorized uniform or wearing the uniform in +an improper manner. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +12. Urinating in or around camp. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +13. Falling to salute properly. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +14. Disrespect or affront to a sentinel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +15. Abuse or neglect of his horse. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"The basic principles of the combat tactics of the different arms +are set forth in the Drill Regulations of those arms for units as +high as brigades," (<i>Preface, Field Service Regulations</i>.) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +"The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide +the principles for training and for increasing the probability +of success in battle. In the interpretation of the regulations +the spirit must be sought. Quibbling over the minutæ of form is +indicative of failure to grasp the spirit," (<i>Paragraph 4, +Infantry Drill Regulations.</i>) +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Field Service Regulations govern all arms of the Army of the United +States." +</p> + +<h3>Section 2. The Army of the United States</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The Army of the United States shall consist of the Regular Army, +the Volunteer Army, the Officers' Reserve Corps, the Enlisted +Reserve Corps, the National Guard while in the service of the United +States, and such other land forces as are now or may hereafter +be authorized by law. (Sec. 1, act of June 3, 1916.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned +officers.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The following are the grades of rank of officers and noncommissioned +officers: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +1. Lieutenant general. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +2. Major general. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +3. Brigadier general. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +4. Colonel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +5. Lieutenant colonel. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +6. Major. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +7. Captain. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +8. First lieutenant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +9. Second lieutenant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +10. Aviator, Signal Corps. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +11. Cadet. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +12. (<i>a</i>) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major, +senior grade, Coast Artillery Corps; (<i>b</i>) quartermaster +sergeant, senior grade, Quartermaster Corps; master hospital +sergeant, Medical Department; master engineer, senior grade, +Corps of Engineers; master electrician, Coast Artillery Corps; +master signal electrician; band lender; (<i>c</i>) hospital +sergeant, Medical Department; master engineer, junior grade, +Corps of Engineers; engineer, Coast Artillery Corps. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +13. Ordnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermaster +Corps; supply sergeant, regimental. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +14. Sergeant-major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major, +junior grade, Coast Artillery Corps; supply sergeant, battalion, +Corps of Engineers. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +15. (<i>a</i>) First sergeant; (<i>b</i>) sergeant, first class, +Medical Department; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; +sergeant, first class, Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first +class, Signal Corps; electrician sergeant, first class, Coast +Artillery Corps; electrician sergeant, Artillery Detachment, +United States Military Academy; assistant engineer, Coast +Artillery Corps; (<i>c</i>) master gunner, Coast Artillery +Corps; master gunner, Artillery Detachment, United States +Military Academy; band sergeant and assistant leader, United +States Military Academy band; assistant band leader; sergeant +bugler; electrician sergeant, second class, Coast Artillery +Corps; electrician sergeant, second class, Artillery +Detachment, United States Military Academy; radio sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +16. Color sergeant. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +17. Sergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant; stable +sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +18. Corporal. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +In each grade and subgrade date of commission, appointment, or +warrant determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph. 9 Army +Regulations, 1913.) +</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned +officers.</h3> + +<p class="indent"> +The insignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps, shoulder +loops, or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat) of +officers are as follows: +</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 class="center"> +<tr><td class="left">General: Coat of arms and two + stars.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Lieutenant general: One large star and two + smaller ones.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Major general: Two silver stars.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Brigadier general: One silver + star.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Colonel: One silver spread eagle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Lieutenant colonel: One silver + leaf.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Major: One gold leaf.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">Captain: Two silver bars.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="left">First lieutenant: One silver + bar.</td></tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p class="indent"> +The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated by chevrons +worn on the sleeve. +</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War.</h3> + +<p class="center"> +(Relating to enlisted men.) +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND EXPLAINED.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 110. Articles 1, 2, and 29, 54 to 96, inclusive, and 104 +to 109, inclusive, shall be read and explained to every soldier +at the time of his enlistment or muster in, or within six days +thereafter, and shall be read and explained once every six months +to the soldiers of every garrison, regiment, or company in the +service of the United States. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DEFINITIONS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ARTICLE 1. The following words when used in these articles shall +be construed in the sense indicated in this article, unless the +context shows that a different sense is intended, namely: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a +commissioned officer; +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) The word "soldier" shall be construed as including a +noncommissioned officer, a private, or any other enlisted man; +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) The word "company" shall be understood as including a +troop or battery; and +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) The word "battalion" shall be understood as including +a squadron. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 2. The following persons are subject to these articles and +shall be understood as included in the term "any person subject +to military law" or "persons subject to military law" whenever +used in these articles: <i>Provided</i>, That nothing contained +in this act, except as specifically provided in article 2, +subparagraph (<i>c</i>), shall be construed to apply to any +person under the United States naval jurisdiction, unless +otherwise specifically provided by law: +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>a</i>) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regular +Army of the United States; all volunteers, from the dates of +their muster or acceptance into the military service of the +United States; and all other persons lawfully called, drafted, +or ordered into or to duty or for training in the said service, +from the dates they are required by the terms of the call, +draft, or order to obey the same. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>b</i>) Cadets. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>c</i>) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when +detached for service with the armies of the United States by +order of the President: <i>Provided</i>, That an officer soldier +of the Marine Corps when so detached may be tried by military +court-martial for an offense committed against the laws for the +government of the naval service prior to his detachment, and for +an offense committed against these articles he may be tried by +a naval court-martial after such detachment ceases. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>d</i>) All retainers to the camp and all persons accompanying +or serving with the armies of the United States without the +territorial jurisdiction of the United States, and in time of war +all such retainers and persons accompanying or serving with the +armies of the United States in the field, both within and without +the territorial jurisdiction of the United States, though not +otherwise subject to these articles. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>e</i>) All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martial. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +(<i>f</i>) All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers +Home at Washington. D. C. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 29. Any soldier who, without having first received a regular +discharge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia when +in the service of the United States, or in the Navy or Marine +Corps of the United States, or in any foreign army, shall be +deemed to have deserted the service of the United States; and, +where enlistment is in one of the forces of the United States +mentioned above, to have fraudulently enlisted therein. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 54. Any person who shall procure himself to be enlisted in +the military service of the United States by means of willful +misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications for +enlistment, and shall receive pay or allowances under such +enlistment, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 55. Any officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the +military service any person whose enlistment or muster in is +prohibited by law, regulation, or orders shall be dismissed from +the service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial +may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MUSTER ROLLS--FALSE MUSTER.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 56. At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery, or company +the commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer +certificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers +have been absent and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding +officer of every troop, battery, or company shall give like +certificates, stating how long absent noncommissioned officers +and private soldiers have been absent and the reasons of their +absence. Such reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in +the muster rolls opposite the names of the respective absent +officers and soldiers, and the certificates, together with the +muster rolls, shall be transmitted by the mustering officer to +the Department of War as speedily as the distance of the place +and muster will admit. Any officer who knowingly makes a false +muster of man or animal, or who signs or directs or allows the +signing of any muster roll knowing the same to contain false +muster or false statement as to the absence or pay of an officer +or soldier, or who wrongfully takes money or other consideration +on mustering in a regiment, company, or other organization, or +on signing muster rolls, or who knowingly musters as an officer +or soldier a person who is not such officer or soldier, shall +be dismissed from the service and suffer such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>FALSE RETURNS--OMISSION TO RENDER RETURNS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 57. Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent +troop, battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the beginning +of every month, transmit, through the proper channels, to the +War Department an exact return of the same, specifying the names +of the officers then absent from their posts, with the reasons +for and the time of their absence. Every officer whose duty it +is to render to the War Department or other superior authority +a return of the state of the troops under his command, or of the +arms, ammunition, clothing, funds, or other property thereunto +belonging, who knowingly makes a false return thereof shall be +dismissed from the service and suffer such other punishment as +a court-martial may direct. And any officer who, through neglect +or design, omits to render such return shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DESERTION.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 58. Any person subject to military law who deserts or attempts +to desert the service of the United States shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct, and, if the offense be committed +at any other time, any punishment, excepting death, that a +court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 59. Any person subject to military law who advises or persuades +or knowingly assists another to desert the service of the United +States shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct, +and if the offense be committed at any other time any punishment, +excepting death, that a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ENTERTAINING A DESERTER.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 60. Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier +in his command is a deserter from the military or naval service +or from the Marine Corps, retains such deserter in his command +without informing superior authority or the commander of the +organization to which the deserter belongs, shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 61. Any person subject to military law who fails to repair +at the fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, or +goes from the same without proper leave, or absents himself from +his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper +leave, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DISRESPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT, VICE PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, +SECRETARY OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 62. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words +against the President, Vice President, the Congress of the United +States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or legislature of +any State, Territory, or other possession of the United States +in which he is quartered shall be dismissed from the service +or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +Any other person subject to military law who so offends shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 63. Any person subject to military law who behaves himself +with disrespect toward his superior officer shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 64. Any person subject to military law who, on any pretense +whatsoever, strikes his superior officer or draws or lifts up any +weapon or offers any violence against him, being in the execution +of his office, or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his +superior officer, shall suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 65. Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who attempts +or threatens to strike or assault, or willfully disobeys the +lawful order of a noncommissioned officer while in the execution +of his office, or uses threatening or insulting language, or +behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner toward a +noncommissioned officer while in the execution of his office, +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MUTINY OR SEDITION.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 66. Any person subject to military law who attempts to create +or who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any mutiny or sedition +in any company, party, post, camp detachment, guard, or other +command shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>FAILURE TO SUPPRESS MUTINY OR SEDITION.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 67. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny +or sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the +same, or knowing or having reason to believe that a mutiny or +sedition is to take place, does not without delay give information +thereof to his commanding officer shall suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 68. All officers and noncommissioned officers have power to +part and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders among persons +subject to military law and to order officers who take part in the +same into arrest, and other persons subject to military law who +take part in the same into arrest or confinement, as circumstances +may require, until their proper superior officer is acquainted +therewith. And whosoever, being so ordered, refuses to obey such +officer or noncommissioned officer or draws a weapon upon or +otherwise threatens or does violence to him shall be punished +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ARREST OR CONFINEMENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 69. An officer charged with crime or with a serious offense +under these articles shall be placed in arrest by the commanding +officer, and in exceptional cases an officer so charged may be +placed in confinement by the same authority. A soldier charged +with crime or with a serious offense under these articles shall +be placed in confinement, and when charged with a minor offense +he may be placed in arrest. Any other person subject to military +law charged with crime or with a serious offense under these +articles shall be placed in confinement or in arrest, as +circumstances may require; and when charged with a minor offense +such person may be placed in arrest. Any person placed in arrest +under the provisions of this article shall thereby be restricted +to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such limits shall be +enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks his arrest +or who escapes from confinement before he is set at liberty by +proper authority shall be dismissed from the service or suffer +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and any +other person subject to military law who escapes from confinement +or who breaks his arrest before he is set at liberty by proper +authority shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION UPON CHARGES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 70. No person put in arrest shall be continued in confinement +more than eight days, or until such time as a court-martial can +be assembled. When any person is put in arrest for the purpose of +trial, except at remote military posts or stations, the officer +by whose order he is arrested shall see that a copy of the charges +on which he is to be tried is served upon him within eight days +after his arrest, and that he is brought to trial within 10 days +thereafter, unless the necessities of the service prevent such +trial; and then he shall be brought to trial within 30 days after +the expiration of said 10 days. If a copy of the charges be not +served, or the arrested person be not brought to trial, as herein +required, the arrest shall cease. But persons released from arrest, +under the provisions of this article, may be tried, whenever +the exigencies of the service shall permit, within 12 months +after such release from arrest: <i>Provided</i>, That in time +of peace no person shall, against his objection, be brought to +trial before a general court-martial within a period of five +days subsequent to the service of charles upon him. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEP PRISONERS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 71. No provost marshal or commander of a guard shall refute +to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an +officer belonging to the forces of the United States, provided +the officer committing shall, at the time, deliver an account +in writing, signed by himself, of the crime or offense charged +against the prisoner. Any officer or soldier so refusing shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>REPORT OF PRISONERS RECEIVED.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 72. Every commander of a guard to whose charge a prisoner +is committed shall, within 24 hours after such confinement, or +as soon as he is relieved from his guard, report in writing to +the commanding officer the name of such prisoner, the offense +charged against him, and the name of the officer committing him; +and if he fails to make such report he shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>RELEASING PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 73. Any person subject to military law who, without proper +authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his charge, or +who, through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner so committed +to escape, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 74. When any person subject to military law, except one +who is held by the military authorities to answer, or who is +awaiting trial or result of trial, or who is undergoing sentence +for a crime or offense punishable under these articles, is accused +of a crime or offense committed within the geographical limits +of the States of the Union and the District of Columbia, and +punishable by the laws of the land, the commanding officer is +required, except in time of war, upon application duly made, +to use his utmost endeavor to deliver over such accused person +to the civil authorities, or to aid the officers, of justice in +apprehending and securing him, in order that he may be brought +to trial. Any commanding officer who upon such application refuses +or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver over such +accused person to the civil authorities or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him shall be dismissed from +the service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial +may direct. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +When under the provisions of this article delivery is made to +the civll authorities of an offender undergoing sentence of a +court-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction, shall +be held to interrupt the execution of the sentence of the +court-martial, and the offender shall be returned to military +custody, after having answered to the civil authorities for his +offense, for the completion of the said court-martial sentence. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 75. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before +the enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or delivers up any +fort, post, camp, guard, or other command which it is his duty +to defend, or speaks words inducing others to do the like, or +casts away his arms or ammunition, or quits his post or colors +to plunder or pillage, or by any means whatsoever occasions false +alarms in camp, garrison, or quarters, shall suffer death or +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>SUBORDINATES COMPELLING COMMANDER TO SURRENDER.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 76. If any commander of any garrison, fort, post, camp, +guard, or other command is compelled by the officers or soldiers +under his command to give it up to the enemy or to abandon it, +the officers or soldiers so offending shall suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>IMPROPER USE OF COUNTERSIGN.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 77. Any person subject to military law who makes known the +parole or countersign to any person not entitled to receive it +according to the rules and discipline of war, or gives a parole +or countersign different from that which he received, shall, if +the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>FORCING A SAFEGUARD.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 78. Any person subject to military law who, in time of war, +forces a safeguard shall suffer death or such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>CAPTURED PROPERTY TO BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SERVICE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 79. All public property taken from the enemy is the property +of the United States and shall be secured for the service of the +United States, and any person subject to military law who neglects +to secure such property or is guilty of wrongful application +thereof shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DEALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 80. Any person subject to military law who buys, sells, +trades, or in any way deals in or disposes of captured or abandoned +property, whereby he shall receive or expect any profit, benefit, or +advantage to himself or to any other person directly or indirectly +connected with himself, or who falls whenever such property comes +into his possession or custody or within his control to give notice +thereof to the proper authority and to turn over such property to +the proper authority without delay, shall, on conviction thereof, +be punished by fine or imprisonment, or by such other punishment as +a court-martial, military commission, or other military tribunal +may adjudge, or by any or all of said penalties. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>RELIEVING, CORRESPONDING WITH, OR AIDING THE ENEMY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 81. Whosoever relieves the enemy with arms, ammunition, +supplies, money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects +or holds correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, +either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other +punishment as a court-martial or military commission may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>SPIES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 82. Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking +or acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts, +quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, +or elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court-martial or by a +military commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer +death. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MILITARY PROPERTY--WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS, DAMAGE, OR +WRONGFUL DISPOSITION OF.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 83. Any person subject to military law who willfully or +through neglect suffers to be lost, spoiled, damaged, or wrongfully +disposed of any military property belonging to the United States +shall make good the loss or damage and suffer such punishment +as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OF MILITARY PROPERTY ISSUED TO +SOLDIERS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 84. Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of or willfully +or through neglect injures or loses any horse, arms, ammunition, +accouterments, equipments, clothing, or other property issued for +use in the military service shall be punished as a court-martial +may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DRUNK ON DUTY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 85. Any officer who is found drunk on duty shall, if the +offense be committed in time of war, be dismissed from the service +and suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; +and if the offense be committed in time of peace he shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. Any person subject to +military law, except un officer, who is found drunk on duty shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MISBEHAVIOR OF SENTINEL.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 86. Any sentinel who is found drunk or sleeping upon his +post, or who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall, +if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if the offense +be committed in time of pence he shall suffer any punishment, +except death, that a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>PERSONAL INTEREST IN SALE OF PROVISIONS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 87. Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, barracks, +camp, or other place where troops of the United States may be serving +who, for his private advantage, lays any duty or imposition upon +or is interested in the sale of any victuals or other necessaries +of life brought into such garrison, fort, barracks, camp, or +other place for the use of the troops, shall be dismissed from +the service and suffer such other Punishment as a court-martial +may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>INTIMIDATION OF PERSONS BRINGING PROVISIONS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 88. Any person subject to military law who abuses, intimidates, +does violence to, or wrongfully interferes with any person bringing +provisions, supplies, or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, +or quarters of the forces of the United States shall suffer such +punishment as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>GOOD ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 89. All persons subject to military law are to behave themselves +orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the march; and any +person subject to military law who commits any waste or spoil, +or willfully destroys any property whatsoever (unless by order +of his commanding officer), or commits any kind of depredation +or riot, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. Any +commanding officer who, upon complaint made to him, refuses or +omits to see reparation made to the party injured, in so far as +the offender's pay shall go toward such reparation, as provided +for in article 105, shall be dismissed from the service or otherwise +punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>PROVOKING SPEECHES OR GESTURES</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 90. No person subject to military law shall use any reproachful +or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any person +subject to military law who offends against the provisions of +this article shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DUELING.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 91. Any person subject to military law who fights or promotes +or is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or who having +knowledge of a challenge sent or about to be sent fails to report +the fact promptly to the proper authority, shall, if an officer, +be dismissed from the service or suffer such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct; and if any other person subject +to military law shall suffer such punishment as a court-martial +may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>MURDER-RAPE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 92. Any person subject to military law who commits murder +or rape shall suffer death or imprisonment for life, as a +court-martial may direct; but no person shall be tried by +court-martial for murder or rape committed within the geographical +limits of the States of the Union and the District of Columbia +in time of peace. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>VARIOUS CRIMES.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 93. Any person subject to military law who commits manslaughter, +mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery, larceny, embezzlement, perjury, +assault with intent to commit any felony, or assault with intent +to do bodily harm, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 94. Any person subject to military law who makes or causes +to be made any claim against the United States or any officer +thereof, knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil +or military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim +against the United States or any officer thereof, knowing such +claim to be false or fraudulent; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United +States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance +or payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, +or procures, or advises the making or use of, any writing or +other paper, knowing the same to contain any false or fraudulent +statements; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or any officer thereof, makes, or procures, or +advises the making of, any oath to any fact or to any writing +or other paper, knowing such oath to be false; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, +the approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the +United States or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, +or procures, or advises the forging or counterfeiting of any +signature upon any writing or other paper, or uses, or procures, +or advises the use of any such signature, knowing the same to +be forged or counterfeited; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who, having charge, possession, custody, or control of any money +or other property of the United States, furnished or intended +for the military service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes +to be delivered, to any person having authority to receive the +same, any amount thereof less than that for which he receives +a certificate or receipt; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying +the receipt of any property of the United States furnished or +intended for the military service thereof, makes or delivers +to any person such writing, without having full knowledge of +the truth of the statements therein contained and with intent +to defraud the United States; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who steals, embezzles, knowingly and willfully misappropriates, +applies to his own use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly +sells or disposes of any ordnance, arms, equipments, ammunition, +clothing, subsistence stores, money, or other property of the +United States furnished or intended for the military service +thereof; or +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Who knowingly purchases or receives in pledge for any obligation +or indebtedness from any soldier, officer, or other person who is +a part of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, +arms, equipment, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or +other property of the United States, such soldier, officer, or +other person not having lawful right to sell or pledge the same; +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, +or by such other punishment as a court-martial may adjudge, or +by any or all of said penalties. And if any person, being guilty +of any of the offenses aforesaid while in the military service +of the United States, receives his discharge or is dismissed +from the service, he shall continue to be liable to be arrested +and held for trial and sentence by a court-martial in the same +manner and to the same extent as if he had not received such +discharge nor been dismissed. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND GENTLEMAN.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 95. Any officer or cadet who is convicted of conduct unbecoming +an officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>GENERAL ARTICLE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 96. Though not mentioned in these articles, all disorders and +neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, +all conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military +service, and all crimes or offenses not capital of which persons +subject to military law may be guilty shall be taken cognizance +of by a general or special or summary court-martial, according +to the nature and degree of the offense, and punished at the +discretion of such court. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>DISCIPLINARY POWERS OF COMMANDING OFFICERS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 104. Under such regulations as the President may prescribe, +and which he may from time to time revoke, alter, or add to, +the commanding officer of any detachment, company, or higher +command may, for minor offences not denied by the accused, impose +disciplinary punishments upon persons of his command without +the intervention of a court-martial, unless the accused demands +trial by court-martial. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +The disciplinary punishments authorized by this article may include +admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges, extra fatigue, +and restriction to certain specified limits, but shall not include +forfeiture of pay or confinement under guard. A person punished +under authority fit this article who deems his punishment unjust +or disproportionate to the offense may, through the proper channel, +appeal to the next superior authority, but may in the meantime +be required to undergo the punishment adjudged. The commanding +officer who imposes the punishment, his successor in command, +and superior authority shall have power to mitigate or remit +any unexecuted portion of the punishment. The imposition and +enforcement of disciplinary punishment under authority of this +article for any act or omission shall not be a bar to trial by +court-martial for a crime or offense growing out of the same +act or omission; but the fact that a disciplinary punishment +has been enforced may be shown by the accused upon trial, and +when so shown shall be considered in determining the measure of +punishment to be adjudged in the event of a finding of guilty. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>REDRESS OF INJURIES TO PERSON OR PROPERTY.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 105. Whenever complaint is made to any commanding officer +that damage has been done to the property of any person or that +his property has been wrongfully taken by persons subject to +military law, such complaint shall be investigated by a board +consisting of any number of officers from one to three, which +board shall be convened by the commanding officer and shall have, +for the purpose of such investigation, power to summon witnesses +and examine them upon oath or affirmation, to receive depositions +or other documentary evidence, and to assess the damages sustained +against the responsible parties. The assessment of damages made +by such board shall be subject to the approval of the commanding +officer, and in the amount approved by him shall be stopped against +the pay of the offenders. And the order of such commanding officer +directing stoppages herein authorized shall be conclusive on any +disbursing officer for the payment by him to the injured parties +of the stoppages so ordered. +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +Where the offenders can not be ascertained but the organization +or detachment to which they belong is known, stoppages to the +amount of damages inflicted may be made and assessed in such +proportion as may be deemed just upon the individual members +thereof who are shown to have been present with such organization +or detachment at the time the damages complained of were inflicted, +as determined by the approved findings of the board. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>ARREST OF DESERTERS BY CIVIL OFFICIALS.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 106. It shall be lawful for any civil officer having authority +under the laws of the United States, or of any State, Territory, +District, or possession of the United States, to arrest offenders, +summarily to arrest a deserter from the military service of the +United States and deliver him into the custody of the military +authorities of the United States. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>SOLDIERS TO MAKE GOOD TIME LOST.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 107. Every soldier who in an existing or subsequent enlistment +deserts the service of the United States or without proper authority +absents himself from his organization, station, or duty for more +than one day, or who is confined for more than one day under +sentence, or while awaiting trial and disposition of his case, +if the trial results in conviction, or through the intemperate +use of drugs or alcoholic liquor, or through disease or injury +the result at his own misconduct, renders himself unable for more +than one day to perform duty, shall be liable to serve, after +his return to a full-duty status, for such period as shall, with +the time he may have served prior to such desertion, unauthorized +absence, confinement, or inability to perform duty, amount to +the full term of that part of his enlistment period which he is +required to serve with his organization before being furloughed +to the Army Reserve. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>SOLDIERS--SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 108. No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the military +service of the United States, shall be discharged from said service +without a certificate of discharge, signed by a field officer of +the regiment or other organization to which the enlisted man +belongs or by the commanding officer when no such field officer +is present; and no enlisted man shall be discharged from said +service before his term of service has expired, except by order +of the President, the Secretary of War, the commanding officer +of a department, or by sentence of a general Court-martial. +</p> + +<p class="center"> +<b>OATH OF ENLISTMENT.</b> +</p> + +<p class="indent"> +ART. 109. At the time of his enlistment every soldier shall take +the following oath or affirmation: "I, ----, do solemnly swear +(or affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance to the +United States of America; that I will serve them honestly and +faithfully against all their enemies whomsoever; and that I will +obey the orders of the President of the United States and the +orders of the officers appointed over me, according to the Rules +and Articles of War," This oath or affirmation may be taken before +any officer. +</p> + +<h2><a name="XV">CHAPTER XV.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<p class="center">COMMON WORDS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Afternoon (this)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cet après-midi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Army (an)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une armée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bandage</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bandage.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bath</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bain.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bayonet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une baïonnette.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bed</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un lit.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Blanket</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une couverture.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Boy</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un garçon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bullet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une balle.<br> + un pruneau (soldier slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Camp</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un camp.<br> + Un campement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cartridge</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une cartouche.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Child</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un enfant.<br> + Une enfant.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cook</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un cuisinier.<br> + Un cuistot (slang).<br> + Une Cuisinière (fem.).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dance</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bal.<br> + Une danse (one dance).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dark</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Obscur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Day</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un jour.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dead</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mort.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Deserter</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un déserteur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Door</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une porte.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Farm</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une ferme.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Firearms</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des armes à + feu.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une pièce de + campagne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Flag</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un drapeau.<br> + Un étendard (standard).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Forest</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une forêt.<br> + Un bois (woods).<br> + Un boqueteau (clump of trees).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Friend</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un ami.<br> + Une amie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Girl</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une jeune fille.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Guide</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un guide.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un fusil.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Halt!</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Halte!</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hand</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une main.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hat</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un chapeau.<br> + Un képi (cap).<br> + Un casque (helmet).<br> + Un feutre (campaign hat).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Head</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La tête.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Headquarters</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le + quartier-général.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Horse</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un cheval.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Interpreter</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un interprète.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Knife</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un couteau.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Lake</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un lac.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Man</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un homme.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Meat</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">De la viande.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Name</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un nom.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Night</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La nuit.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Noon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Midi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Machine gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une mitrailleuse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Mess call</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La soupe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Password</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le mot de passe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Pay</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le prêt (enlisted men).<br> + La solde (officers).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Prisoner</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un prisonnier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Recruit</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une recrue.<br> + Un bleu (slang).<br> + Un bleuet (slang).<br> + Un blanc-bec (slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Restaurant</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un restaurant.<br> + Un cafe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Road</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un chemin.<br> + Une route.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Retreat</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La retraite.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Reveille</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le réveil.<br> + La diane.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Saber</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sabre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Saddle</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une selle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shoe</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des chaussures (shoes in + general).<br> + Des souliers (low shoes).<br> + Des bottines (high shoes)<br> + Des brodequins (marching shoes).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shotgun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un fusil de cirasse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sick</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Malade.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Soup</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une soup.<br> + Un potage.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Spy</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un espion.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Supper</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sourer.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sword</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une épée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Tent</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une tente.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shelter tent</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une tente-abri.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">NUMERALS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un, une.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Two</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Deux.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Three</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Trois.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Four</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Five</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cinq(pronounce + <i>sank</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Six</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Six (pronounce + <i>cease</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Seven</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Sept (pronounce + <i>set</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eight</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Huit (pronounce + <i>weet</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Nine</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Neuf.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Ten</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dix (pronounce + <i>deess</i>)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eleven</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Onze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Twelve</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Douze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thirteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Treize.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fourteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatorze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fifteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quinze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sixteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Seize.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Seventeen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dix-sept.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eighteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dix-huit.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Nineteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dix-neuf.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Twenty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Vingt (pronounce + <i>vant</i>.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Twenty-one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Vingt-et-un.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thirty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Trente.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thirty-one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Trente-et-un.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thirty-two</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Trente-deux.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Forty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quarante.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fifty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cinquante.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sixty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Soixante.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Seventy</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Soixante-dix.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Seventy-one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Soixante-et-onze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Seventy-two</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Soixante-douze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eighty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatre-vingt.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eighty-one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatre-vingt-un.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Ninety</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatre-vingt-dix.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Ninety-one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quatre-vingt-onze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One hundred</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cent.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One hundred and one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cent un.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Two hundred</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Deux cents.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Two hundred and one</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Deux cent un.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One thousand</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mille.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Two thousand</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Deux mille.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One thousand one hundred</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mille cent; onze + cents.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thousands of soldiers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des milliers de + soldats.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A million</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un million.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Two million men</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Deux millions + d'hommes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A score</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une vingtaine.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">About forty men</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une quarantaine + d'hommes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hundreds of men</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des centaines + d'hommes.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 cent</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sou; cinq + centimes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">10 cents</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dix sous; cinquante + centimes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">20 cents (about)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un francs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 dollar</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cinq francs.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; bank +notes of 50 francs, 100 francs, and higher. The gold pieces are +probably replaced by bank notes now.) +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 meter (1.0936 yards)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un mètre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 kilometer (0.62138 + mile)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un kilomètre.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE:--For all ordinary purposes, the "kilomètre" = +5/8 of a mile; the "centimètre" = 4/10 of an inch. +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 league (2.48552 miles)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une lieue.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 hectare (2.4711 acres)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un hectare.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 gram (15.43239 grains + troy)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un gramme.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1 kilogram (2.204621 pounds + avoirdupois)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un kilogramme.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">220.46 pounds avoirdupois</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un quintal; 100 kilos.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une tonne; 1,000 kilos.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +(Coal is sold by the <i>tonne</i>; grain and hay by the +<i>quintal</i>. Dix quintaux de blé, de foin = 10 +quintals of grain, of hay.) +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">1,0567 quart (liquid)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un litre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">26.417 gallons</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un hectolitre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">0.9081 quart (dry)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un litre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">2.8379 bushels</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un hectolitre.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +(The <i>litre</i>, which is the principal unit of both fluid +and dry measures, is the contents of 1 cubic +<i>décimètre</i> (décimètre = 1/10 +mètre).) +</p> + +<p class="center">DAYS, MONTHS, AND SEASONS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sunday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dimanche.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Monday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Lundi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Tuesday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mardi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Wednesday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mercredi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thursday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Jeudi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Friday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Vendredi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Saturday</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Samedi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">January</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Janvier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">February</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Février.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">March</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mars.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">April</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Avril.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">May</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Mai.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">June</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Juin.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">July</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Juillet.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">August</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Août (pronounce + <i>oo</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">September</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Septembre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">October</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Octobre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">November</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Novembre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">December</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Décembre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The seasons</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les saisons.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Winter</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'hiver.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Spring</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le printemps.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Summer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'été.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fall</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'automne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Year</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un an; une + année.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Month</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un mois.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Week</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un semaine.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Day</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un jour.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hour</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un heure.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Minute</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un minute.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Second</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une seconde.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">COMMON PHRASES.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td>Good morning, sir, madam, miss<br> + Good afternoon</td> + <td class="right"><span class="big">}</span></td></tr> + </table></td> + <td class="half">Bonjour, monsieur, madame, + mademoiselle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Good evening, sir</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Bonsoir, monsieur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Good night, sir</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Bonne nuit, + monsieur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Pardon me</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Pardon; je vous demande + pardon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Don't mention it</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je vous en prie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How do you do?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Comment allez-vous?<br> + Comment ça va?<br> + Comment vous portez-voue?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Very well, thank you</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Très bien, merci.<br> + Je vais bien, merci.<br> + Ça va bien, merci.<br> + Je me porte bien, merci.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Do not trouble yourself</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Ne vous gênez pas.<br> + Ne vous dérangez pas.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am very glad to see you</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je suis bien aise de vous voir.<br> + Je suis content (heureux) de + vous voir.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">What time is it?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quelle heure est-it?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">It is 10 o'clock</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Il est dix heures.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Take care; look out</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Prenez garde.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Do not bother me</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Ne me dérangez pas.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Stop here</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Arrêtez-vous ici.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Does Mr. -- live here?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">M. -- demeure-t-il ici?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Come in</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Entrez.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">You are very kind</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Voue êtes très + aimable.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">At what time does the first + train start?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">A quelle heure part le premier + train?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">What is the name of this + station?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Comment s'appelle cette station + (gare)?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I want</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je désire; Je veux + (stronger).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I do not want it</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je n'en veux pas.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Let me know what I owe you</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Dites-moi ce que je vous + dois.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are you not mistaken?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Ne faites-vous pas erreur?<br> + Ne vous trompez-vous pas?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Please give me</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Veuillez me donner.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Move on</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Avancez.<br> + Circulez. (Policeman.)</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I want something to eat</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je désire quelque chose à + manger.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where is it?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Où est-ce?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Go and look for it</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Allez le chercher.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Take this letter to the post + office</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Portez cette lettre à la + poste.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How much is it?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Combien?<br> + Combien cela coûte-t-il?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">It is dear</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">C'est cher.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Thank you</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Merci.<br> + Je vous en remercie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Don't mention it</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Il n'y a pas de quoi.<br> + De rien.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Allow me to present my friend + ----</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Permettez-moi de vous + présénter mon ami ----.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am glad to make your + acquaintance.</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je suis enchanté de faire votre + connaissance.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How far is it?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">A quelle distance est-ce?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">What can I do for you?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Que puis-je faire pour vous?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Do you speak English?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Parlez-vous anglais?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I do not speak French very + well.</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je ne parle pas très bien le + français.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where do you come from?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">D'où venez-vous?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How did you come?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Comment êtes-vous venu?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">On foot, in a carriage, in + an auto, by rail, by boat, on a bicycle, on horseback, in an + aeroplane.</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">A pied, eu voiture, en auto, en + chemin de fer, en bateau, à bicyclette, à cheval, en + aéroplane.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">MILITARY TITLES, RANKS, AND GRADES.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">General officers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les officers + généraux.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">General Staff</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'état-major + général.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field officers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les officers + supérieurs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Company officers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les officers subalternes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Enlisted men</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les hommes de troupe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Noncommissioned officers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les sous-officiers.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Private soldiers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les simples soldats.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Colonel</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le colonel (addressed[14] + as "Mon colonel").</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Major</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le commandant ("Mon + commandant").</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Captain</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le capitaine ("Mon + capitaine").<br> + Le piston (slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">First lieutenant</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">lieutenant (en premier) + ("Mon lieutenant").</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Second Lieutenant</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sous-lieutenant ("Mon + lieutenant").</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A doctor</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un (médecin) + major.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A sergeant</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sergent (addressed as + "Sergent").<br> + Un maréchal des logis (mounted service).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A corporal</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un caporal ("Caporal").<br> + Un brigadier (mounted service).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A private</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un simple soldat.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A body of troops</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une troupe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">French troops</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des troupes + françaises.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A wagoner</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un conducteur.<br> + Un fourgonnier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A horseshoer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un + maréchal-ferrant.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A saddler</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sellier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A signaler</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un signaleur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A deserter</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un déserteur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0> + <tr><td rowspan=8 valign="top">A soldier of </td> + <td>Infantry</td></tr> + <tr><td>Cavalry</td></tr> + <tr><td>Artillery</td></tr> + <tr><td>Engineers</td></tr> + <tr><td>Quartermaster Corps</td></tr> + <tr><td>Signal Corps</td></tr> + <tr><td>Hospital Corps</td></tr> + <tr><td>Line of Communications</td></tr> + </table></td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td>Un fantassin.</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un cavalier.</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un artilleur.</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un sapeur-mineur</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un homme de l'intendance.</td></tr> + <tr><td> + Un homme du corps des signaux.</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un infirmier.</td></tr> + <tr><td>Un garde des voies et communications, + G. V. C.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Infantry</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'infanterie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cavalry</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La cavalarie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Artillery</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'artillerie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Engineers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le genie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Signal Corps</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le corps des signaux.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hospital Corps</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le corps de santé.<br> + Le service de santé.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Aviation Corps</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le corps d'aviation.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 14: See note at the end of Chapter XV.] +</p> + +<p class="center">MILITARY TERMS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The headquarters</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le quartier + général.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le train des + équipages.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Railway service</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le service des chemins de + fer.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Telegraph service</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le service des + télégraphes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Rural guards</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La gendarmerie.<br> +Des gendarmes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A paymaster</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un trésorier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A chaplain</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un aumônier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An army</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une armée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">General So-and-so's army</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'armée--(l'armée + Foch).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An army corps</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un corps d'armée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A division</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une division.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A brigade</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une brigade.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A regiment</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un régiment.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A battalion</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bataillon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A company</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une compagnie.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A platoon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un peloton.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A section</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une section.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A squad</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une escouade.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A detachment</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un détachement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Barracks</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une caserne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A camp</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un camp (more or less + permanent).<br> + Un campement (temporary).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A cantonment</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un cantonnement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Line</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">(Une) ligne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Column</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">(Une) colonne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">As skirmishers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">En tirailleurs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Follow me, as skirmishers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">A moi, en tirailleurs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Scouts</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des éclaireurs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A patrol</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une patrouille.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The advance guard</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'avant-garde.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The rear guard</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'arrière-garde.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Flankers</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des flanc-gardes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The main body</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le gros (de la colonne).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Combat train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le train de combat.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le train régimentaire.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Outposts</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des avant-postes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cossack posts</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des avant-postes à la + cosaque.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A sentinel</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une sentinelle.<br> + Un factionnaire.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">On post</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">En faction.<br> + De faction.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Guard mounting</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La garde montante (also + <i>new guard</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half"> + The sentinel challenges: "Halt! Who's there?"</td> + <td class="half"> + <table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> + <tr><td><span class="big">}</span></td> + <td>La sentinelle crie: "Halte! Qui vive?"</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The answer is "France"</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La réponse est: + "France".</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Advance with the countersign</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Avance au ralliement.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +(The person challenged gives the <i>mot d'ordre</i>, which is the +name of some general, and the sentinel replies with the <i>mot de +ralliement</i>. which is the name of a battle or a city). +</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Go away; you can't pass</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">(Passe) au large.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Halt, or I fire</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Halte, ou je fais feu.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Put down your arms</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Déposez vos armes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hands up!</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Levez les bras.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Face about</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">(Faites) demi-tour.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Come here</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Venez ici.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A spy</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un espion.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A flag of truce</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un drapeau blanc.<br> + Un drapeau parlementaire.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">UNIFORM, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Clothing</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les vêtements, + l'habillement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Change your clothes</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Changez de + vêtement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Overcoat (worn by French + infantry)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une capote.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Trouser</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un pantalon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Breeches</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une culotte.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shirt</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une chemise.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Blouse</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un dolman, une vareuse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cap</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un képi.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Campaign hat (United + States)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un (chapeau de) feutre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Helmet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un casque (de + tranchée).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cap without visor worn by + French off duty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bonnet de police.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Tam-o'-Shanter worn by + Alpine chasseurs</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un béret.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shoes in general</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des chaussures.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Service shoes</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des brodequins.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Leggins</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des guêtres.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Wrap putties</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des bandes + molletières.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Leather putties</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des houseaux (or + housseaux).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Full-dress uniform</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La grande tenue.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dress uniform</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La petite tenue.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field uniform</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La tenue de campagne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Overcoat (mounted men)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un manteau.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Overcoat (officers)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un manteau.<br> + Un manteau-capote.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fatigue coat</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le bourgeron.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fatigue trousers (overalls)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un pantalon de treillis.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fatigue uniform</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La tenue de corvée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Magazine rifle</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un fusil à + répétition.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The barrel</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le canon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The bolt</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le verrou.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The ramrod</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La baguette.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The butt</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La crosse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The gun sling</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La bretelle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The trigger</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La détente.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Rear sight</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La hausse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Front sight</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le guidon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A bayonet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une baïonnette.<br> + Rosalie (slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Ball cartridge</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une cartouche à + balle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Blank cartridge</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une cartouche à + blanc.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dummy cartridge</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une fausse cartouche.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Belt</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un ceinturon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cartridge box</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une cartouchière.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">First-aid packet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un paquet de pansement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The pack</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sac.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A haversack</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un étui-musette.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Canteen</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bidon.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Tin cup</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un quart.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Mess can</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une gamelle.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Equipment</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'équipement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Compass</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une boussole.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field glasses</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des jumelles (de + campagne).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Whistle</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sifflet.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Revolver</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un revolver.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">QUESTIONS ABOUT THE ROADS, ETC.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half">Pardon me, sir, do you + speak English?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Pardon, monsieur, parlez-vous anglais?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">(German, French, Italian, + Russian)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">(Allemand, français, italien, + russe).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">All right, then show me, please, the + road to ----</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Très bien, alors indiquez-moi; je vous prie, + le chemin de ----</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is it far from here?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Est-ce loin d'ici?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How long does it take to go + there?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Combien faut-il de temps pour + y aller?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How many kilomètres</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Combien de + kilomètres?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is there a short cut? + (road)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il un chemin de + traverse?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is there a short cut? + (trail)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il un sentier plus + court?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where does this road go?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Où mène cette + route?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Are we on the right road to go to + ----?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Sommes-nous sur le bon chemin pour aller à + ----?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Does this road go through + Compiègne?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Cette route passe-t-elle par + Compiègne?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Shall we find any villages on our + road?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Trouverons-nous des villages sur notre + chemin?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Are there any other roads going + to ----?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Y a-t-il d'autres chemins pour aller à + ----?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is this road in good + condition?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cette route est-elle en + bon état?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are there hills?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il des côtes + (des coteaux)?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are they steep?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Sont-elles raides?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Does the road go through open or + wooded country?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>La route traverse-t-elle un pays découvert + ou boisé?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can we get through with artillery?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Peut-on passer avec de l'artillerie?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can we get through with heavily loaded + wagons (auto trucks)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Peut-on passer avec de grosses voitures + chargées (avec des camions-automobiles)?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Is this road practicable for + artillery?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Cette route est-elle praticable pour + l'artillerie?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can infantry march on the + sides of the roads?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>L'infanterie peut-elle marcher sur les + côtés de la route?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is the ground + practicable?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le terrain est-il + praticable?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is the ground marshy?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le terrain est-il + marécageux?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">What is the nature of the + ground?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Quelle est la nature du + sol?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Does the telegraph line follow this road + as far as X</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Est-ce que la ligne télégraphique + (le télégraphe) suit cette route + jusqu'à X?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where does your railroad + come from?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">D'où vient votre chemin + de fer?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where does it go to?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Où va-t-il?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Is it single tracked or double tracked + the whole way?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Est-il à une voie ou à deux voies sur + tout le parcours?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Where is the station? is it + Far?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Où est la gare? Est-elle + loin d'ici?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">How can the river be crossed?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Comment peut-on passer la + rivière?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is there a bridge? a ferry?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il un pont? un bac?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are there fords?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il des passages à + gué (des gués)?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Can we get boats?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Peut-on trouver des + bateaux?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">In that wood are there clearings, ravines, + brooks, marshes, pools?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Dans ce bois, y a-t-il des clairières, des ravins, + des ruisseaux, des mares?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Are there any places near here for watering + horses?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Y a-t-il des endroits près d'ici pour abreuver les + chevaux?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is the water good?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'eau est-elle bonne?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Is this water drinkable?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Est-ce de l'eau potable?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are there watering troughs?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il des abreuvoirs?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Where is there good grass for animals?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Où y a-t-il de bonne herbe pour les + animaux?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Can we buy provisions?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Peut-on acheter des vivres?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Is there a field where we can camp?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Y a-t-il un champ où nous pouvons camper (installer + notre campement)?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can you give me any information about the + enemy?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Pouvez-vous me donner des renseignements sur + l'ennemi?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Please find me a guide who knows the + country?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Veuillez me trouver un guide qui connaisse le + pays.?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">We are going to follow this + trail (tracks)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Nous allons suivre cette + piste.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Crossroads</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un carrefour.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">TOWNS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half">Where is the post-office and telegraph + office?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Où est le bureau des postes et + télégraphes?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">The postmaster</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Le directeur des postes et + télégraphes.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The mail</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le courrier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">When was the last mail + distributed?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>A quelle heure a-t-on fait la derrière + distribution?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">General delivery</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Poste restante.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Are there any letters + for ----?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Y a-t-il des lettres pour + ----?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">I should like to send a telegram</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Je voudrais expédier un + télégramme.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Have you received a telegram for + ----?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Avez-vous reçu un télégramme (une + dépêche) pour ----?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A telegraph instrument</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un appareil + (télégraphique).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can you tell me where the mayor's office + is?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Pourriez-vous me dire où se trouve la + mairie?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">I couldn't tell you; I am a stranger + here</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Je ne saurais vous renseigner; je ne connais pas la + ville.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Good-morning, sir, are you the mayor?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Bonjour, Monsieur, êtes-vous le maire?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">No, sir, I am his assistant</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Non, Monsieur, je suis son + adjoint.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">I should like to speak to the mayor + himself</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Je voudrais parler au maire lui-même.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Listen, sir. A detachment will arrive here + to-morrow morning at 5 o'clock</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Ecoutez, monsieur; Un détachement arrivera ici + demain matin à cinq heures.</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">Can you arrange to lodge 2,000 men for two + days?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>Pouvez-vous prendre de dispositions pour loger 2,000 + hommes pendant deux jours?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A policeman</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un sergent de ville, un agent de + la paix.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">RAILROADS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The station agent</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le chef de gare.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The conductor</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le conducteur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The engineer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le mécanicien.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The fireman</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le chauffeur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The brakeman</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le serre-freins.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The telegraph operator</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le + télégraphiste.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An engine</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une locomotive.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Passenger cars</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des wagons (de + voyageurs).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Flat cars</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des trucks.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Box cars</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des wagons de + marchandises.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Stock cars</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des wagons à + bestiaux.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An express train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un train express.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A through train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un train direct.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A local train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un train omnibus.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A passenger train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un train de + voyageurs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A freight train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un train de + marchandises.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">To entrain the troops</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Embarquer les + troupes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">To detrain the troops</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Débarquer les + troupes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">To get on a train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Monter dans un train.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">To get off a train</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Descendre d'un train.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The railroad track</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La-voie + (ferrée).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A side track</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une voie de garage.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A ticket</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un billet.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A round trip ticket</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un billet d'aller et + retour.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">One way only</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Aller seulement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The ticket window</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le guichet.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half">At what time does the Paris train + start?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top"> + <table summary="" border=0> + <tr><td><span class="big">{</span></td> + <td>A quelle heure part le train pour Paris?</td></tr> + </table></td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">It is late (15 minutes + late)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Il est en retard (de quinze + minutes).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Do we have to change + cars?</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Faut-il changer de + train?</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The train stops</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le train + s'arrête.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">All aboard!</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">En voiture!</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The train starts</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le train + s'ébranle.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">RATIONS AND FOOD.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Provisions (in general)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Les vivre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The ration</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La ration.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fresh beef</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">De la viande fraîche.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bacon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du lard.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Flour</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">De la farine.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Soft bread</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du pain frais.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Hard bread (crackers)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du biscuit.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Field bread</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du pain de guerre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Corn meal</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">De la farine de maïs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Coffee</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du café.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Sugar</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du sucre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Eggs</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des oeufs.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Chickens</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des poulets.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Potatoes</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des pommes de terre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Peas</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des pois.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">String beans</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des haricots verts.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Vegetables (in general)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des légumes.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An apple</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une pomme.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A pear</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une poire.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A cherry</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une cerise.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A peach</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une pêche.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Cheese</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du fromage.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Wine</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du vin.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Beer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">De la bière.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A glass of beer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un bock.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am hungry</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">J'ai faim.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bring me something to eat + please</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Apportez-moi quelque chose + à manger, s'il vous-plaît.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am thirsty</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">J'ai soif.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Please give me a glass of + Water</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Veuillez me donner un verre + d'eau.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Garçon, je désire un + bifteck.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Some black coffee</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du café noir.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Coffee with milk</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du café au lait.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Rolls</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des petits pains.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Crescent rolls</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Des croissants.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">HOSPITALS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A field hospital</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une ambulance.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A hospital (in general)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un hôpital (plural: des + hôpitaux).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A dressing station</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un poste de secours.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A first-aid dressing</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un pansement sommaire.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Red Cross</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La Croix Rouge.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A doctor</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un médecin.<br> + Un docteur.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A surgeon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un chirurgien.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A military surgeon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un (médecin) + major.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Assistant surgeon</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un aide-major.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A male nurse, hospital + corps man</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un infirmier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A female nurse</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une infirmière.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">An ambulance</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une ambulance.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A stretcher (litter)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un brancard.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A litter bearer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un brancardier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A roll of bandages</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un rouleau de bandage.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A first-aid packet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un paquet de pansement.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A wounded man</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un blessé.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am sick</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je suis malade.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I have a fever</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">J'ai la fièvre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I have chills and fever</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">J'ai des frissons de + fièvre.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I am constipated</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Je suis constipé.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">I have diarrhea</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">J'ai la diarrhée.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">POINTS OF THE COMPASS.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">North</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le nord.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">South</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sud.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">East</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'est.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">West</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">L'ouest.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Northeast</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le nord-est.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Southeast</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sud-est.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Northwest</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le nord-ouest.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Southwest</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le sud-ouest.</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">TRENCH WARFARE.</p> + +<table summary="" border=0 cellspacing=0 cellpadding=0 width="100%"> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Trench warfare</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">La guerre des tranchées.<br> + La guerre de position.<br> + La guerre de taupe (<i>moles</i>).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Trench</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une tranchée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Communication trench</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un boyau (de + communication).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">The parapet</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Le parapet.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A loophole</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un créneau.<br> +Une meurtrière.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A grenade</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une grenade.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">A grenadier, bomber</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un grenadier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Barbed wire</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Du fil de fer barbelé.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Barbed wire entanglement</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un réseau de fils de fer + barbelés.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Trench mortar</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un mortier.<br> + Un crapouillaud.<br> + <i>Minenwerfer</i> (German).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Bomb</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une bombe.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Howitzer</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un obusier.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Machine gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une mitrailleuse.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Fieldpiece</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une pièce de + campagne.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">75 millimeter field gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une pièce de + soixante-quinze.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Siege gun</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Une piece de + siège.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">120 long</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cent vingt long.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">120 short</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Cent vingt court.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">77 (German)</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Soixante-dix-sept + (allemand).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shell</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un obus.<br> + Une marmite (slang).<br> + Un colis à domicile (slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Shrapnel</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un shrapnell.<br> + Un rageur (slang).</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Periscope</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un périscope.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Trench knife</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un couteau de + tranchée.</td></tr> +<tr><td class="half" valign="top">Dugout</td> + <td class="half" valign="top">Un abri dans les + tranchées.<br> + Un cagibi (slang).<br> + Une cagna (slang).<br> + Un gourbi (slang).<br> + Une guitoune (slang).</td></tr> +</table> + +<p class="indent"> +NOTE.--In addressing an officer of grade superior to his own, an +officer must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing +a junior uses the title of the grade only. Thus: A major to a +colonel says "Mon colonel," but the colonel to the major would +say "Commandant." +</p> + +<h2><a name="APPENDIX">APPENDIX.</a></h2> + +<p class="subtitle"> +FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT. +</p> + +<hr class="bar"> + +<pre><i> + <b>Last Will and Testament</b> + OF + + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + ------ + I, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +do make, publish, and declare this my last will and testament. + I give, devise, and bequeath to[15] . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +And I do give, devise, and bequeath all the rest and residue of +my estate, both real and personal, to . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +heirs and assigns forever[16] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +I hereby appoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . executor of +this my last will and testament, and I desire that . . . . . . +shall not be required to give bond for the performance of that +office. + Witness my hand this[17] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +day of . . . . . . . . . . . . , 191 + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Signed, published, and declared by . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +the above-named testator, as and for his last will and testament, +in the presence of us, who, at his request and in his presence, +and in the presence of each other, have subscribed our names +as witnesses thereto.[18] + + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Residence: . . . . . . . . . . +</i></pre> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 15: Here insert specific legacies and devises.] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 16: If the residue of the estate is given to several +persons, add here the manner in which it is to be divided, as +"in equal shares as tenants in common."] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 17: If the will is made in Nevada, or if the testator +has real estate in that State, he should affix his seal.] +</p> + +<p class="footnote"> +[Footnote 18: If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it is +wholly in the handwriting of the testator, there should be seven +witnesses and a notary at the "sealing up." If wholly in his +handwriting no formalities are required.] +</p> + +<h2>INDEX.</h2> + +<p> +Abbreviations on maps<br> +Advance guards<br> +Advance party of advance guard<br> +Advice to riflemen<br> +Aiming rifle<br> +Alignments<br> +Ammunition<br> +Arm signals<br> +Arms. (<i>See</i> Field kit.)<br> +Articles of War:<br> + Extracts from<br> + Reading<br> +Assembling Infantry Equipment<br> +Ball cartridges<br> +Battle sight<br> +Bayonet:<br> + Charge<br> + Description of<br> + Fix<br> + Unfix<br> +Bayonet, manual of:<br> + Attacks<br> + Combat<br> + Combined movements<br> + Defenses<br> + Fencing exercises<br> + Foot movements<br> + General rules<br> + Instruction without bayonet<br> + Instruction with rifle<br> + Instruction without rifle<br> + Suggestions for fencing at will<br> +Blank cartridges<br> +Blanket roll<br> +Blanks, message<br> +Blisters<br> +Bugle signals<br> +Calling the shot<br> +Camp:<br> + Making camp<br> + Service and duties<br> +Care of feet<br> +Care of rifle<br> +Cartridges:<br> + Ball<br> + Blank<br> + Dummy<br> + Guard<br> +Cleaning pistol<br> +Cleaning rifle<br> +Close order, company drill<br> +Clothing. (<i>See</i> Uniforms.)<br> +Coast Artillery companies<br> +Codes used in signaling<br> + General service code (International Morse code)<br> + Two-arm semaphore code<br> + Wig-wag code<br> + Letter codes--<br> + Cavalry<br> + Field Artillery<br> + Infantry<br> +Combat<br> + Exercises<br> +Commander of the guard<br> +Commands, Infantry Drill Regulations<br> +Company inspection<br> +Company, school of:<br> + Close order drill--<br> + Alignment<br> + At ease and route step<br> + Facing or marching to the rear<br> + Front into line<br> + Movements on fixed pivot<br> + Movements on the moving pivot<br> + On right (left) into line<br> + Rules<br> + To diminish the front of a column of +squads<br> + To dismiss company<br> + To form the company<br> + Division of company<br> + Extended order drill--<br> + Deployments<br> + Rules for deployment<br> + The advance<br> + The company acting alone<br> + The company in support<br> + The fire attack<br> + Fire--<br> + Classes of firing<br> + Fire control<br> + Fire direction<br> + Fire discipline<br> + General rules<br> + Ranges<br> + The target<br> + Instruction<br> + Position of officers, noncommissioned officers, +guides, etc.<br> + Position of platoons and squads<br> +Compliments from guards<br> +Contours<br> +Conventional signs on maps<br> +Cooking, individual<br> +Coordination in firing rifle<br> +Corporal of the guard<br> +Cossack post<br> +Course in small-arms firing<br> +Courtesies in conversation<br> +Courtesy, military<br> +Cover, use of<br> +Datum plane on maps<br> +Definition, Infantry Drill Regulations<br> +Details and rosters, interior guards<br> +Directions on maps<br> +Discipline<br> + Fire discipline<br> +Distances on maps<br> +Drill (<i>See</i> Infantry Drill Regulations):<br> + Close order<br> + Extended order<br> + General rules<br> +Drill regulations, all arms<br> +Dummy cartridges<br> +Engineer companies<br> +English-French vocabularies<br> +Enlistment oath<br> +Equipment:<br> + Assembling<br> + Part of<br> +Extended order drill<br> +Facings<br> +Feet, care of<br> +Field exercises<br> +Field kit<br> +Field message blanks<br> +Field service:<br> + Advance guard<br> + Advance party<br> + Patrols<br> + Point<br> + Reserve<br> + Support<br> + Combat<br> + Flank guards<br> + Outposts--<br> + Cossack posts<br> + Duties of<br> + Line of observation<br> + Line of resistance<br> + March outpost<br> + Outguards<br> + Patrols<br> + Pickets<br> + Reserves<br> + Sentinels<br> + Sentry squads<br> + Supports<br> + Patrolling<br> + Principles of Infantry training<br> + Rear guards<br> + Rifle trenches<br> +Field Service Regulations<br> +Fire:<br> + Control<br> + Direction<br> + Ranges<br> + Rapid firing<br> + Targets<br> +Firing positions<br> +Firing with rests<br> +First-aid rules<br> +Flag signals<br> +Flank guards<br> +Formations, general rules<br> +Forage ration<br> +Form for last will and testament<br> +French-English vocabulary<br> +General service code<br> +Grain ration<br> +Ground forms on maps<br> +Guard cartridges<br> +Guard duty (extracts from Manual of Interior):<br> + Classification of interior guards<br> + Color sentinels<br> + Commander of the guard<br> + Compliments from guards<br> + Corporal of the guard<br> + Countersigns<br> + Details<br> + Flags<br> + Guard mounting<br> + Formal<br> + Informal<br> + Guard patrols<br> + Guarding prisoners<br> + Introduction<br> + Musician of the guard<br> + Orderlies<br> + Orders for sentinels<br> + Paroles<br> + Prisoners<br> + Privates of the guard<br> + Relieving the old guard<br> + Retreat gun<br> + Reveille gun<br> + Rosters<br> + Sergeant of the guard<br> + Watchmen<br> +Guard mounting<br> + Formal<br> + Informal<br> +Gun sling, use of<br> +Hashures on map<br> +Hygiene, personal<br> +Individual cooking<br> + Recipes<br> +Infantry Drill Regulations, extracts from:<br> + Company inspection<br> + Definitions<br> + General rules for drills and formations<br> + Introduction<br> + Manual of the bayonet<br> + Manual of tent pitching<br> + Orders, commands, and signals<br> + School of the company<br> + School of the soldier<br> + School of the squad<br> +Infantry equipment, assembling<br> +Infantry training principles<br> +Insignia:<br> + Noncommissioned officers<br> + Officers<br> +Inspection:<br> + Company<br> +Interior guard duty, Manual of. (<i>See</i> Guard duty.)<br> +International Morse code<br> +Intrenching tools<br> +Kit. (<i>See</i> Field kit; Service kit; Surplus kit.)<br> +Laws governing Army<br> +Line of observation<br> +Line of resistance<br> +Loading and firings<br> +Loyalty<br> +Making maps<br> +Manual of arms<br> +Manual of the Bayonet. (<i>See</i> Bayonet, Manual of.)<br> +Manual of Interior Guard Duty. (<i>See</i> Guard duty.)<br> +Manual of Tent Pitching. (<i>See</i> Tent Pitching, Manual +of.)<br> +Maps:<br> + Abbreviations<br> + Contours<br> + Datum plane<br> + Directions<br> + Distances<br> + Ground forms<br> + Hashures<br> + Making (sketching)<br> + Orienting<br> + Reading<br> + Ridges<br> + Scales<br> + Signs<br> + Slopes<br> + Stream lines<br> + Valleys<br> + Vertical intervals<br> +Marching<br> + Preparation for<br> +Marksmanship, preliminary training<br> +Message blanks<br> +Metal fouling solution for cleaning rifle<br> +Military courtesy<br> +Morse, international code. (<i>See</i> General service +code.)<br> +National Anthem<br> +Noncommissioned officers:<br> + Corporal of guard<br> + Insignia<br> + Precedence<br> + Rank<br> + Sergeant of guard<br> +Oath of enlistment<br> +Obedience<br> +Observation, line of. (<i>See</i> Line of observation.)<br> +Officers:<br> + Insignia<br> + Precedence<br> + Rank<br> +Orders:<br> + How obeyed<br> + Infantry Drill Regulations<br> +Orienting maps<br> +Outguards<br> +Outposts<br> +Pack<br> + Close<br> + Open<br> +Patrolling<br> +Patrols:<br> + Advance guards<br> + Outpost<br> +Peep sight<br> +Personal hygiene<br> +Pickets<br> +Point of advance guard<br> +Pistol:<br> + Cleaning<br> + Practice<br> +Pivots:<br> + Turn on fixed<br> + Turn on moving<br> +Position of the soldier<br> +Precedence:<br> + Noncommissioned officers<br> + Officers<br> +Principles of Infantry training<br> +Prisoners<br> +Privates of the guards<br> +Range estimators<br> +Rank:<br> + Noncommissioned officers<br> + Officers<br> +Rapid firing<br> +Rations:<br> + Carried on person<br> + Cooking<br> + Emergency<br> + Forage<br> + Grain<br> + Kinds of<br> +Reading maps<br> +Regulations, Army<br> +Regulations, Drill, all arms<br> +Regulations, Field Service<br> +Regulations Governing Army<br> +Relieving the old guard<br> +Reserve:<br> + Of advance guard<br> + Of outpost<br> +Resistance, line of. (<i>See</i> Line of resistance.)<br> +Rests<br> +Retreat gun<br> +Reveille gun<br> +Revolver practice<br> +Ridges on maps<br> +Rifle:<br> + Aiming<br> + Battle sight<br> + Care of<br> + Cleaning<br> + Coordination in firing<br> + Description of<br> + Plate showing principal parts<br> + Sight adjustment<br> + Trenches<br> +Rosters, interior guards<br> +Rules (<i>see</i> First-aid rules):<br> + General Rules for Drills and Formations<br> + Governing saluting<br> +Salutes:<br> + Hand<br> + Rifle<br> + Saber<br> + Sentinels<br> +Saluting<br> + Rules governing<br> +Scales on maps<br> +School of the company. (<i>See</i> Company, school of.)<br> +School of the soldier. (<i>See</i> Soldier, school of.)<br> +School of the squad. (<i>See</i> Squad, school of.)<br> +Semaphore, two-arm signaling code<br> +Sentinels:<br> + Interior guard, orders for<br> + Of outpost<br> +Sentry squad<br> +Sergeant of the guard<br> +Service kit<br> +Shoes<br> +Sights:<br> + Adjustment<br> + Battle sight<br> + Open sight<br> + Peep sight<br> + Table of sight corrections<br> +Signalling, general instructions<br> +Signal flags<br> +Signals:<br> + Arm<br> + Bugle<br> + Enemy in sight<br> + Firing line and reserve<br> + Flag<br> + Other signals<br> + Sound<br> + Take cover<br> + Two arm semaphore<br> + Whistle<br> + Wig-wag<br> +Sketching<br> +Slopes on maps<br> +Small-arms firing course<br> +Socks<br> +Soda solution for cleaning rifle<br> +Soldier, school of:<br> + Duties of instructor<br> + Eyes right or left<br> + Facings<br> + Instruction without arms<br> + Manual of arms<br> + Position of the soldier on attention<br> + Rifle salute<br> + Salute with the hand<br> + Salute with saber<br> + Steps and marchings<br> + Back step<br> + Change step<br> + Quick time<br> + Side step<br> + The half step<br> + To halt<br> + To march by the flank<br> + To march to the rear<br> + To mark time<br> + The bayonet<br> + The inspection<br> + The rests<br> + To dismiss the squad<br> +Solutions for cleaning rifle<br> +Squad, school of:<br> + Alignments<br> + Instruction<br> + Kneeling and lying down<br> + Loadings and firings<br> + Observation<br> + The assembly<br> + The oblique march<br> + The use of cover<br> + To cease firing<br> + To deploy as skirmishers<br> + To fire at will<br> + To fire by clip<br> + To fire by volley<br> + To follow the corporal<br> + To form squad<br> + To increase or diminish intervals<br> + To load<br> + To set the sight<br> + To stack and take arms<br> + To suspend firing<br> + To take intervals and distance<br> + To turn on fixed pivot<br> + To turn on moving pivot<br> + To unload<br> +Star-Spangled Banner<br> +Steps and marchings<br> +Streams lines on maps<br> +Subsistence. (<i>See</i> Rations.)<br> +Support:<br> + Advance guard<br> + Outpost<br> +Surplus kit<br> +Swabbing solution for cleaning rifle<br> +Target practice:<br> + Advice to riflemen<br> + Aiming rifle<br> + Battle sight<br> + Calling the shot<br> + Coordination<br> + Firing positions<br> + Preliminary training in marksmanship<br> + Sight adjustment<br> + Table of sight corrections<br> + Targets<br> + The course in small-arms firing<br> + Trigger squeeze<br> +Targets<br> +Tent Pitching, Manual of:<br> + Conical wall tent<br> + Folding tents<br> + Pitch all type Army tents (except shelter and +conical<br> + wall tents)<br> + Shelter tent<br> + Sleeping bags<br> + Striking tents<br> +Toilet articles<br> +Trenches, rifle<br> +Trigger squeeze<br> +Two-arm semaphore code<br> +Uniforms<br> + Care of<br> + Disposing of<br> + Dress<br> + Full dress<br> + How worn<br> + Service<br> +Use of cover<br> +Valleys on maps<br> +Vertical intervals on maps<br> +Visual signaling (<i>See</i> Signals):<br> + In general<br> + Flag<br> +Vocabulary--English-French<br> +Whistle signals<br> +Wig-wag signaling<br> +Will, form for last will and testament<br> +Windage corrections<br> +Wind gauge +</p> + +<p> </p> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers +and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the United States, 1917, +by War Department + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR INFANTRY *** + +***** This file should be named 10908-h.htm or 10908-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/9/0/10908/ + +Produced by Robert J. Hall + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/10908-h/fig001.jpg b/10908-h/fig001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a6b0df --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig001.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig002.jpg b/10908-h/fig002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..636bc8d --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig002.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig003.jpg b/10908-h/fig003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..78d4bed --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig003.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig004.jpg b/10908-h/fig004.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1cc393 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig004.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig005.jpg b/10908-h/fig005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5de02b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig005.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig006.jpg b/10908-h/fig006.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6de67e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig006.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig007.jpg b/10908-h/fig007.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6bfaa0d --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig007.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig008.jpg b/10908-h/fig008.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec75af0 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig008.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig009.jpg b/10908-h/fig009.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9fdd42f --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig009.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig010.jpg b/10908-h/fig010.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c59380 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig010.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig011.jpg b/10908-h/fig011.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..348c69b --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig011.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig012.jpg b/10908-h/fig012.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..74f4f88 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig012.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig013.jpg b/10908-h/fig013.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..619fa2a --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig013.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig014.jpg b/10908-h/fig014.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..81f100c --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig014.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig015.jpg b/10908-h/fig015.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..87f6f9a --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig015.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig016.jpg b/10908-h/fig016.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7669381 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig016.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig017.jpg b/10908-h/fig017.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f157a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig017.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig018.jpg b/10908-h/fig018.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4a913d --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig018.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig019.jpg b/10908-h/fig019.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f4038f --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig019.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig020.jpg b/10908-h/fig020.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..21e5172 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig020.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig021.jpg b/10908-h/fig021.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f033e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig021.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig022.jpg b/10908-h/fig022.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..389bcfb --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig022.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig023.jpg b/10908-h/fig023.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..102e1ad --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig023.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig024.jpg b/10908-h/fig024.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b3c7a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig024.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig025.jpg b/10908-h/fig025.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d474bbe --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig025.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig026.jpg b/10908-h/fig026.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..432e074 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig026.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig027.jpg b/10908-h/fig027.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e08caf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig027.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig028.jpg b/10908-h/fig028.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5fdf832 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig028.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig029.jpg b/10908-h/fig029.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8f39d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig029.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig030.jpg b/10908-h/fig030.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c67698 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig030.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig031.jpg b/10908-h/fig031.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c4bffd --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig031.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig032.jpg b/10908-h/fig032.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d1c100 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig032.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig033.jpg b/10908-h/fig033.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a922fa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig033.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig034.jpg b/10908-h/fig034.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..464fe6b --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig034.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig035.jpg b/10908-h/fig035.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba1250e --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig035.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig036.jpg b/10908-h/fig036.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6254f30 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig036.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig037.jpg b/10908-h/fig037.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3bd6e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig037.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig038.jpg b/10908-h/fig038.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..33d6f1b --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig038.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig039.jpg b/10908-h/fig039.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d50330c --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig039.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig040.jpg b/10908-h/fig040.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14d18dd --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig040.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig041.jpg b/10908-h/fig041.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5700f73 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig041.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig042.jpg b/10908-h/fig042.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0350532 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig042.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig043.jpg b/10908-h/fig043.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..82b3aa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig043.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig044.jpg b/10908-h/fig044.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14d625a --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig044.jpg diff --git a/10908-h/fig045.jpg b/10908-h/fig045.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddcacac --- /dev/null +++ b/10908-h/fig045.jpg |
